Subaru 2024 Crosstrek Base User Manual

(1,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 4/ 8

Foreword

SFWAA

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this

manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its

operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such

as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the

SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the

nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU

CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next

owner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

(2,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 4/ 8

(3,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 4/ 8

This manual describes the following vehicle type.

(2,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 4/ 8

(1,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Table of Contents

Keys and Doors ........................................................................................................ 107 Chapter 2

Instruments and Controls....................................................................................... 145 Chapter 3

Climate Control ......................................................................................................... 261

Audio ........................................................................................................................... 279 Chapter 5

Interior Equipment ................................................................................................... 281 Chapter 6

Starting and Operating............................................................................................ 305 Chapter 7

Driving Tips ............................................................................................................... 395 Chapter 8

In Case of Emergency ............................................................................................. 425 Chapter 9

Appearance Care ...................................................................................................... 447 Chapter 10

Maintenance and Service ....................................................................................... 455 Chapter 11

Specifications............................................................................................................ 501 Chapter 12

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects .................................... 515 Chapter 13

Index............................................................................................................................ 533 Chapter 14

Chapter 4

Illustrated Index ...........................................................................................................15

Chapter 1Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags ..............................................................................29

Introduction ....................................................................................................................1

(2,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

(3,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

sint

Warranties ........................................................... 2

Warranties for U.S.A. ............................................. 2

Warranties for Canada ........................................... 2

Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ............... 2

How to Use This Owner’s Manual ..................... 2

Using Your Owner’s Manual ................................... 2

Safety Warnings .................................................... 3

Safety Symbol ....................................................... 4

Abbreviation List ................................................... 4

Vehicle Symbols ................................................. 5

Safety Precautions When Driving ..................... 5

Seatbelt and SRS Airbag........................................ 5

Child Safety........................................................... 5

Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide) ................ 6

Drinking and Driving.............................................. 7

Drugs and Driving ................................................. 7

Driving When Tired or Sleepy ................................ 7

Modification of Your Vehicle .................................. 8

Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving ................. 8

Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation

System ............................................................... 8

Driving with Pets................................................... 8

Tire Pressures....................................................... 9

On-Road and Off-Road Driving .............................. 9

Attaching Accessories .......................................... 9

Vehicle Operation.................................................10

General Information ..........................................11

California Perchlorate Advisory ............................ 11

Noise from under the Vehicle ............................... 11

Vehicle Data Recording ........................................ 11

Event Data Recorder ............................................12

Introduction

(4,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Warranties

s00aa

& Warranties for U.S.A.

s00aa01

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of

America, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in the United

States come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranties

. Federal Emission Control Systems

Warranties

. California Emissions Control Sys-

tems Warranties

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

s00aa05

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A.

and Canada

s00aa06

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

How to Use This Owner’s

Manual

s00ab

& Using Your Owner’s Manual

s00ab01

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Introduction

This chapter informs you general informa-

tion before driving.

Illustrated Index

This chapter informs you about the vehicle

layout with illustrations.

Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS

Airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and Doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Warranties

(5,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and how

to use the instruments and other switches.

Chapter 4: Climate Control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio

system.

Chapter 6: Interior Equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and Operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving Tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In Case of Emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance Care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service

This chapter informs you when you need to

take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about the dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer Information and

Reporting Safety Defects

This chapter informs you about Tire

information, Uniform tire quality grading

standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

For EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle

shown in the illustrations may differ from

your vehicle in terms of equipment.

& Safety Warnings

s00ab02

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to you

or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understanding

of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

How to Use This Owner’s Manual

Introduction

(6,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Safety Symbol

s00ab03

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation List

s00ab04

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

ABS Anti-lock brake system

A/C Air conditioner

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD Blind Spot Detection

CVT

Continuously variable trans-

mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

Abbreviation Meaning

LCA Lane Change Assist

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB

Reverse Automatic Braking

system

RCTA Rear Cross Traffic Alert

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive

SRH

Steering Responsive Head-

light

SRS

Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

How to Use This Owner’s Manual

(7,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Vehicle Symbols

s00ac

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and Indicator Lights” �P26.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care-

fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric

acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety Precautions When

Driving

s00ad

& Seatbelt and SRS Airbag

s00ad01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-

mental Restraint System) airbag

does not replace the safety ben-

efits of wearing a seatbelt. Used

in combination with the seat-

belts, the SRS airbag offers vehi-

cle occupants the best possible

protection in the event of a ser-

ious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not seated

in the proper upright position

when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment,

the driver should always sit up-

right and well back in the seat as

far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” �P41.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)” �P74.

& Child Safety

s00ad02

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Symbols

Introduction

(8,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-

TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. SUBARU strongly recommends

that ALL infants and children

(including those in child restraint

systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained in a child

restraint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. According

to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating

positions. For instructions and

precautions concerning child re-

straint systems, refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P56.

. Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK” position when

children sit in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opens the door

and falls out. Refer to “Child

Safety Locks” �P136.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows” �P136.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

temperature in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to them.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” �P41.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child Restraint Systems” �P56.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)” �P74.

& Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon

Monoxide)

s00ad03

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

Safety Precautions When Driving

(9,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a long time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and Driving

s00ad04

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and

impairs your perception, judgment

and attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking – even if you drink just a

little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent

causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects

all people differently, you may have con-

sumed too much alcohol to drive safely

even if the level of alcohol in your blood is

below the legal limit. The safest thing you

can do is never drink and drive. However if

you have no choice but to drive, stop

drinking and sober up completely before

getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and Driving

s00ad05

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or fatal

accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can make

you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability

to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you

have a medical condition that requires you

to take drugs, please consult with your

doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving When Tired or Sleepy

s00ad06

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your

passengers’ and other persons’

chances of being involved in a

– CONTINUED –

Safety Precautions When Driving

Introduction

(10,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead

find a safe place to rest if you are tired or

sleepy. On long trips, you should make

periodic rest stops to refresh yourself

before continuing on your journey. When

possible, you should share the driving with

others.

& Modification of Your Vehicle

s00ad07

WARNING

Do not remove the genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system.

Doing so could cause the following

functions to be inoperable.

. Combination meter display (color

LCD)

. Rear view image and help lines

. Vehicle settings

. Climate control

. Clock

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Use of Cell Phones/Texting

and Driving

s00ad16

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and lead to an

accident. If you use a cell phone to

talk or text, first pull off the road and

park in a safe place. In some States/

Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on

a phone while driving, but only if the

phone is hands-free.

& Driving Vehicles Equipped

with Navigation System

s00ad09

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while driving.

The loss of attention to driving could

lead to an accident. If you wish to

operate the controls of the naviga-

tion system, first take the vehicle off

the road and stop it in a safe

location.

& Driving with Pets

s00ad10

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can be

hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling harness

which can be secured to the rear seat with

a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be

secured to the rear seat by routing a

seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.

Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the

front passenger’s seat. For further infor-

mation, consult your veterinarian, local

animal protection society or pet shop.

Safety Precautions When Driving

(11,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Tire Pressures

s00ad11

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month and

before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. For detailed

information, refer to “Tires and Wheels”

�P474.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly be-

come hot. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread

separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& On-Road and Off-Road Driv-

ing

s00ad13

This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

Your vehicle has a higher ground clear-

ance and higher center of gravity, making it

more likely to roll over than ordinary

passenger cars. It also handles and

maneuvers differently from other passen-

ger cars. For this reason, please read

carefully the following section and follow

the instructions and precautions in order to

prevent serious injury or death due to loss

of control, rollover and other accidents.

Refer to “On-Road and Off-Road Driving”

�P400.

& Attaching Accessories

s00ad15

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than

properly placed inspection stick-

ers) to the windshield. Such

items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

. Do not connect any unauthorized

accessories or devices to the

data link connector (OBDII port).

This connector should be used

only with compatible diagnostic

devices for inspection and main-

tenance by an authorized service

technician using authorized ser-

vice tools. Connecting unauthor-

ized devices, such as a driver-

behavior tracking device, may

adversely affect vehicle systems,

including safety systems, or al-

low others to access information

stored in your vehicle. The use of

unauthorized devices may also

cause unexpected malfunctions,

such as a drained battery, or may

damage vehicle systems. The

manufacturer’s warranty will not

cover any part that malfunctions,

fails, or is damaged due to the

use of an unauthorized device

with the data link connector.

– CONTINUED –

Safety Precautions When Driving

Introduction

(12,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Vehicle Operation

s00ad18

! Before leaving vehicle unattended

s00ad1801

CAUTION

Always lock your vehicle and carry

your access key fob with you.

There is a risk for vehicle theft or

unauthorized persons tampering

with the vehicle or installing mal-

icious electronic devices.

! Key number plate storage

s00ad1802

NOTE

. The key number is required when

repairing the vehicle or making a

spare access key fob. If you lose the

plate with these numbers stamped

on it, you will not be able to make a

spare access key fob. To prevent it

from being stolen, do not leave it in

the vehicle and store it in a safe

place. Refer to “Keyless Access with

Push-Button Start System” �P108.

. If you lose your key, we recommend

that you delete the lost access key

fob registration to prevent theft.

Only a SUBARU dealer can delete

key fob registration. We recommend

that you consult your SUBARU deal-

er. Refer to “Key Replacement”

�P123.

! Vehicle modifications

s00ad1803

WARNING

. Do not install parts, make custom

adjustments or perform wiring or

other operations that are not

suitable for the vehicle.

. Do not connect accessories to

the vehicle wiring or connectors

unless they are genuine SUBARU

products. SUBARU’s vehicle war-

ranty does not cover any mal-

functions resulting from con-

necting the vehicle to products

other than those specified.

. It may be illegal to modify the

vehicle by installing parts other

than those reported by SUBARU

to the Ministry of Land, Infra-

structure, Transport, and Tour-

ism. Consult your SUBARU deal-

er about the kinds of parts (tires,

wheels, mufflers, etc.) you can

legally install on your vehicle.

! Device installation

s00ad1804

WARNING

Connecting devices that are not

intended to be used in the vehicle

or in a particular connector can

adversely affect the vehicle system

or cause the auxiliary battery to

discharge. It may also cause perso-

nal information leaks or unauthor-

ized remote operation of vehicle

features, resulting in unforeseen

complications. Any complication

caused by connecting a device other

than one intended to be used in the

vehicle is not covered by the manu-

facturer’s warranty. SUBARU also

bears no responsibility for any such

complication.

. The vehicle trouble diagnosis

connector should only be used

to connect the vehicle data link

connector (OBDII) for inspection

and maintenance purposes.

. Use the USB port only for data

communication with your vehicle

and for device charging.

Safety Precautions When Driving

(13,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Suspicious device handling

s00ad1805

WARNING

If you find an unrecognized device

on your vehicle, consult your

SUBARU dealer immediately.

Any problem or safety risk due to the

connection of an unauthorized de-

vice is not covered by the manufac-

turer’s warranty. SUBARU also

bears no responsibility for any such

cause.

! Deleting personal information from

vehicle

s00ad1806

CAUTION

When transferring ownership of

your vehicle, delete the personal

information registered in the vehicle

by performing a Factory Data Reset.

For details about the Factory Data

Reset, refer to the Owner’s Manual

supplement for the audio and navi-

gation system.

Note that certain personal informa-

tion inputted in the Head Unit and

the phone number of any paired

device will remain in vehicle data

logs even after the Factory Data

Reset. These data logs are strictly

for quality assurance purposes and

not viewable by any subsequent

purchaser. To have those logs de-

leted permanently from the vehicle,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

General Information

s00ak

& California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

s00ak03

Certain vehicle components, such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries, may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the Vehicle

s00ak01

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction. This

noise is caused by the operation of the

fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-

tem and the operation is normal. The

noise will stop after approximately 15

minutes.

& Vehicle Data Recording

s00ak08

The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated

computers that will record certain data,

such as:

. Vehicle speed

– CONTINUED –

General Information

Introduction

(14,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Engine speed

. Engine control information

. Shift state information

. Driving information, etc.

! Data usage

s00ak0801

SUBARU may use the data recorded in

this computer to diagnose malfunctions,

conduct research and development, and

improve quality.

SUBARU will not disclose the recorded

data to a third party except:

. With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee if the

vehicle is leased

. In response to an official request by the

police, a court of law or a government

agency

. For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit

. For research purposes where the data

is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner

& Event Data Recorder

s00ak04

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

General Information

(15,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(16,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(17,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

sill

Exterior .............................................................. 16

Interior ............................................................... 18

Instrument Panel............................................... 21

Steering Wheel.................................................. 22

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/

Switches .......................................................... 23

Combination Meter ........................................... 24

U.S.-Spec. Models ................................................24

Canada-Spec. Models...........................................25

Warning and Indicator Lights.......................... 26

Illustrated Index

(18,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Exterior

s00ay

1 Engine hood (page 462)

2 Headlights (page 231, 491)

3 Turn signal lights (page 241, 491)

4 Windshield wipers (page 243, 484)

5 Moonroof (page 140)

6 Roof rails (page 408)

7 Outside mirrors (page 256)

8 Side turn signal lights (page 241, 491)

9 Door locks (page 128)

10 Tire pressure (page 477)

11 Flat tires (page 429)

12 Tire chains (page 405)

13 Fog lights (page 240, 491)

14 Tie-down hooks (page 436)

15 Towing hook (page 436)

Exterior

(19,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Rear window defogger (page 246)

2 Rear wiper (page 244)

3 Fuel filler lid and cap (page 308)

4 Child safety locks (page 136)

5 Tie-down holes (page 436)

6 Lights (page 231, 491)

7 Turn signal lights (page 241, 491)

8 Rear gate (page 139)

9 Towing hook (page 436)

Exterior

Illustrated Index

(20,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Interior

s00az

1 Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 68)

· U.S.-spec. models:

5 lower anchorages

· Canada-spec. models:

4 lower anchorages

2 Seatbelts (page 41)

3 Center console (page 286)

4 Front seats (page 30)

5 Rear seats (page 37)

Interior

(21,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 11.6-inch display models*

(page 190)/

Climate control (page 265)/Audio*

/Na-

vigation system*

2 Dual 7.0-inch display models*

(page

213)/Climate control (page 263)/Audio*

3 USB power supply (page 289)/AUX*

4 Wireless charger (page 291)

5 Glove box (page 285)

6 Select lever (page 326)

*1: Center information display

*2: For details about how to use the audio and

navigation system (if equipped), refer to

the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

– CONTINUED –

Interior

Illustrated Index

(22,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Map light switches (page 282)

2 Moonroof tilt switch (page 141)

3 Moonroof slide switch (page 141)

4 Door interlock switch (page 282)

5 Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

NOTE

For models with SUBARU STARLINK:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for SUBARU STARLINK.

Interior

(23,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Instrument Panel

s00ba

1 Power window switches (page 136)

2 Remote control mirror switch (page 257)

3 Combination meter (page 152)

4 Hazard warning flasher switch (page

152)

5 Camera for Driver Monitoring System

(page 382)

6 Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 257)

7 Fuse box (page 490)

8 Hood release knob (page 462)

9 Illumination brightness control dial (page

155)

10 Electronic parking brake switch (page

345)

11 Seat heater switches (page 35)

12 Accessory power outlet (page 288)

13 Cup holder (page 287)

Instrument Panel

Illustrated Index

(24,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Steering Wheel

s00bb

1 Audio control switch*

2 Talk switch for voice command system*

3 Cruise control switches*

/LIM switch*

4 Shift paddles (page 330)

5 SI-DRIVE switch (page 332)

6 Heated Steering Wheel switch (page

258)

7 SRS airbag (page 74)

8 Horn (page 259)

9 Hands-free phone switch*

10 Control switches for combination meter

display (color LCD) (page 181)

*1: For details about how to use the switches,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

*2: For details about how to use the switches,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

Steering Wheel

(25,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches

s00bc

1 Windshield wiper (page 241)

2 Mist (page 243)

3 Windshield washer (page 244)

4 Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 244)

5 Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 243)

6 Wiper control lever (page 243)

7 Light control switch (page 231)

8 Fog light switch (page 240)

9 Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 232)

10 Headlight flasher High/Low beam change

(page 234)

11 Turn signal lever (page 241)

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches

Illustrated Index

(26,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Combination Meter

s00bd

& U.S.-Spec. Models

s00bd01

1 Tachometer (page 153)

2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page

176)

3 Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 180)

4 Trip meter and odometer (page 153)

5 Speedometer (page 152)

6 Fuel gauge (page 154)

7 Digital speed screen (page 188)

8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page

154)

Combination Meter

(27,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Canada-Spec. Models

s00bd03

1 Tachometer (page 153)

2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page

176)

3 Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 180)

4 Trip meter and odometer (page 153)

5 Speedometer (page 152)

6 Fuel gauge (page 154)

7 Digital speed screen (page 188)

8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page

154)

Combination Meter

Illustrated Index

(28,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Warning and Indicator Lights s00be

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 157

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light

157

Rear seatbelt warning

light

159

SRS airbag system

warning light

160

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag ON indicator

light

160

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag OFF indicator

light

160

CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator light

161

Charge warning light 162

Oil pressure warning

light

162

Engine low oil level

warning light

162

Mark Name Page

AT OIL TEMP warning

light

162

/ ABS warning light 164

Brake system warning

light

165

Electronic parking

brake indicator light

166

Door open indicator

light

168

Engine hood open

warning light

168

Low fuel warning light 167

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

168

Power steering warning

light

168

Auto Vehicle Hold indi-

cator light

167

Mark Name Page

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light

169

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF indicator light

170

Access key warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

170

Security indicator light 175

Turn signal indicator

lights

176

High beam indicator

light

176

High beam assist indi-

cator

176

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

176

LED headlight warning

light

177

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light

177

Warning and Indicator Lights

(29,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Mark Name Page

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

(if equipped)

177

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

177

Headlight indicator light 177

Low tire pressure warn-

ing light (U.S.-spec.

models)

163

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

168

Auto Start Stop OFF

indicator light

177

Auto Start Stop indica-

tor light (green)

177

Auto Start Stop warning

light (yellow)

177

Auto Start Stop No Ac-

tivity Detected indicator

light

178

BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

178

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

178

Mark Name Page

SI-DRIVE indicator

176

X-MODE indicator 178

Hill descent control in-

dicator light

178

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

178

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

179

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

179

Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF indicator (if

equipped)

179

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem operation indicator

light (green) (if

equipped)

179

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem warning light (yel-

low) (if equipped)

179

Mark Name Page

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem OFF indicator light

(if equipped)

179

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

180

Warning and Indicator Lights

Illustrated Index

(30,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(31,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s01

1-1. Front Seats........................................................ 30

Power Seat (If Equipped) ......................................33

Manual Seat (If Equipped) .....................................33

Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................34

1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped) ................................. 35

1-3. Rear Seats ......................................................... 37

Folding Down the Rear Seatback ..........................37

Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................39

Armrest (If Equipped)............................................41

1-4. Seatbelts............................................................ 41

Seatbelt Safety Tips..............................................41

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................42

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency

Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ..............................43

Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ........................43

Fastening the Seatbelt ..........................................43

Seatbelt Maintenance............................................50

1-5. Seatbelt Extender ............................................. 50

1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners ..................................... 52

Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner ..............53

Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt

Pretensioners .....................................................54

System Monitors...................................................54

System Servicing..................................................55

Precautions against Vehicle Modification ..............55

1-7. Rear Seat Reminder ......................................... 56

1-8. Child Restraint Systems .................................. 56

Safety Precautions................................................56

Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint

Systems.............................................................58

Choosing a Child Restraint System ......................59

When Installing the Forward-Facing Child

Restraint System on the Front Passenger’s

Seat ...................................................................60

Installing Child Restraint Systems with

ALR/ELR Seatbelt...............................................61

Installing a Booster Seat or Booster Cushion .......66

Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use

of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ..........68

Tether Anchorages ...............................................72

1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)............................................... 74

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag

System ..............................................................74

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag

System for Accessories and Any Objects ...........76

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag

System and Children ..........................................78

Components ........................................................81

SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System...........83

SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag .............95

SRS Airbag System Monitors ............................. 102

SRS Airbag System Servicing ............................ 103

Precautions against Vehicle Modification ............ 104

How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer

concerning Modifications for Persons with

Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced

Airbag System ................................................. 105

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(32,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1-1. Front Seats

s01aa

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing, as personal injury or loss of

vehicle control may occur.

. Before adjusting the seat, ensure

nothing is blocking the adjusting

mechanism.

. After adjusting the seat, move it

back and forth to ensure the seat

is securely locked. If it is not, it

may move suddenly or the seat-

belt may not operate properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with

front seat locking mechanism

and cause an accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

back and upright in the seat. To

reduce the risk of sliding under

the seatbelt in a collision, the

front seatbacks should always

be used in the upright position

while the vehicle is running. If the

front seatbacks are not in the

upright position and a collision

occurs, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not seated

in the proper upright position

when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment,

the driver should always sit up-

right and well back in the seat as

far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control, and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-

TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. SUBARU strongly recommends

that ALL infants and children

(including those in child restraint

systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained in a child

restraint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight.

Front Seats

(33,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. According

to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating

positions. For instructions and

precautions concerning child re-

straint systems, refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P56.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the seat-

back. If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may interfere

with the proper operation of the

following systems and could result

in serious injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. SRS seat cushion airbag

. Front seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

Front Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(34,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

Do not press your feet onto the

instrument panel. Doing so may

prevent the occupant detection

function of the SRS airbag system

and SRS airbag from functioning

correctly. This may result in serious

injury or death in the event of an

accident.

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

Front Seats

(35,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Power Seat (If Equipped)

s01aa02

! Driver’s seat

s01aa0208

1 Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion angle or seat cushion

height.

2 Seat cushion angle control switch

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

3 Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

4 Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

5 Lumbar support control switch

To increase lower back support, push the

front side of the switch. To decrease

lower back support, push the rear side of

the switch.

& Manual Seat (If Equipped)

s01aa01

! Forward and backward adjustment

s01aa0101

1. Sit in the seat to adjust.

2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to

the desired position, and then release

the lever.

3. Try to move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

– CONTINUED –

Front Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(36,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Reclining the seatback

s01aa0102

1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the

seatback to the desired position, and

then release the lever.

2. Make sure the seatback is securely

locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

pulling up the lever. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

! Seat height adjustment (driver’s

seat)

s01aa0103

1 When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.

2 When the lever is pulled up, the seat

rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat adjustment lever up and

down.

& Head Restraint Adjustment

s01aa04

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints backwards.

Doing so will prevent the head

restraints from functioning as

intended. Therefore, when the

head restraints are removed, all

head restraints must be rein-

stalled properly to protect vehicle

occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

. The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

front seats only. The rear seat

head restraints are designed to

be installed into the rear seats

only. Do not attempt to install the

front seat head restraints into the

rear seats, or the rear seat head

restraints into the front seats.

Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat are equipped with head re-

straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-

ble in the following ways.

Front Seats

(37,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Head restraint height adjustment

s01aa0401

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

NOTE

It is not possible to remove or install the

head restraint without reclining the

front seatback. Reclining the front seat-

back and then remove or install the

head restraint.

1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped)

s01ab

The seat heater is equipped in the front

seats.

The seat heater operates when the ignition

switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

CAUTION

. Do not put hard or heavy objects

or ones with protrusions on the

seat, and do not stab the seat

with sharp objects, such as pins

or needles.

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enough

or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn off the seat heater.

– CONTINUED –

Seat Heater

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(38,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

can cause battery discharge.

1 HI – Rapid heating

2 LO – Normal heating

3 Off

A Left-hand side

B Right-hand side

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or

“HI” position on the switch, as desired,

depending on the temperature.

Selecting the “HI” position will cause the

seat to heat up quicker.

To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the

opposite side of the current position.

The indicator located on the switch illumi-

nates when the seat heater is in operation.

Seat Heater

(39,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1-3. Rear Seats

s01ac

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits back

and upright in the seat. Do not place

cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. By doing so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

as it could tumble forward and injure

passengers in the event of a sudden

stop or accident.

& Folding Down the Rear Seat-

back

s01ac02

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat-

back, check that there are no

passengers or objects on the rear

seat. Not doing so creates a risk

of injury or property damage if

the seatback suddenly folds

down.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded rear seatback or in

the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially

long items properly to prevent

them from being thrown around

inside the vehicle and causing

serious injury during a sudden

stop, a sudden steering maneu-

ver or a rapid acceleration.

. When you return the seatback to

its original position, shake the

seatback slightly to confirm that

it is securely fixed in place. If the

seatback is not securely fixed in

place, the seatback may sud-

denly fold down in the event of

sudden braking, or objects may

move out from the cargo area,

which could cause serious injury

or death.

– CONTINUED –

Rear Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(40,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Striker

WARNING

When the seatback is returned to its

original position, observe the fol-

lowing precautions. Failure to do so

may lead to serious injury or an

accident because the operation effi-

ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.

. The seatbelt should not be

caught in the seatback and it

should be fully visible.

. The seatbelt should not pass

behind the striker for the seat-

back.

CAUTION

Do not hang luggage etc. on the

striker. The possibility exists that

the seatback may not be able to be

fixed firmly in place. This could lead

to unexpected accidents

! Folding down the rear seatback

s01ac0202

Lock release knobs

1. Lower the head restraints.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock

release knob then fold the seatback

down.

Rear Seats

(41,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Return the rear seatback

s01ac0204

WARNING

. When returning the seatback to

its original position, observe the

following precaution.

Failure to observe the precaution

may damage the seatbelt, impair-

ing its effectiveness, and possi-

bly result in a serious injury.

. When returning the seatback to

its original position, pull the

seatbelt out towards the vehicle

exterior so that it will not be

caught between the seatback

and the trim.

Lock release knob

1 Unlocked

2 Locked

A Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that the unlock-

ing marker on the lock release knob is no

longer visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to its

original position, check that the

unlocking marker on the lock re-

lease knob is not visible. Also, shake

the seatback slightly to confirm that

it is securely fixed in place. If the

seatback is not securely fixed in

place, the seatback may suddenly

fold down in the event of sudden

braking, or objects may move out

from the cargo area, which could

cause serious injury or death.

& Head Restraint Adjustment

s01ac03

Both the rear window side seats and the

rear center seat are equipped with head

restraints.

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Therefore, when

the head restraints are removed,

all head restraints must be re-

installed properly to protect ve-

hicle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

. The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

– CONTINUED –

Rear Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(42,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

front seats only. The rear seat

head restraints are designed to

be installed into the rear seats

only. Do not attempt to install the

front seat head restraints into the

rear seats, or the rear seat head

restraints into the front seats.

! Rear windows side seating position

s01ac0301

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

After installing the head restraint, make

sure it is securely locked.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

! Rear center seating position

s01ac0302

1 Incorrect (retracted position)

2 Correct (extended position)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used in the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

Rear Seats

(43,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibi-

lity.

& Armrest (If Equipped)

s01ac01

To lower the armrest, pull the armrest’s top

edge.

WARNING

. Make sure to have the rear pas-

sengers wear the seatbelts be-

fore lowering the armrest. If the

rear passengers wear the seat-

belts after lowering the armrest,

seatbelts cannot provide maxi-

mum restraint, causing serious

injuries.

. To avoid serious injury, never

allow passengers to sit on the

center armrest while the vehicle

is in motion.

1-4. Seatbelts

s01ae

& Seatbelt Safety Tips

s01ae01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-

port only one person. Never use a

single belt for two or more per-

sons – even children. Otherwise,

in an accident, serious injury or

death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

if damage is not obvious.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(44,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-

TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. SUBARU strongly recommends

that ALL infants and children

(including those in child restraint

systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained in a child

restraint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. According

to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating

positions. For instructions and

precautions concerning child re-

straint systems, refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P56.

This vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record whether the seatbelt is in use by the

front passenger when an SRS frontal, side

or curtain airbag deploys.

! Infants or small children

s01ae0101

Use a child restraint system that is suitable

for this vehicle. Refer to “Child Restraint

Systems” �P56.

! Children

s01ae0102

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, move the child closer to

the belt buckle to help provide a good

shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

securely place the lap belt as low as

possible on the hips and not on the child’s

waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt

cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

s01ae0103

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

s01ae02

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

Seatbelts

(45,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR/ELR)

s01ae03

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic

Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/

ELR has an additional locking mode,

“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode”, intended to secure a child restraint

system.

The ALR mode functions as follows.

When the seatbelt is once drawn out

completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled

and the ELR mode is restored.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the

seatbelt must be changed over to the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

For instructions on how to install the child

restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to

“Installing Child Restraint Systems with

ALR/ELR Seatbelt” �P61.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the retractor is

restored to the Emergency Locking Re-

tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-

belt to retract fully.

& Seatbelt Warning Light

and Chime

s01ae04

Refer to “Seatbelt Warning Light and

Chime” �P157.

& Fastening the Seatbelt

s01ae06

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of across the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or death.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(46,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that has

been closed up in sunny weather;

they could burn an occupant. Do not

touch such hot parts until they cool.

! Front seatbelts

s01ae0601

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and

pull it out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly

again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

the hips, not on the waist.

Seatbelts

(47,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

s01ae060101

Adjust the shoulder belt anchor height to

the position best suited for the driver/front

passenger. Always adjust the anchor

height so that the shoulder belt passes

over the middle of the shoulder without

touching the neck.

To raise:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae060102

1 Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it

from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)

s01ae0602

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and

pull it out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(48,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

the hips, not on the waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae060201

1 Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it

from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear center seatbelt

s01ae0603

1 Center seatbelt tongue plate

2 Anchor tongue plate

3 Anchor buckle

4 Center seatbelt buckle

Seatbelts

(49,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the anchor

tongue plate into the mating buckle

(on right-hand side), always check

that the webbing is not twisted.

WARNING

. Be sure to fasten both tongue

plates to the respective buckles.

If the seatbelt is used only as a

shoulder belt (with the anchor

tongue plate not fastened to the

anchor buckle on the right-hand

side), it cannot properly restrain

the wearer in position in an

accident, possibly resulting in

serious injury or death.

. Before fastening the seatbelt,

confirm that the seatbelt is routed

through the belt guide. A seatbelt

not routed through the belt guide

can cause neck injuries during

sudden braking or in a collision,

since it may slip up on the neck.

The rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

seatbelt holder on the right side of the

cargo area.

1. Raise the head restraint to the ex-

tended position. Do not remove the

head restraint.

2. Remove the center seatbelt tongue

plate, and then slide the webbing to

remove the seatbelt from the belt

holder and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(50,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it

through the belt guide as follows: First

insert one edge of the belt into the open

gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest

of the belt in, so that the whole belt fits

inside.

4. Make sure that the “ ” mark on the

anchor tongue plate and the “

” mark

on the anchor buckle face outwards.

5. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate

attached at the webbing end into the

buckle on the right-hand side until a

click is heard.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and

pull it out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly

again.

6. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle until it

clicks.

7. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt. And place the lap

belt as low as possible on your hips,

Seatbelts

(51,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae060301

1 Button

1. Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side)

to unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down for

greater cargo area, it is necessary to

disconnect the connector.

2. Insert a center seatbelt tongue plate or

other hard pointed object into the slot in

the anchor buckle on the right-hand

side and push it in. The anchor tongue

plate will then disconnect from the

buckle.

3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and

guide it back into the retractor while it is

rolling up. Then, pass the webbing

under the belt holder and insert the

anchor tongue plate into the holder.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(52,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit

against the trim, causing damage to

the trim.

. Do not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the tongue plates are

neatly stored.

& Seatbelt Maintenance

s01ae07

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and

lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the

belts because this could seriously affect

their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,

damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-

place the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

1-5. Seatbelt Extender

s01ai

If the front seatbelts are not long enough to

permit the tongue plate to engage with the

seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt ex-

tender is available from your SUBARU

dealer. When ordering an extender, only

order one particularly designed for your

vehicle. See your SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

The extender adds approximately 8 inches

(200 mm) of length and it can be used for

either the driver or front passenger seating

position.

For the safety of others, the extender

should be removed after each use, espe-

cially if the next person using the seatbelt

does not need one.

Seatbelt Extender

(53,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

Be sure to observe the following

when using the seatbelt extender.

Failure to follow these instructions

and warnings could reduce the ef-

fectiveness of the seatbelt and re-

sult in more serious injury or death

in the event of a collision.

. Never use the seatbelt extender

with a child restraint system, as it

may not securely hold the re-

straint system in place during an

accident, significantly increasing

the risk of death or serious injury.

. Never use the extender when the

belt itself is long enough to

permit it to be buckled properly.

If removal of heavy clothing is all

that is needed to permit the

seatbelt to be buckled properly,

remove the heavy clothing and

do not use the extender.

. Never leave the seatbelt exten-

der’s tongue plate engaged with

the seatbelt buckle when not in

use. Doing so may prevent the

airbag system from functioning

properly.

. Never connect the seatbelt exten-

der to the passenger seatbelt

buckle when the passenger seat

is empty; doing so may prevents

the airbag system from function-

ing properly.

. Do not use the extender if the

buckle of the extender rests over

the abdomen.

. Do not let someone else use the

extender. Use of an extender

when it is not needed could

reduce the effectiveness of the

seatbelt and result in more ser-

ious injury or death in the event

of a collision.

. Use the extender only for the

front seatbelts and only for the

model for which it was originally

provided. Never use the extender

for the rear seatbelts or for a

different model.

. Before you fasten a seatbelt ex-

tender, make sure that the seat-

belt extender is not twisted. A

twisted seatbelt extender can

increase the risk of a severe

injury in an accident.

. Do not use more than one seat-

belt extender at a time. Doing so

could decrease the effectiveness

of the seatbelt and increase the

risk of injury or death in an

accident.

. Do not use a seatbelt extender

that has been used in an accident

or damaged.

WARNING

. Make sure that the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

light is on when you use a

seatbelt extender in the front

passenger’s seat. The front pas-

senger’s frontal airbag OFF in-

dicator must also be off. If it is on,

the front passenger’s SRS airbag

will not deploy in a collision,

which could result in death or

serious injury. Refer to “Front

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt Extender

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(54,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON

and OFF Indicators Light”

�P160.

. The following conditions may

cause the SRS frontal airbag

system to detect that the driver

and front passenger are wearing

seatbelts, which prevents the

SRS frontal airbag system from

operating correctly.

– The tongue plates of the driver

and front passenger seatbelt

extenders are inserted into the

seatbelt buckles, but the re-

spective extenders and seat-

belts are not connected.

– Leaving the tongue plate of

the extender inserted into the

seatbelt buckle when not in

use.

These conditions may prevent

the seatbelt warning light and

warning alarm from operating

correctly. They may also prevent

the SRS frontal airbags from

operating correctly in a collision,

which can result in injury or

death. When you use a seatbelt

extender, always attach it to the

seatbelt buckle and seatbelt ton-

gue plate correctly.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt,

insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt

buckle so that the “PRESS” marks on the

buckle-release buttons of the extender

and the seatbelt are both facing the same

direction, as shown in the illustration. You

will hear a click when the tongue plate

locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seatbelt, press on the

buckle-release button on the extender, not

on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and exten-

der itself.

1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners

s01af

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt

pretensioner.

. Driver’s seatbelt

. Front passenger’s seatbelt

. Window-side rear passenger’s seat-

belts

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed

to be activated in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal and

side collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an

upright position with their seat-

belts properly fastened. Refer to

“Seatbelts” �P41.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the seatbelt retractor assemblies

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners or surrounding area. This

could result in accidental activa-

tion of the seatbelt pretensioners

or could make the system inop-

erative, possibly resulting in ser-

ious injury. Seatbelt preten-

sioners have no user-serviceable

parts. For required servicing of

Seatbelt Pretensioners

(55,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

seatbelt retractors equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding seatbelt retrac-

tor assemblies equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor impacts

or in rear impacts. The pretensioner

can also be activated by the follow-

ing sensors.

– Front impact sensors

– Side impact sensors

– Rollover sensor

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is acti-

vated, the seatbelt retractor assem-

blies equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners should be replaced only by

an authorized SUBARU dealer.

When replacing seatbelt retractor

assemblies, use only genuine

SUBARU parts.

. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt

pretensioner does not retract or

cannot be pulled out due to a mal-

function or activation of the preten-

sioner, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or

surrounding area has been da-

maged, contact your SUBARU deal-

er as soon as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the

vehicle is equipped with seatbelt

pretensioners. Also, notify the buyer

of the contents in this section.

& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt

Pretensioner

s01af01

NOTE

This section is applicable to the follow-

ing components.

. Front passenger’s seatbelt

. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-

side)

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions or rollover accidents, any

seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is

quickly drawn back in by the retractor to

take up the slack so that the belt more

effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The window-side rear passenger’s seat-

belt pretensioner includes a tension redu-

cing device that limits the peak forces

exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in

the event of a collision.

The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-

sioner includes a tension reducing device

which limits the peak forces exerted by the

seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a

collision.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt Pretensioners

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(56,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Adaptive force limiter

The front passenger’s side adaptive force

limiter will select a reducing load to the suit

body size of the occupant as detected by

the occupant detection sensor.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt

and Lap Belt Pretensioners

s01af02

NOTE

This section is applicable to the driver’s

seatbelt.

1 Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder

belt pretensioner)

2 Lap belt pretensioner

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions or rollover accidents, any

seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is

quickly drawn back in by the retractor to

take up the slack so that the belt more

effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple-

mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is

located at the base of the center pillar. The

lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls

in the belt to eliminate slack if a certain

level of frontal collision force is detected.

As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front

seat occupant more effectively.

The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes

a tension reducing device which limits the

peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the

occupant in the event of a collision.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-

mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt

cannot be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

& System Monitors

s01af03

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.

The seatbelt pretensioners share the

control module with the SRS airbag

system. Therefore, if any malfunction

occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the

Seatbelt Pretensioners

(57,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

SRS airbag system warning light will

illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS Airbag

System Monitors” �P102.

& System Servicing

s01af04

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in accidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or

SRS airbag or could make the

system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury. Do not

use electrical test equipment on

any circuit related to the seatbelt

pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-

tems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

CAUTION

For the locations of the sensors and

control modules, refer to “Compo-

nents” �P81.

If you need service or repair in those

areas or near the front seatbelt

retractors, have the work performed

by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& Precautions against Vehicle

Modification

s01af05

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts to your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

Seatbelt Pretensioners

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(58,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1-7. Rear Seat Reminder

s01at

This function prompts the driver to confirm

the presence of passengers and cargo in

the rear.

This function will be activated when the

rear doors are opened and closed.

It alerts the driver by warning messages on

the combination meter display (color LCD)

and beeps when the ignition switch is

turned from the “ON” position to the “OFF”

position.

NOTE

. This function does not directly de-

tect passengers and cargo in the

rear seat.

. This function detects the opening

and closing of the rear doors. In this

situation, there is the possibility that

the following phenomenon may oc-

cur.

– It may alert the driver even if there

are no passengers or cargo in the

rear seat.

– It may not alert the driver even if

there are passengers and cargo

in the rear seat.

. This function can be set to on or off

by the “Car settings”. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-

inch display models) or “Vehicle

setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch

display models).

. The ON/OFF setting will not be

changed even if the ignition switch

is turned to the “OFF” position.

. The ON/OFF setting will be returned

to the default setting if the battery is

removed.

1-8. Child Restraint Systems

s01ag

& Safety Precautions

s01ag19

Infants and children should be placed in an

infant or child restraint system on the rear

seat while riding in the vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint

system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards, is compatible with

your vehicle and is appropriate for the

child’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those described in “Installation of

Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower

and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)” �P68).

Rear Seat Reminder

(59,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraint systems

are not properly secured in the vehicle.

When installing the child restraint system,

carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

Lock release knob

1 Unlocked

2 Locked

A Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

. Do not leave children in the car

unattended. High interior tem-

peratures may cause heat stroke

and dehydration that result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on

their lap or in their arms while the

vehicle is moving. The passenger

cannot protect the child (or infant)

from injury in a collision, because

the child will be caught between the

passenger and objects inside the

vehicle. Additionally, if a passenger

holds a child on their lap or in their

arms in the front seat, they expose

the child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(60,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times when in the

vehicle. Never allow a child to stand

or kneel on any seat. An unrest-

rained child will be thrown forward

during a sudden stop or in an

accident and can be injured ser-

iously. Additionally, a child who

stands or kneels on or in front of

the front seat is exposed to another

serious danger. Since the SRS air-

bag deploys with considerable

speed and force, the child could be

injured or even killed.

& Safety Tips for Installing

Child Restraint Systems

s01ag16

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If

a seatbelt extender is used when

installing a child restraint sys-

tem, the seatbelt will not securely

hold the child restraint system.

Use of a seatbelt extender could

cause death or serious injury to

children or other passengers in

sudden braking, swerving, or

accidents.

. Attach the child restraint system

to the anchors properly. When

using the LATCH anchors, be

sure that there are no foreign

objects around the anchors.

Make sure the child restraint

system is securely attached.

Otherwise, it may cause death or

serious injury to children or other

passengers in sudden braking,

swerving, or accidents.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

. Several types of child restraint

systems may conceal the buckle

of the neighboring seat. If the

occupant of the neighboring seat

cannot correctly fasten the seat-

belt, that person must move to a

different seat. If the seatbelt can-

not be correctly fastened, there is

the risk of serious injury or death

in the event of sudden braking or

a collision.

. If the child restraint system can-

not be correctly installed be-

cause it contacts the driver’s

seat, move the child restraint

system to a different seat. If it

cannot be installed in a different

seat (other than the driver’s seat),

adjust the front seat so that

contact does not occur.

Child Restraint Systems

(61,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Even with advanced airbags, in-

fants and children can be ser-

iously injured by the airbag. Seat

children in the rear seat properly

restrained. The SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. For that

reason, be sure to secure ALL

types of child restraint systems

on the REAR seats. You should

choose a restraint system which

is appropriate for the child’s age,

height and weight. According to

accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in

the rear seating positions than in

the front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages for

a seat in the center seating posi-

tion unless a child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer’s instructions

permit and specify using anchors

spaced as far apart as those in

this vehicle.

. Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-

TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Do not allow children to lean their

heads or any other parts of their

bodies against the door or the

area of the seat, front and rear

pillars or roof side rails. The SRS

side airbags and SRS curtain

airbags deploy even if children

are seated in the child restraint

system, and the impact could

cause death or serious injury to

the child.

. To secure the child restraint sys-

tem, be sure to comply with all

installation instructions provided

by the child restraint system

manufacturer. Not doing so could

result in death or serious injury to

children in a sudden stop or

accident.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

& Choosing a Child Restraint

System

s01ag02

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(62,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

child with proper protection. The child

restraint system should meet all applicable

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards for the United States or

of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system or

the manufacturer’s statement of compli-

ance in the document attached to the

system. Also it is important for you to make

sure that the child restraint system is

compatible with the vehicle in which it will

be used.

NOTE

Some sizes of child restraint systems

may not fit the vehicle seat. Before

purchasing a child restraint system,

check whether it fits on the vehicle seat.

& When Installing the Forward-

Facing Child Restraint Sys-

tem on the Front Passenger’s

Seat

s01ag15

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-

TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. The front passenger’s seat is not

equipped with tether an-

chorages. Therefore, when in-

stalling a child restraint system

that uses tether straps, do not

install it on the front passenger’s

seat.

Only forward-facing child restraint sys-

tems (including booster seats) can be

installed on this seat and should only be

installed when it is unavoidable. When you

install a forward-facing child restraint

system to the front passenger’s seat,

perform the following procedure.

A Seat position: Rearmost as possible

B Seat cushion height (if equipped): Upper

most

C Seatback: Upright

1. Adjust the front passenger’s seat as

illustrated.

2. Install the child restraint system to the

front passenger’s seat. Refer to “In-

Child Restraint Systems

(63,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

stalling a forward facing child restraint

system” �P63.

3. Place and secure the child in the child

restraint system.

4. Check that the front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag ON/OFF indicator light status

meets the requirements of your child

restraint system.

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

When front passenger’s frontal air-

bag OFF indicator light is illumi-

nated:

Only forward-facing child restraint sys-

tems can be installed.

When front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator light is illuminated:

When the indicator is illuminated, child

restraint systems cannot be installed on

the front passenger’s seat. Install the

child restraint system on the rear seats.

For more details, refer to “SUBARU

Advanced Frontal Airbag System”

�P83.

5. Check that the child restraint system

does not contact the head restraint. If

the child restraint system does make

contact with the head restraint, raise

the head restraint to the extended

position. If the child restraint system

still makes contact, remove the head

restraint. For details, refer to “Head

Restraint Adjustment” �P34.

& Installing Child Restraint

Systems with ALR/ELR Seat-

belt

s01ag04

CAUTION

. When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions supplied with

it. After installing the child re-

straint system, check to ensure

that it is held securely in position.

If it is not held tight and secure,

the danger of your child suffering

personal injury in the event of an

accident may be increased.

. When installing a child restraint

system in the rear center seating

position, set both seatbacks to

the original position. Otherwise,

the child restraint system cannot

be securely restrained, which

may result in death or serious

injuries in the event of sudden

stop, sudden steering maneuver

or an accident.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint system

s01ag0401

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-

FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-

TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(64,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system in the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system in the window-side seating

position to be safe.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is

recommended by the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with the child

restraint system, perform the following

procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor

over from the Emergency Locking

Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the

retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate

the retractor functions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back

and forth and right and left to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint system can be more firmly

secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the

seatbelt. It should not be possible to

move the child restraint system more

than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction along

the seatbelt path.

7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR

mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder

portion of the belt to confirm that it

cannot be pulled out (ALR properly

functioning).

Child Restraint Systems

(65,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seat-

belt buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing a forward facing child

restraint system

s01ag0402

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM ON THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT IF

THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

FRONTAL AIRBAG ON INDICA-

TOR ILLUMINATES. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. If the child restraint system makes

contact with the head restraint of the

rear seating position where the child

restraint system is to be installed,

perform the following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If

the child restraint system still makes

contact, install the child restraint

system in a seating position other

than the rear center seat.

For details, refer to “Head Restraint

Adjustment” �P39.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(66,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the cargo area. Do not place the

head restraint in the passenger

compartment to prevent it from

being thrown around in the passen-

ger compartment in a sudden stop

or a sharp turn.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system in the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system in the window-side seating

position to be safe.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system

following the instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the rear center seating

position, pass the rear center seat-

belt through the belt guide properly.

For details, refer to “Rear center

seatbelt” �P46.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

6. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over

from the Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR) to the Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the

belt to rewind into the retractor. As the

belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard

which indicate the retractor functions

as ALR.

Child Restraint Systems

(67,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back

and forth and right and left to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint system can be more firmly

secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the

seatbelt. It should not be possible to

move the child restraint system more

than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction along

the seatbelt path.

8. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out

(ALR properly functioning).

9. Attach the tether hook onto the tether

anchorage and tighten the tether strap

firmly. For additional instructions, refer

to “Tether Anchorages” �P72.

10. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seat-

belt buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

If you have installed a child restraint

system for the rear center seating posi-

tion, when you remove the child restraint

system, the seatbelt may not be restored

to the ELR mode even if the seatbelt is

retracted. In this case, lower the head

restraint to the retracted position to allow

the seatbelt to retract moreover. The

seatbelt will return to the ELR mode.

Remember that the head restraint is not

intended to be used at the lowest position

(retracted position). Therefore, when the

rear center seat is occupied (including

when a child restraint system is installed)

next time, be sure to raise the head

restraint to the extended position.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(68,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Installing a Booster Seat or

Booster Cushion

s01ag05

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A BOOSTER SEAT/

CUSHION ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT IF THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S FRONTAL AIRBAG ON

INDICATOR ILLUMINATES. DOING

SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING

THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

Booster seat

Booster cushion

1. Adjust the head restraint as follows.

For booster seat:

If the booster seat makes contact with the

head restraint of the rear seating position

where the booster seat is to be installed,

perform the following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If

the booster seat still makes contact,

install the child restraint system in a

seating position other than the rear

center seat.

For details, refer to “Head Restraint

Adjustment” �P39.

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the cargo area. Do not place the

head restraint in the passenger

compartment to prevent it from

being thrown around in the passen-

ger compartment in a sudden stop

or a sharp turn.

For booster cushion:

Raise the head restraint to the extended

position. Do not remove the head restraint.

Child Restraint Systems

(69,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2. Place the booster seat/cushion in the

rear seating position and sit the child

on it. The child should sit well back on

the booster seat/cushion.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat/cushion

and the child following the instructions

provided by its manufacturer. For

booster seat/cushion with a belt guide,

use the seatbelt through the belt guide.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the center of child’s

shoulder and that the lap belt is

positioned as low as possible on the

child’s hips.

5. To remove the booster seat/cushion,

press the release button on the seat-

belt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious injury

or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(70,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Installation of Child Restraint

Systems by Use of Lower and

Tether Anchorages (LATCH)

s01ag07

! Lower and tether anchorages

s01ag0701

WARNING

. Attach the child restraint system

to the anchors properly. When

using the LATCH anchors, be

sure that there are no foreign

objects around the anchors.

Make sure the child restraint

system is securely attached.

Otherwise it may cause death or

serious injury to children or other

passengers in sudden braking,

swerving, or accidents.

. When installing a child restraint

system using LATCH anchors

with the rear seatbelt fastened,

ensure that the rear seatbelt does

not become caught in the child

restraint system or the lower

LATCH anchorages.

NOTE

The seatbelt warning system of the rear

seats detects if any of the seats are

occupied by a passenger. Installing a

child restraint system in the rear seat-

ing area, using the LATCH anchors,

may result in the activation of the

passenger seatbelt warning light and

chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior

to installing the child restraint system

will avoid activating the passenger

seatbelt warning light and chime. For

details, refer to “Rear passenger’s

seats” �P159.

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle

without use of the seatbelts. Such child

restraint systems are secured to the

dedicated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body.

The lower and tether anchorages are

sometimes referred to as the LATCH

system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with 5 lower

anchorages (U.S.-spec. models), 4 lower

anchorages (other models) and 3 tether

anchorages for accommodating such child

restraint systems.

Child Restraint Systems

(71,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Lower anchorages

s01ag070101

U.S.-spec. models

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at

the rear seat. The second lower ancho-

rage from the right side is used for both the

right seat and center seat. Each lower

anchorage is located where the seat

cushion meets the seatback.

Canada-spec. models

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

2 lower anchorages are provided for

installing a child restraint system in the

rear seat window-side seating positions.

Lower anchorages for window-side seat-

ing positions may be used for a seat in the

center seating position if a child restraint

system manufacturer’s instructions permit

and specify using anchors as far apart as

those in this vehicle. Each lower ancho-

rage is located where the seat cushion

meets the seatback.

! Tether anchorages

s01ag070102

1 For left seat

2 For center seat

3 For right seat

The tether anchorages are provided at the

locations shown in the above illustration.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(72,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

For details, refer to “Tether Anchorages”

�P72.

! To install a child restraint system

using lower and tether an-

chorages

s01ag070103

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely locked into

place.

– Check that the red colored unlock-

ing marker on the lock release knob

is not visible. For details, refer to

“Folding Down the Rear Seatback”

�P37.

U.S.-spec. models

Canada-spec. models

2. You will find “

” marks at the bottoms

of the rear seatback. These marks

indicate the positions of the lower

anchorages.

Each lower anchorage is located be-

hind the cover of seatback bottom.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Peel off the anchorage cover completely

from the selected side of the rear seatback

to expose the lower anchorages to be used

for installation of the child restraint system.

Child Restraint Systems

(73,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If it is hard to install the child restraint

system because the anchorage cover

returns to the original position, press the

anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it

is flat.

3. If the child restraint system makes

contact with the head restraint of the

rear seating position where the child

restraint system is to be installed,

perform the following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If

the child restraint system still makes

contact, remove the head restraint.

For details, refer to “Head Restraint

Adjustment” �P39.

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the cargo area. Do not place the

head restraint in the passenger

compartment to prevent it from

being thrown around in the passen-

ger compartment in a sudden stop

or a sharp turn.

4. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system

manufacturer, connect the lower hooks

onto the lower anchorages located at

“

” marks on the bottom of the rear

seatback. When the hooks are con-

nected, make sure the adjacent seat-

belts are not caught.

5. If your child restraint system is a

flexible attachment type (which uses

tether belts), push the child restraint

system into the seat cushion and pull

both left and right lower tether belts up

to secure the child restraint system by

taking up the slack in the belt.

6. Attach the tether hook onto the tether

anchorage and tighten the tether strap

firmly. For additional instructions, refer

to “Tether Anchorages” �P72.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(74,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back

and forth and right and left to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint system can be more firmly

secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion. It should not be possible

to move the child restraint system

more than 1 in (2.5 cm).

8. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of in-

stallation.

SUBARU recommends that you check

with a certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to ensure the proper installa-

tion of your child restraint system. For

more information, and to locate the closest

inspection location in the U.S., refer to the

National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,

check with Transport Canada.

& Tether Anchorages

s01ag09

Your vehicle is equipped with 3 tether

anchorages so that a child restraint system

having a tether can be installed in the rear

seat. When installing a child restraint

system using tether, proceed as follows,

while observing the instructions by the

child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

! Tether anchorage location

s01ag0901

1 For left seat

2 For center seat

3 For right seat

Three tether anchorages are installed on

the rear shelf behind the rear seat head

Child Restraint Systems

(75,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

restraint.

! To hook the tether

s01ag0902

CAUTION

. Except for the center seating

position, remove the head re-

straint when mounting a child

restraint system. Otherwise, it

might be possible that the tether

anchorage cannot be fastened

tightly.

. Store the head restraint that has

been removed in the cargo area.

Do not place the head restraint in

the passenger compartment to

prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger com-

partment in a sudden stop or a

sharp turn.

. For the center seating position,

raise the center head restraint to

the extended position when

mounting a child restraint sys-

tem. Otherwise, it will be impos-

sible to use the seatbelt guide

that is attached to the head

restraint correctly.

The seatbelt guide is essential for

routing the belt webbing at the

center seating position. For in-

formation about using the seat-

belt guide, refer to “Rear center

seatbelt” �P46.

1. Attach the tether hook to the appro-

priate top tether anchorage.

For the center seating position,

route the tether strap under the head

restraint as illustrated below.

1 Seatbelt guide

2 Seatbelt of the center seating position

3 Tether strap

2. Tighten the top tether strap securely.

SUBARU recommends that you check

with a certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to ensure the proper installa-

tion of your child restraint system. For

more information, and to locate the closest

inspection location in the U.S., refer to the

National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,

check with Transport Canada.

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(76,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemen-

tal Restraint System Airbag)

s01ah

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

name is used because the airbag system

supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a lap/

shoulder belt at each front seating position

and each rear window-side seating posi-

tions.

The system also controls seatbelt preten-

sioners. For operation instructions and

precautions concerning the seatbelt pre-

tensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-

sioners” �P52.

& General Precautions Regard-

ing SRS Airbag System

s01ah10

WARNING

To obtain maximum protection in the

event of an accident, the driver and

all passengers must always wear

seatbelts when in the vehicle. The

SRS airbags are designed only to be

a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt. They

do not eliminate the need to fasten

seatbelts. Used in combination with

the seatbelts, the SRS airbag offers

vehicle occupants the best possible

protection in the event of a serious

accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the

chance of severe injury or death in a

crash even when the vehicle has the

SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system, re-

fer to “Seatbelts” �P41.

WARNING

The SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are not seated in the

proper upright position when the

SRS airbag deploys could suffer

very serious injuries. Because the

SRS airbag needs enough space for

deployment, the driver should al-

ways sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering wheel

as practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control, and the front

passenger should move the seat as

far back as possible and sit upright

and well back in the seat.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean close to either

front door. The SRS side airbags

are stored in both front seat

seatbacks next to the door, and

they provide protection by de-

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(77,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

ploying rapidly in the event of a

side impact or an offset frontal

collision. However, the force of

SRS side airbag deployment can

injure an occupant if they are too

close to an SRS airbag.

. Since this vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean close to the front or

rear door on either side. Do not

put body parts out of the window.

The SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the cabin are stored in

the roof side (between the front

pillar and a point behind the rear

quarter glass), and they provide

protection by deploying rapidly

in the event of a side impact,

rollover or an offset frontal colli-

sion. However, the force of its

deployment can injure an occu-

pant if they are too close to an

SRS airbag.

. Do not sit or lean close to the SRS

airbag. Because the SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed

and force to protect in high speed

collisions, the force of an airbag

can injure an occupant whose

body is too close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear a

seatbelt to help avoid injuries

that can result when the SRS

airbag contacts an occupant

who is not seated in the proper

upright position.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injuries, such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms,

because of the SRS airbag de-

ployment force.

WARNING

. Keep arms away from either door

or its internal trim. Vehicle occu-

pants could be injured in the

event of SRS side airbag deploy-

ment.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, these

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other breath-

ing trouble. If you or your pas-

sengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the

vehicle is equipped with SRS air-

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(78,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

bags. Also, notify the buyer of the

applicable section in this Owner’s

Manual.

. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel

supply will be cut off to reduce the

risk of fire caused by leaking fuel.

For details about restarting of the

engine, refer to “If Your Vehicle Is

Involved in an Accident” �P445.

& General Precautions Regard-

ing SRS Airbag System for

Accessories and Any Objects

s01ah13

WARNING

. Do not put any objects (including

straps or cords) over the steering

wheel pad, column cover, or

dashboard.

– These objects could be en-

tangled with the steering

wheel, preventing the SRS

frontal airbag, etc. from oper-

ating properly.

– If the SRS frontal airbag de-

ploys, these objects could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under the

driver’s side of the instrument

panel. If the SRS knee airbag

deploys, those objects could in-

terfere with its proper operation

and could be propelled inside the

vehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to

heavy, sharp or hard acces-

sories, or another key. If the SRS

knee airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the inside rear view mirror. If

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(79,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could become projectiles that

could seriously injure vehicle occu-

pants.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of SRS side airbag deploy-

ment, they could be propelled

dangerously toward the vehicle’s

occupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to

a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near

a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A

hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location

could be propelled through the

cabin with great force by the

curtain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

. Never hang or place coat hangers

or other hard or pointed objects

near the side windows. If such

items are present when the SRS

curtain airbags deploy, they

could be thrown through the

passenger compartment and

cause serious injuries. They

could also prevent proper opera-

tion of the SRS curtain airbags.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by

preventing deployment of the cur-

tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no sharp

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(80,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

. Do not put any kind of clothes or

other objects over the driver’s

seat and front passenger’s seat-

back and do not attach labels or

stickers to the driver’s seat and

front passenger’s seat surface on

or near the SRS side airbag or the

SRS seat cushion airbag. They

could prevent proper deployment

of the SRS side airbag or the SRS

seat cushion airbag, reducing

protection available to the occu-

pant of the driver’s seat or the

front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install a seat cover unless

it is a genuine SUBARU seat

cover exclusively designed for

use with the SRS airbag. Even

when using a genuine SUBARU

seat cover, the SRS side airbag or

the SRS seat cushion airbag may

not function normally if the seat

cover is not installed correctly.

& General Precautions Regard-

ing SRS Airbag System and

Children

s01ah14

WARNING

SUBARU strongly recommends that

ALL infants and children (including

those in child restraint systems) sit

in the REAR seat properly restrained

in a child restraint system or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

for the child’s age, height and

weight. The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are not restrained

or improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seating positions than in

the front seating positions. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing child restraint systems, refer to

“Child Restraint Systems” �P56.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(81,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-FA-

CING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

SEAT, AND NEVER INSTALL A FOR-

WARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT IF THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S FRONTAL AIRBAG ON

INDICATOR ILLUMINATES. DOING

SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING

THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(82,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

. Never allow a child to do the

following.

– Kneel on any passenger’s seat

facing the side window.

– Wrap his/her arms around the

front seat seatback.

– Put his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body out of

the window.

In the event of an accident, the

force of SRS side airbag and/or

SRS curtain airbag deployment

could injure the child seriously

because his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag and/

or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children

and infants should be placed on

the rear seat anyway and should

be properly restrained at all

times.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(83,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Components

s01ah11

The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.

1 Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the

center portion of the steering wheel

2 Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:

near the top of the dashboard

3 SRS side airbag: in the door side of each

front seat seatback

4 SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point over

the rear seat)

5 SRS knee airbag: under the steering

column

6 SRS seat cushion airbag: in the front

passenger’s seat cushion

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(84,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Airbag control module (including impact

sensor and rollover sensor)

2 Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3 Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4 Front impact sensor (left-hand side)

5 Front impact sensor (right-hand side)

6 Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7 Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8 Side impact sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)

9 Side impact sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10 Airbag wiring

11 Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12 Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (front passenger’s side)

13 Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14 Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15 Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16 Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17 Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18 Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

19 Front passenger’s occupant detection

sensors

20 Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator light

21 SRS airbag system warning light

22 Side impact sensor (under the rear center

seat)

23 Side impact sensor (front door left-hand

side)

24 Side impact sensor (front door right-hand

side)

25 Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)

26 Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-

ger’s side)

27 Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

28 Seat cushion airbag module (front pas-

senger’s side)

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(85,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& SUBARU Advanced Frontal

Airbag System

s01ah02

This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system automatically determines the de-

ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the SRS

frontal airbag at the time of deployment.

This vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-

tached to the glove box lid beginning with

the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer

to “Components” �P81.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the following components deploy.

. SRS frontal airbag for driver

. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

. SRS seat cushion airbag for front

passenger

. SRS curtain airbag*

. SRS side airbag*

. SRS knee airbag for driver

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat-

belts by reducing the impact to the

occupant’s head, chest and knees.

NOTE

Only driver’s SRS frontal airbag and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

are controlled by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

s01ah0201

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual

stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

s01ah0202

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

1 Occupant detection sensors

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(86,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The occupant detection sensors are in-

stalled between the seat and seat rails,

and monitor the physique and posture of

the front passenger. Using this informa-

tion, the occupant detection system deter-

mines whether the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this

case, although the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag does not operate, the front

passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-

ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-

sioner. For details about the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-

sioners” �P52.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system from functioning correctly

or cause the system to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to

the front passenger’s seat such

as by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest

their feet between the front seat-

back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front

passenger’s seat. If liquid is

spilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble

the front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory

(such as an audio amplifier) other

than a genuine SUBARU acces-

sory under the front passenger’s

seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not place any objects (books,

etc.) around the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. Do not use the front passenger’s

seat with the head restraint re-

moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the

front passenger’s seat or the

seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your vehi-

cle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the

seat or pierce the seat uphols-

tery.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt

retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Manual Seat” �P33

(models equipped with manual

seats only).

SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light will illuminate. If the SRS airbag

system warning light illuminates, immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and

consult a SUBARU dealer.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(87,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

may affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front

passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle

to your SUBARU dealer.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

s01ah0203

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

Refer to “Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag

ON and OFF Indicators Light” �P160.

! Occupant detection system

s01ah0209

1 Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection sensors are in-

stalled between the seat and seat rails,

and monitor the physique and posture of

the front passenger. Using this informa-

tion, the occupant detection system deter-

mines whether the following airbags

should be deployed or not.

. Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

. Front passenger’s SRS seat cushion

airbag

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seat

or subject it to severe impact. Other-

wise, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light may illuminate to indicate a

malfunction of the front passenger

occupant detection system. In this

case, immediately stop the vehicle

in a safe place, and consult a

SUBARU dealer.

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator lights do not work

properly, do not allow anyone to sit on

the front passenger’s seat and have the

occupant detection system checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(88,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

Also, if luggage is placed on the front

passenger’s seat, this may adversely

affect the ability of the system to determine

deployment. This may prevent the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicator lights from working properly.

Check that the indicators work properly.

When the OFF indicator turns off and the

ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a

collision. Remove luggage from the front

passenger’s seat.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

s01ah0204

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding

the front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with an appro-

priate child restraint system and an

infant or a child is restrained in it. (See

WARNING that follows.)

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD-FA-

CING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS

DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it

correctly in the REAR seat. Also, it is

strongly recommended that any

child seat or booster seat be in-

stalled in the REAR seat, and that

even children who have outgrown a

child restraint system be also seated

in the REAR seat. This is because

children sitting in the front passen-

ger’s seat may be killed or severely

injured should the front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR

seats are the safest place for chil-

dren.

CAUTION

When the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an infant in an appro-

priate child restraint system, ob-

serve the following precautions.

Failure to do so may interfere with

the proper operation of the occupant

detection system, activating the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

even though that seat is occupied by

the infant in the child restraint

system.

. Do not place any article on the

seat other than the infant in the

child restraint system.

. Do not place more than one infant

in the child restraint system.

. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seat-

back.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occu-

pant to place his/her hands or

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(89,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

legs on the front passenger’s

seatback, or allow him/her to pull

the seatback.

! If the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator light illumi-

nates and the OFF indicator light

turns off even when an infant or a

small child is in a child restraint

system (including booster seat)

s01ah020401

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Remove the child restraint system from

the seat.

3. By referring to the child restraint

manufacturer’s recommendations as

well as the child restraint system

installation procedures in “Child Re-

straint Systems” �P56, correctly in-

stall the child restraint system.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and make sure that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indica-

tor light turns off and the OFF indicator

light illuminates.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off, take the

following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint

system and the child occupant.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passen-

ger’s seat are locked into place se-

curely by moving the seat back and

forth.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off after

taking the relevant corrective actions

described above, relocate the child re-

straint system to the rear seat and im-

mediately contact your SUBARU dealer

for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. Children should always wear a

seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-

spective of whether the airbag is deac-

tivated or activated. If the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

(the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off), take

the following action.

. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the OFF indicator turns off

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child in

the rear seat and immediately contact

your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

Even if the system has passed the

dealer inspection, it is recommended

that on subsequent trips the child

always take the rear seat.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(90,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

s01ah0205

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions are met regarding the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)

are placed on the seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

deactivating the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat

is occupied by an adult. This may result in

personal injury.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s seat cushion

using his/her feet.

. Do not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any

article from behind and under the seat.

This may lift the seat cushion.

. Do not squeeze any article between the

front passenger’s seat and side trim/

pillar, door or center console box. This

may lift the seat cushion.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and the

ON indicator turns off even when

the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an adult

s01ah020501

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly

sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat

cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt,

position his/her legs out forward, and

adjust the seat to the rearmost posi-

tion.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated

while the ON indicator remains off, take the

following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Make sure that the front passenger

does not use a blanket, extra seat

cushion, seat cover, seat heater or

massager, etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,

the front passenger should remove any

unnecessary items before sitting in the

front passenger’s seat, or should sit in

a rear seat.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow

the system to complete self-checking.

Following the system check, both

indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now,

the ON indicator should illuminate

while the OFF indicator remains off.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(91,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the ON indicator remains off,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(92,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Operation

s01ah0207

A Driver’s side

B Passenger’s side

1 SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a

collision occurs.

2 After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to

deflate immediately so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the

activation or deactivation condition of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

pending on the characteristic of item(s) or

person on the front passenger’s seat

monitored by the front passenger’s occu-

pant detection sensors. For this reason,

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag may

deploy in the event of a collision, but this

does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal

collision, the control module sends signals

to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s

module or both driver’s and front passen-

ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to

inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(93,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. The front impact sensors

. The impact sensors in the airbag

control module

On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag

also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

! After deployment

s01ah0210

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-

diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed and the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle is

not impaired.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident

s01ah0211

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed as follows.

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not

designed as follows.

. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-

pacts*

. To deploy in most side or rear impacts

or in most rollover accidents*

*1: Because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not protect the occupant in those

situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of accident in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

will most likely deploy

s01ah021101

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the collision described

above.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(94,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which it is possible that

the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy

s01ah021102

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags may be activated when the vehicle

sustains a hard impact in the undercar-

riage area from the road surface (such as

when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,

is severely impacted or knocked hard

against an obstacle on the road such as

a curb).

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(95,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

S01AH021103

1 The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

2 The vehicle slides under the load bed of a

truck.

3 The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact.

4 The vehicle sustains an offset frontal

collision.

5 The vehicle strikes an object that can

move or deform, such as a parked

vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of

accidents like those illustrated, the dri-

ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-

ing on the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(96,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the driver’s/dri-

ver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) are not de-

signed to deploy in most cases

s01ah021104

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy

in most of the following cases.

. If the vehicle is struck from the side or

from behind

. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed

frontal collision

1 First impact

2 Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will

not be activated on the second impact.

! SRS seat cushion airbag operation

s01ah0212

1 Passenger’s side

WARNING

The SRS seat cushion airbag is

designed not to deploy when the

seatbelt for the corresponding seat

is not worn. For safety reasons, all

persons in the vehicle should wear

their seatbelts.

The SRS seat cushion airbags are de-

signed to deploy simultaneously when the

SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details

about the operating conditions, refer to

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(97,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag Sys-

tem” �P83.

The front passenger’s SRS seat cushion

airbag is designed not to deploy in either of

the following conditions.

. The front passenger’s seatbelt is not

fastened (even when the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag ON indicator light

illuminates while the OFF indicator light

remains off).

. The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light is off while the OFF

indicator light illuminates.

NOTE

When the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag is deactivated by the occupant

detection system, the front passen-

ger’s SRS seat cushion airbag is also

deactivated.

& SRS Side Airbag and SRS

Curtain Airbag

s01ah03

! SRS side airbag

s01ah0302

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s chest and

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

for front seat occupants.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS side

airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s chest and

waist.

! SRS curtain airbag

s01ah0303

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the

cabin is stored in the roof side (between

the front pillar and a point over the rear

seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located

at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the vehicle deploy between the

occupant and the side window and supple-

ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to

the occupant’s head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain

airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplement the seatbelt by

reducing the impact to the occupant’s

head and chest.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(98,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Operation

s01ah0301

The following SRS airbags is active only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. Driver’s SRS side airbag

. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag

. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)

. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

When the following sensors detect a

certain amount of impact to the side of

the vehicle or detect that the vehicle is

leaning, airbag control units send signals

to the airbag control modules to deploy the

airbags.

. The side impact sensors

. The impact sensor in the airbag control

module

. The rollover sensor in the airbag control

module

Some of the airbags will deploy in a frontal

collision. For details, refer to “SUBARU

Advanced Frontal Airbag System” �P83.

SRS airbags are controlled by their airbag

control units and deploy as necessary to

effectively protect passengers depending

on the accident type. Therefore, these

airbags may deploy simultaneously.

For the locations of the sensors and

control modules, refer to “Components”

�P81.

! After deployment

s01ah0304

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag

immediately starts to deflate.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be released. These occur-

rences are a normal result of the deploy-

ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire

in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-

tem (from the front pillar to the part

of the roof side over the rear seat).

Doing so can cause burns because

the components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident

s01ah0305

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed as follows:

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe side

impact collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are not designed to deploy in the

following cases:

. In most lesser side impacts

. In most frontal or most rear impacts

(because the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deployment would not

protect the occupant in those situa-

tions)

The SRS curtain airbags are also de-

signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an

extremely inclined state such as during a

rollover. They are not designed to deploy in

most lesser inclined state.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(99,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will

most likely deploy

s01ah030501

1 A severe side impact near the front seat.

2 An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(100,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy

S01AH030502

1 The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

3 An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(101,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy

S01AH030503

1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

3 Landing hard or vehicle falling

4 The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone

laterally.

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain

airbags will deploy if a serious impact

occurs to the underside of your vehicle.

Some examples are shown in the illustra-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(102,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy

S01AH030504

1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side

airbag may not deploy depending on the

level of accident forces involved.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

100

(103,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy

S01AH030505

1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS curtain

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

101

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(104,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag

are not designed to deploy in

most cases

s01ah030506

1 The vehicle is struck from behind.

2 The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not designed to deploy

in most cases.

1 First impact

2 Second impact

A SRS curtain airbag

B SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

& SRS Airbag System Monitors

s01ah04

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including seatbelt pretensioners) with the

ignition switch in the “ON” position. The

SRS airbag system warning light will show

normal system operation by illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

The diagnostic system monitors the com-

ponents to ensure normal operation. For

information on the components the system

monitors, refer to “Components” �P81.

Note that the diagnostic system does not

monitor the SRS airbag system warning

light itself.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

102

(105,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-

less a technician checks and repairs

the system as needed, the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag

will not operate properly in the event

of a collision, which may result in

injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& SRS Airbag System Servicing

s01ah05

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, consult your

nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-

ing with or disconnecting the

system’s wiring could result in

accidental inflation of the SRS

airbag or could make the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

indicated in the following list, have

the work performed by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-

bag control module, impact sensors

and airbag modules are stored in

these areas.

. Under the center of the instru-

ment panel

. On both the right and left sides at

the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column

and nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’s side and nearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

103

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(106,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

SRS frontal airbag, or either roof

side (from the front pillar to a point

over the rear seat) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

. The center pillar, front door, rear

wheel house or rear sub frame, or

an area near these parts, was in-

volved in an accident in which the

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag did not deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

. The rear part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which no

SRS airbag was deployed.

& Precautions against Vehicle

Modification

s01ah06

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may re-

sult in serious injury, no modifi-

cations should be made to any

components or wiring of the SRS

airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions.

– Installation of custom steering

wheels

– Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

– Installation of custom seats

– Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

– Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

– Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other ac-

cessory to a front pillar, a

center pillar, a rear pillar, the

windshield, a side window, an

assist grip, or any other cabin

surface that would be near a

deploying SRS curtain airbag.

– Installation of additional elec-

trical/electronic equipment

such as a mobile two-way

radio on or near the SRS air-

bag system components and/

or wiring is not advisable. This

could interfere with proper

operation of the SRS airbag

system.

– Modifications on or inside the

front door panels for the pur-

pose of a speaker replace-

ment or sound insulation

. The impact sensors, which detect

the pressure of an impact, are

located in the doors. Do not

modify any components of the

doors or door trims, such as the

addition of door speakers for

example. Any modifications to

the doors will create a risk of the

airbag system becoming inop-

erative or unintended airbag de-

ployment.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

104

(107,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Attachment of any equipment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts on your

vehicle.

& How to Contact the Vehicle

Manufacturer concerning

Modifications for Persons

with Disabilities That May

Affect the Advanced Airbag

System

s01ah15

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,

front side frame, radiator panel, instrument

panel, combination meter, steering wheel,

steering column, tire, suspension or floor

panel can affect the operation of the

SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you

have any questions, you may contact the

following SUBARU distributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Advocacy Department

One Subaru Drive

P.O. Box 9103

Camden, NJ 08101-9877

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii

2850-A Pukoloa St.,

Honolulu, HI 96819

877-215-0338

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-

biles

491 East Marine Corps Drive,

Dededo, Guam 96929

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,

Puerto Rico

787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc.

Consumer Support Department

560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario

L5R 4J7

1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distribu-

tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are

in such an area, please contact the

SUBARU distributor or dealer from which

you bought your vehicle.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

105

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(108,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(109,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s02

2-1. Keys ................................................................. 108

Key Number Plate............................................... 108

2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start

System (If Equipped) .................................... 108

Safety Precautions..............................................109

Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access”

Entry Function.................................................. 112

Unlock Using PIN Code Access .......................... 115

Power Saving Function ....................................... 117

Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ......... 118

Disabling Keyless Access Function .................... 118

Selecting Audible Signal Operation ..................... 121

Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation.......121

Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator .............. 121

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly ........................................................... 121

Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob .................121

Replacing Access Key Fob ................................. 121

Certification for Keyless Access with Push-

Button Start System ......................................... 121

2-3. Immobilizer...................................................... 123

Security Indicator Light.......................................123

Key Replacement................................................ 123

Certification for Immobilizer System.................... 123

2-4. Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 124

Locking the Doors .............................................. 126

Unlocking the Doors ........................................... 126

Opening the Rear Gate .......................................126

Setting Audible Signal Operation ........................ 126

Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ...... 127

Vehicle Finder Function...................................... 127

Sounding a Panic Alarm..................................... 127

Replacing the Battery......................................... 127

Replacing Lost Transmitters............................... 127

Certification for Remote Keyless Entry System ... 127

2-5. Door Locks ......................................................128

Locking and Unlocking from the Outside............ 128

Locking and Unlocking from the Inside .............. 130

Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking .................... 131

Key Lock-In Prevention Function........................ 131

Battery Drainage Reduction Function ................. 132

2-6. Alarm System ..................................................133

Alarm System Operation .................................... 133

Arming the System ............................................ 133

Disarming the System ........................................ 134

Alarm System Setting......................................... 135

If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm

System ............................................................ 135

Valet Mode ......................................................... 135

2-7. Child Safety Locks ..........................................136

2-8. Windows...........................................................136

Power Window Operation ................................... 137

Initialization of Power Window (Windows with

One-Touch Auto Up and Down Function).......... 139

2-9. Rear Gate .........................................................139

2-10. Moonroof (If Equipped) .................................140

Moonroof Switches ............................................ 141

Sunshade........................................................... 142

Keys and Doors

(110,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2-1. Keys

s02aa

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, refer to

“Keyless Access with Push-Button

Start System” �P108.

1 Master keys

2 Key number plate

The master key fit all locks on your vehicle.

. Ignition switch

. Driver’s door

NOTE

Locking/unlocking using the remote

keyless entry system can also be con-

trolled with the buttons on the key. For

detailed information, refer to “Remote

Keyless Entry System” �P124.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the “ON” position to

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,

thereby stopping the engine.

& Key Number Plate

s02aa01

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set. Write

down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle. Refer to “Key Replacement”

�P123.

2-2. Keyless Access with

Push-Button Start System

(If Equipped)

s02ap

The following access key fobs are pro-

vided with the vehicle.

1 Access key fobs

2 Key number plate

The keyless access with push-button start

system allows you to perform the following

functions when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Locking and unlocking all the doors

(including the rear gate and the fuel

filler lid)

. Starting and stopping the engine. For

detailed information, refer to “Starting

and Stopping Engine (Models with

Keys

108

(111,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Push-Button Start System)” �P315.

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For detailed information, refer to

“Alarm System” �P133.

NOTE

. Locking and unlocking by the re-

mote keyless entry system can also

be controlled with the buttons on the

access key fob. For detailed infor-

mation, refer to “Remote Keyless

Entry System” �P124.

. Carefully store the key number plate

supplied with the access key fob. It

is necessary for vehicle repair and

additional registration of access key

fobs. For details, refer to “Key

Replacement” �P123.

An emergency key is attached to each

access key fob.

1 Release button

2 Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

The emergency key is used for the follow-

ing operations.

. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door

& Safety Precautions

s02ap11

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, stay at

least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the

transmitting antennas installed on

the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmit-

ting antennas on the vehicle could

adversely affect the operation of

implanted pacemakers and im-

planted defibrillators.

If you wear electronic medical equip-

ment other than an implanted pace-

maker or an implanted defibrillator,

before using the keyless access

with push-button start system, refer

to “Radio waves used for the key-

less access with push-button start

system” mentioned later, and con-

tact the electronic medical equip-

ment manufacturer for more infor-

mation. The radio waves from the

transmitting antennas on the vehicle

could adversely affect the operation

of the electronic medical equipment.

“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”

. The keyless access with push-

button start system uses radio

waves of the following fre-

quency* in addition to the radio

waves used for the remote key-

less entry system. The radio

waves are periodically output

from the antennas installed on

the vehicle as shown in the

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

109

Keys and Doors

(112,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

following illustrations.

*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz

1 Antennas

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access

key fob inside the vehicle or

within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the

vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The

access key fob may be locked

inside the vehicle, or the battery

may discharge rapidly. Note that

the push-button ignition switch

may not turn on in some cases

depending on the location of the

access key fob.

. The access key fob contains

electronic components. Observe

the following precautions to pre-

vent malfunctions.

– It is recommended to have the

access key fob battery re-

placed at an authorized

SUBARU dealer to avoid the

risk of damage.

– Do not get the access key fob

wet. If the access key fob gets

wet, wipe it off immediately

and let it dry completely.

– Do not apply strong impacts to

the access key fob.

– Never leave the access key

fob in direct sunlight or any-

where that may become hot,

such as on the dashboard. It

may damage the battery or

cause circuit malfunctions.

– Do not wash the access key

fob in an ultrasonic washer.

– Do not leave the access key

fob in humid or dusty loca-

tions. Doing so may cause

malfunctions.

– Keep the access key fob away

from magnetic sources.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a personal computer

or home electrical appliance.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a battery charger or

any electrical accessories.

– Do not apply metallic window

tint or attach metallic objects

to the windows.

– Do not fit non genuine acces-

sories or parts.

. If the access key fob is dropped,

the integrated emergency key in-

side may become loose. Be care-

ful not to lose the emergency key.

. When traveling in an airplane, do

not press the button of the ac-

cess key fob. If any button of the

access key fob is pressed, radio

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

110

(113,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

waves are emitted and may affect

the operation of the airplane. In a

bag, take measures to prevent

the buttons from being pressed

accidentally.

NOTE

. The operational/non-operational

setting for the keyless access func-

tion can be changed. For the setting

procedure, refer to “Disabling Key-

less Access Function” �P118.

. For detailed information about the

operation method for the push-but-

ton ignition switch while the keyless

access function is switched to the

non-operational mode, refer to “Ac-

cess Key Fob – If Access Key Fob

Does Not Operate Properly” �P441.

. The keyless access with push-but-

ton start system uses weak radio

waves. The status of the access key

fob and environmental conditions

may interfere with the communica-

tion between the access key fob and

the vehicle under the following con-

ditions, and it may not be possible to

lock or unlock the doors or start the

engine.

– When operating near a facility

where strong radio waves are

transmitted, such as a broadcast

station and power transmission

lines.

– When products that transmit

radio waves are used, such as

an access key fob or a remote

transmitter key of another vehi-

cle.

– When carrying the access key fob

of your vehicle together with the

access key fob or the remote

transmitter of another vehicle.

– When the access key fob is

placed near wireless communi-

cation equipment such as a cell

phone.

– When the access key fob is

placed near a metallic object.

– When metallic accessories are

attached to the access key fob.

– When carrying the access key fob

with an electronic appliance such

as a laptop computer.

– When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged.

. The access key fob is always com-

municating with the vehicle and is

continuously using the battery.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating condi-

tions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years.

If the battery becomes fully dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

. If an access key fob is lost, it is

recommended that all of the remain-

ing access key fobs be reregistered.

For reregistration of an access key

fob, contact a SUBARU dealer.

. For a spare access key fob, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

. Up to 7 access key fobs can be

registered for one vehicle.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the storage spaces inside the vehi-

cle, such as the door pocket, dash-

board or inside the cargo area.

Vibrations may damage the key fob

or turn on the switch, possibly

resulting in a lockout.

. After the vehicle battery is dis-

charged or replaced, initialization

of the steering lock system may be

required to start the engine. In this

case, perform the following proce-

dure to initialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “OFF” position.

For details, refer to “Switching

Power Status” �P151.

(2) Open and close the driver’s

door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

111

Keys and Doors

(114,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

When the steering is locked, the initi-

alization is completed.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– In the cargo area

If you do, the following situations

may occur.

– The access key fob is mistakenly

locked inside the vehicle.

– A false warning issues although

no malfunction actually occurs.

– No warning issues even when a

malfunction occurs.

& Locking and Unlocking with

“Keyless Access” Entry

Function

s02ap01

When the access key fob is carried within

the operating range, all the doors (includ-

ing the rear gate and the fuel filler lid) can

be locked/unlocked just by touching the

door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle can also be locked/un-

locked with the remote keyless entry

system. For details, refer to “Remote

Keyless Entry System” �P124.

! Operating ranges

s02ap0101

1 Antennas

2 Operating range

1 LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either of

the operating ranges, the LED indicator on

the access key fob flashes. When the

keyless access functions are disabled, the

LED indicator does not flash unless a

button on the access key fob is pressed.

NOTE

. If the access key fob is placed too

close to the vehicle body, the key-

less access functions may not oper-

ate properly. If it does not operate

properly, repeat the operation from

farther away.

. If the access key fob is placed near

the ground or in an elevated location

from the ground, even if it is in the

indicated operating range, the key-

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

112

(115,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

less access function may not oper-

ate properly.

. When the access key fob is within

the operating range, it is possible for

anyone, even someone who is not

carrying the access key fob, to

operate the keyless access function.

Note that the keyless access func-

tion can be operated only by the

door handle, door lock sensor or

rear gate opener button in the oper-

ating range in which the access key

fob is detected.

. It is not possible to lock the doors,

the rear gate and the fuel filler lid

using the keyless access function

when the access key fob is inside the

vehicle. However, depending on the

status of the access key fob and the

environmental conditions, the ac-

cess key fob may be locked inside

the vehicle. Before locking the vehi-

cle, make sure that you have the

access key fob.

. When the battery of the access key

fob is discharged, or when operating

it in a location with strong radio

waves or noise (e.g., near a radio

tower, power plant, broadcast sta-

tion or an area where wireless equip-

ment is used), or while talking on a

cell phone, the operating ranges

may be reduced, or the keyless

access function may not operate.

In such a case, perform the proce-

dure described in “Locking and

Unlocking” �P441.

. The doors may lock or unlock when

the car is being washed or exposed

to a significant amount of water that

touches the door handle while the

key fob is still in the operating range.

! How to lock and unlock

s02ap0108

It is possible to perform the following

operations when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel

filler lid.

. Lock and unlock the rear gate.

NOTE

. It is not possible to lock the doors,

the rear gate and the fuel filler lid

using the keyless access function

when the push-button ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”

position. Refer to “Switching Power

Status” �P151.

. If the door handle is gripped with a

gloved hand, the door lock may not

be released.

. If the door lock sensor is touched

four times or more repeatedly, the

system will ignore the sensor opera-

tion.

. When performing the locking proce-

dure too quickly, locking may not

complete. After performing the lock-

ing procedure, it is recommended to

pull the rear door handle to confirm

that the doors have been locked.

. If any of the doors (including the rear

gate) is not fully closed, the follow-

ing will occur to alert you.

– An electronic chirp sounds five

times.

– The hazard warning flashers

flash five times.

. If any of the doors or the rear gate is

open, the doors, the rear gate and

the fuel filler lid cannot be locked.

. Within 3 seconds after locking the

doors and the rear gate using the

keyless access function, it is not

possible to unlock the doors and/or

the rear gate using the keyless

access function.

. When locking, be sure to carry the

access key fob to prevent locking

the access key fob in the vehicle.

. The setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation can be changed by

operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P203 (11.6-inch display

models) or “Vehicle setting icons”

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

113

Keys and Doors

(116,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

�P221 (dual 7.0-inch display mod-

els). Also, the setting of the hazard

warning flasher operation can be

changed by your SUBARU dealer.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

! Locking with the door lock sensor

s02ap010801

1 Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all the

doors (including the rear gate) and touch

the door lock sensor on the door handle.

All the doors (including the rear gate and

the fuel filler lid) will be locked. Also, an

electronic chirp will sound once and the

hazard warning flashers will flash once.

NOTE

After touching the door lock sensor to

lock all of the doors (including the rear

gate), if you touch the door lock sensor

once more to attempt the lock opera-

tion without first unlocking the doors,

nothing will happen, even if the door

lock sensor is touched. In this case,

perform the unlocking operation once

first. You can then touch the door lock

sensor to lock the doors.

! Locking with the rear lock button

s02ap010802

1 Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all doors

including the rear gate and press the rear

lock button. The rear gate, the fuel filler lid

and all doors will be locked. Also, the

hazard warning flashers will flash once.

! Unlocking

s02ap010804

Carry the access key fob, and touch the

sensor behind the door handle.

. When the driver’s door handle is

gripped, only the driver’s door and the

fuel filler lid will be unlocked.

. When the front passenger’s door han-

dle is gripped, all the doors (including

the rear gate) and the fuel filler lid will be

unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

114

(117,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Opening rear gate

s02ap010805

1 Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the

rear gate opener button. Only the rear gate

will be unlocked and opened. Also, an

electronic chirp will sound twice and the

hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

! Door unlock selection function

s02ap0105

When the door is unlocked using the

keyless access function, only the doors

that were set and the fuel filler lid can be

unlocked.

The settings can be changed with the

following methods.

. The setting can be changed by operat-

ing the center information display.

For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P203 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

. The setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer.

& Unlock Using PIN Code Ac-

cess

s02ap21

1 Rear lock button

While all the doors (including the rear gate

and the fuel filler lid) are locked, you can

unlock them without a key by pressing the

rear lock button.

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the

key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It

is recommended that a 5-digit security

code (PIN code) is registered.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

115

Keys and Doors

(118,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Registration for a PIN code

s02ap2102

Steps Operation Time from the previous step

1 Turn off the ignition switch. —

2 Close all the doors (including the rear gate). —

Press and hold the “

” button on the access key fob, then press and hold the

rear lock button until a chirp sounds intermittently.

—

4 Press the “

” button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds

Input the PIN code using the rear lock button within 30 seconds after the chirp

sound of step 4.

For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following

procedure.

Within 30 seconds

(1) Press the button three times.

(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.

(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.

(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.

(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.

Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts

sounding intermittently.

—

7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.

—

NOTE

Press the “

” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the

“

” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

116

(119,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

. Press the rear lock button ten times

to enter “0”.

. Change the PIN code frequently to

protect your vehicle from theft.

. If you have lent your vehicle to

another person, confirm that the

PIN code has not been changed or

deleted. If the PIN code has been

changed or deleted, reregister a new

PIN code.

. If you make an error during the

registration procedure, press the

“

” or “ ” button on the access

key fob. Then start over from step 1.

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

you cannot register “00000” to

“99999” or “12345” as a PIN code.

. Do not register your vehicle license

plate number or simple numbers

such as “11122” or “12121” as a

PIN code. Doing so will increase the

risk of vehicle theft.

. When you try to register “22222”, the

registered PIN code will be deleted.

You cannot unlock the doors by PIN

Code Access until a new code is

registered.

. After registering a new PIN code,

make sure that you can unlock the

doors using the PIN code.

. The PIN code cannot be deleted

while the keyless access function

is disabled by operating the access

key fob.

. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-

lowing case.

– When you forget the PIN code

– When you want to change the PIN

code

! Unlocking

s02ap2103

Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 described

in “Registration for a PIN code”.

NOTE

. You cannot unlock by PIN Code

Access in the following cases.

– When the access key fob is within

the operating ranges

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position

. If you make an operation error dur-

ing the unlocking procedure, start

over with the unlocking procedure

after waiting for 5 seconds or longer.

. To protect your vehicle from theft, a

buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN

codes are entered five times con-

tinuously. If this occurs, you cannot

unlock the doors by PIN Code Ac-

cess for 5 minutes.

& Power Saving Function

s02ap23

To protect the access key fob battery and

the vehicle battery, the keyless access

function will be disabled as follows.

. When the keyless access function and

the remote keyless entry system have

not been used:

(1) 5 days after the push-button igni-

tion switch has been turned off,

communication between the an-

tennas and the access key fob will

be stopped.

(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors

(both lock sensor and unlock sen-

sor) on the front passenger’s door

will be disabled.

. When the access key fob has been left

in the operating range for 10 minutes or

longer while all doors are locked, the

keyless access function will be dis-

abled.

! Recovery from power saving mode

s02ap2301

When one of the following operations is

performed, the keyless access function

will be recovered.

. Unlock by gripping the door handle

(only when the sensors on the front

passenger’s door are not disabled) or

pressing rear gate opener button on the

rear gate.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

117

Keys and Doors

(120,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless

entry system.

. Open a door and then close it.

. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

& Power Saving Function of

Access Key Fob

s02ap26

This function stops the access key fob

from receiving signals and helps minimize

the battery consumption of the access key

fob.

1. Press the “

” button twice while hold-

ing the “

” button.

1 LED indicator

2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

times to notify that the setting is

complete.

When the access key fob is in the power

save mode, the keyless access function

and push-button start system will not be

available. To cancel the power save mode,

press one of the buttons on the access key

fob.

& Disabling Keyless Access

Function

s02ap07

WARNING

If you have an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, per-

form the procedure “By operating

the driver’s door” �P120 to disable

the keyless access function. If you

perform the procedure “By operat-

ing the access key fob” �P118, the

operation of an implanted pace-

maker or implanted defibrillator

may be affected by the radio waves

from the transmitting antennas in-

stalled on the vehicle.

When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to

use the keyless access function, the key-

less access function can be disabled.

NOTE

. If the access key is kept in or comes

near the vehicle, the system be-

comes active and both the vehicle

and access key batteries’ energy will

be consumed. If this occurs fre-

quently or continuously, both the

vehicle and access key batteries

can become fully drained.

. The locking and unlocking function

by the remote keyless entry system

is not disabled.

. To start the engine while the func-

tions are disabled, perform the pro-

cedure described in “Starting En-

gine” �P442.

! Disabling functions

s02ap0701

! By operating the access key fob

s02ap070102

To disable the keyless access function by

operating the access key fob, register a

PIN code for PIN Code Access. For details

about registering a PIN code, refer to

“Unlock Using PIN Code Access” �P115.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

118

(121,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. Rotate the lock lever forward.

3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”

button on the access key fob simulta-

neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the

function will be disabled.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

119

Keys and Doors

(122,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! By operating the driver’s door

s02ap070101

To disable the keyless access function by

operating the driver’s door, perform the

following procedures.

Steps Operation Time Status

1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. — Close

2 Push “

” on the power door locking switch. — Close

3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch

twice.

Within 5 sec. Open

5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 sec.

Open?Close?

Open?Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch

twice while the door is open.

Within 10 sec. Open

7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. Open?Close?Open

8 Close the door. Within 5 sec.

Open?Close

A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not

pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

120

(123,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Enabling functions

s02ap0702

When the procedure to disable the func-

tions is performed again, a chirp sound will

be heard, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE

. The keyless access function will be

enabled only if you perform the

procedure in the same manner you

disabled the function (for example,

when disabling by operating the

driver’s door, the function will not

be enabled even if you operate the

access key fob).

. Press the push-button ignition

switch if you do not know the

procedure in which the keyless

access function was disabled.

– When disabling by operating the

driver’s door: A chirp will not be

heard.

– When disabling by operating the

access key fob: A chirp will be

heard.

& Selecting Audible Signal Op-

eration

s02ap12

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can

turn the audible signal off by operating the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch

display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”

�P221 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

Furthermore, the volume setting of the

audible signal can also be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

& Selecting Hazard Warning

Flasher Operation

s02ap18

Using the hazard warning flasher, the

system will give you a visible signal when

the doors are locked or unlocked. If

desired, you can turn the hazard warning

flashers off by operating the center infor-

mation display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P203. The setting can also be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Warning Chimes and Warning

Indicator

s02ap06

The keyless access with push-button start

system is equipped with a warning chime

and the access key warning indicator in

order to minimize improper operations and

help protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to “Warning Chimes and

Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System” �P170.

& When Access Key Fob Does

Not Operate Properly

s02ap08

Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key

Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P441.

& Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob

s02ap09

Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access Key

Fob” �P497.

& Replacing Access Key Fob

s02ap13

Access key fobs can be replaced at

SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-

tact a SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System

s02ap14

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AKB

FCC ID: Y8PSU19S-3

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

121

Keys and Doors

(124,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

– Type 1

– Type 2

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

122

(125,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2-3. Immobilizer

s02ab

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can

be used to operate your vehicle. If engine

start is attempted with an unregistered

access key fob or key, the engine will not

start. Even if the engine does start, it will

stop after a few seconds. This system,

however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-

tee.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may be-

come hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

. Do not modify or remove the

system. If modified or removed,

the proper operation of the sys-

tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the

following security precautions:

– Never leave your vehicle unat-

tended with its keys inside.

– Before leaving your vehicle,

close all windows and the moon-

roof, and lock all the doors (in-

cluding the rear gate and the fuel

filler lid).

– Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type immobilizer system.

& Security Indicator Light

s02ab02

Refer to “Security Indicator Light” �P175.

& Key Replacement

s02ab03

Your key number plate will be required if

you ever need a replacement key made.

Any new key must be registered for use

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

before it can be used. The maximum

number of keys that can be registered for

use with one vehicle is as follows.

. Four (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

. Seven (models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

One key that has already been registered

is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code

still remains in the memory of the

vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-

curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code

should be erased from the memory. To

erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys

that will be used are required.

For details about new key registration

and erasing the lost key’s ID code,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for Immobilizer

System

s02ab05

. For models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

Refer to “Certification for Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System” �P121.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-3

– CONTINUED –

Immobilizer

123

Keys and Doors

(126,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

– Canada-spec. models

2-4. Remote Keyless Entry

System

s02ae

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-

mitter to severe shocks, such as

those experienced as a result of

dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit-

ter apart except when replacing

the battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter

wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with

a cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-

mitter on an airplane, do not

press the button of the remote

transmitter while in the airplane.

When any button of the remote

transmitter is pressed, radio

waves are sent and may affect

the operation of the airplane.

When you carry the remote trans-

mitter in a bag on an airplane,

take measures to prevent the

buttons of the remote transmitter

from being pressed.

Remote Keyless Entry System

124

(127,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Access key fob

1 Lock/arm button

2 Unlock/disarm button

3 Rear gate unlock button

4 PANIC button

Transmitter

1 Lock/arm button

2 Unlock/disarm button

3 Rear gate unlock button

4 PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking all the doors

(including the rear gate and the fuel

filler lid)

. Unlock the rear gate

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming. For details, refer

to “Alarm System” �P133.

The operable distance of the remote key-

less entry system is approximately 30 feet

(10 meters). However, this distance will

vary depending on environmental condi-

tions. The system’s operable distance will

be shorter in areas near a facility or

electronic equipment emitting strong radio

waves such as a power plant, broadcast

station, TV tower, or remote controller of

home electronic appliances.

NOTE

. For models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”, the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the push-button

ignition switch is in any position

other than the “OFF” position.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”, the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the key is inserted

in the ignition switch.

. The hazard warning flashers will

flash once or twice when the access

key fob/transmitter button is

pressed in the following cases.

– When locking the doors

– When unlocking the doors

– When unlocking the rear gate

– CONTINUED –

Remote Keyless Entry System

125

Keys and Doors

(128,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If desired, you can turn the hazard

warning flashers off by operating the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-

inch display models) or “Vehicle

setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch

display models). The setting can also

be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

& Locking the Doors

s02ae01

Press the “ ” button to lock all the doors

(including the rear gate and the fuel filler

lid). An electronic chirp will sound once

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

once.

If any of the doors (including the fuel filler

lid) is not fully closed, the following will

occur to alert you that the doors are not

properly closed.

. An electronic chirp sounds five times.

. The hazard warning flashers flash five

times.

When you close the door, it will automati-

cally lock and then the following will occur.

. An electronic chirp sounds once.

. The hazard warning flashers flash

once.

& Unlocking the Doors

s02ae02

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s

door and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp

will sound twice and the hazard warning

flashers will flash twice. To unlock all the

doors and the rear gate, briefly press the

“

” button again within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button for

unlocking all the doors is extremely

short, the system may not respond.

& Opening the Rear Gate

s02ae13

Press the “ ” button to unlock the rear

gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

This operation setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

& Setting Audible Signal Op-

eration

s02ae07

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

If desired, you can turn the audible signal

off by operating the center information

display. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P203 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-

inch display models). Furthermore, the

volume setting of the audible signal can

also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the following steps to deactivate

the audible signal. Take the same steps to

restore the function.

Remote Keyless Entry System

126

(129,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Steps Operation Time

1 Sit in the driver’s seat. —

2 Close all doors. —

(1)

Press and hold “

” on

the power locking

switch.

Within

10 sec.

(2)

Insert the key into the

ignition switch and pull it

out at least 6 times.

Open and close the dri-

ver’s door.

Within

10 sec.

The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times

to indicate completion of the setting.

Your SUBARU dealer can perform the

above procedure for you.

& Selecting Hazard Warning

Flasher Operation

s02ae26

Using the hazard warning flasher, the

system will give you a visible signal when

the doors are locked or unlocked. If

desired, you can turn the hazard warning

flashers off by operating the center infor-

mation display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P203 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual

7.0-inch display models). The setting can

also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle Finder Function

s02ae05

Use this function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “

”

button three times in a 5-second period will

cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once

and its hazard warning flashers to flash

three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “

” button

three times, the system may not re-

spond to the signals from the remote

transmitter.

& Sounding a Panic Alarm

s02ae06

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the remote transmitter. If a

button on the remote transmitter is not

pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after

approximately 30 seconds.

& Replacing the Battery

s02ae08

Refer to “Replacing Battery” �P496.

& Replacing Lost Transmitters

s02ae09

If you lose a transmitter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), you should re-

program all your transmitters for security

reasons. For details, contact your

SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters

programmed into the remote keyless entry

system.

& Certification for Remote Key-

less Entry System

s02ae18

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTB1G496

FCC ID: CWTD1G141

CAUTION

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

– CONTINUED –

Remote Keyless Entry System

127

Keys and Doors

(130,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

– Type 1

– Type 2

2-5. Door Locks

s02ac

& Locking and Unlocking from

the Outside

s02ac01

NOTE

If you unlock the driver’s door with a

key (including an emergency key) and

open the door while the alarm system is

armed, the alarm system is triggered

and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this

case, perform any of the following

operations:

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Press any button on the access key

fob (except when the access key fob

battery is discharged).

. Turn the push-button ignition switch

to the “ACC” position.

. Carry the access key fob and per-

form either of the following proce-

dures.

– Grip the front door handle.

– Press the rear gate opener but-

ton.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Press any button on the remote

transmitter (except when the trans-

mitter battery is discharged).

Door Locks

128

(131,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position.

For details about the alarm system,

refer to “Alarm System” �P133.

! How to lock and unlock the vehicle

using the key

s02ac0101

1 Rotate the key toward the front to lock.

2 Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.

In this case, only the driver’s side door is

locked or unlocked.

NOTE

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The emergency key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is facing

and insert it again.

! How to lock the vehicle without

using the key

s02ac0102

To lock the door from outside without the

key, the following methods are available.

! Locking using lock lever

s02ac010201

1 Rotate the lock lever forward.

2 Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was operated

will be locked.

! Locking using power door lock-

ing switch

s02ac010202

1 Press the side of the power door

locking switch.*

2 Close the door.

*: For details about the power door locking

switch, refer to “How to operate the power

door locking switches” �P130.

In this case, all the closed doors, the fuel

filler lid and the rear gate are locked at the

same time.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

– CONTINUED –

Door Locks

129

Keys and Doors

(132,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Locking and Unlocking from

the Inside

s02ac02

! How to use the lock lever

s02ac0202

1 Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.

2 Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever forward. To unlock the door from

the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Always make sure that all the doors and

the rear gate are closed before starting to

drive.

WARNING

. Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of

seatbelts and child restraint sys-

tems, locking the doors reduces

the chance of being thrown out of

the vehicle in an accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out by preventing a

door from being accidentally

opened, and intruders from un-

expectedly opening doors and

entering your vehicle.

. Do not pull the front door handle

from inside while driving. The

door could open even if it is

locked.

CAUTION

Do not pull the front inside door

handle while operating the door

lock. There is a risk that it will not

be possible to open or lock the front

doors.

! How to operate the power door

locking switches

s02ac0203

All the doors (including the rear gate and

the fuel filler lid) can be locked and

unlocked by pressing either side of the

power door locking switches located on

the driver’s side and the front passenger’s

side doors.

1 Lock

2 Unlock

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

Door Locks

130

(133,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Automatic Door Locking/Un-

locking

s02ac08

All the doors (including the fuel filler lid) are

automatically locked or unlocked under

the following conditions.

. For automatic door locking

– When the vehicle speed reaches 12

mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory

default setting).

– When the select lever is shifted into

a position other than the “P” posi-

tion.

. For automatic door unlocking

– When the driver’s door is open

(factory default setting).

– When the ignition switch is turned to

OFF.

– When the select lever is shifted into

the “P” position.

NOTE

. The automatic door lock and unlock

setting can be changed with the

center information display. Refer to

“Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch dis-

play models) or “Vehicle setting

icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch display

models).

. When locking the door by the power

door locking switches, automatic

door locking will not operate.

. When unlocking the door by the

power door locking switches, auto-

matic door unlocking will not oper-

ate.

. If the system detects a strong en-

ough impact to deploy the airbags,

all doors may be automatically un-

locked. For further details, refer to

“Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking

Operation When Involved in an Ac-

cident” �P445.

. When getting out of the vehicle from

a rear door, make sure to unlock all

the doors by pushing the unlock

side of the power door locking

switch. If a rear door is unlocked

from the inside door lever then the

door is opened and closed, the Key

lock-in prevention function will be

triggered. All doors will be unlocked,

the Key lock-in prevention warning

indicator “

” will appear and the

warning chime will also sound.

& Key Lock-In Prevention

Function

s02ac06

Under the following conditions, all the

doors will not lock when the power door

locking switch is pushed with the driver’s

door open.

. The key is still in the ignition switch

(models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

NOTE

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before lock-

ing the doors.

. When getting out of the vehicle from

a rear door, make sure to unlock all

the doors by pushing the unlock

side of the power door locking

switch.

. When getting out of the vehicle from

a rear door, make sure to unlock all

the doors by pushing the unlock

side of the power door locking

switch. If a rear door is unlocked

from the inside door lever then the

door is opened and closed, the Key

lock-in prevention function will be

triggered. All doors will be unlocked,

the Key lock-in prevention warning

indicator “

” will appear and the

warning chime will also sound.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “opera-

tional”. This function’s operational/

non-operational setting can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for details.

– CONTINUED –

Door Locks

131

Keys and Doors

(134,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-

vention function

s02ac0602

When the system is set so that it does not

operate, the doors are locked by the

following operation.

. If the lock lever is turned to the front

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then

closed with the lock lever in that

position, the driver’s door is locked.

. If the emergency key is used to lock the

driver’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

& Battery Drainage Reduction

Function

s02ac03

Under various conditions, lights inside the

vehicle will automatically turn off to reduce

the risk of discharging the battery.

! Battery drainage reduction function

for various conditions

s02ac0302

This function will enter standby mode

under the following conditions:

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

. The key is removed from the ignition

key cylinder (models without “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

If the following actions are not performed

within 20 minutes, while the function is in

standby mode, any room lights that are on

will automatically turn off.

Turning

off lights

– Map light

– Dome light

– Ignition switch light*

– Cargo area light

– Vanity mirror light

Actions

– Turn the ignition switch to the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

– Open or close the doors, in-

cluding the rear gate.

– Push the unlock button on the

access key fob or transmitter.

– Hold the front door handle and

unlock it while holding the ac-

cess key fob.*

– Insert the key into the keyhole of

the ignition switch.*

– Come close to the vehicle that

the front door was locked while

holding the access key fob (if

OFF delay timer setting for

period of time is not off).*

– Push the panic button on the

access key fob or transmitter.

*1: Models with “keyless access with push-

button start system”

*2: Models without “keyless access with push-

button start system”

Perform the action in the above table to

illuminate the lights again when the battery

drainage reduction function is active.

NOTE

. The battery drainage reduction func-

tion cannot be turned off.

. If the battery drainage reduction

function is in operation when a door

is open, the target room light will not

be illuminated.

. To protect the battery from battery

drainage, make sure that all doors,

including the rear gate, are comple-

tely closed when leaving the vehicle.

Door Locks

132

(135,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2-6. Alarm System

s02af

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the hazard warning flashers

flash if someone attempts to break into

your vehicle.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the keyless access function or access

key fob.

The system will not be activated when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

& Alarm System Operation

s02af01

When the alarm system is armed, it is

triggered by the opening any of the doors,

the rear gate or engine hood.

The alarm system will activate the follow-

ing alarms when triggered.

. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30

seconds.

. The hazard warning flashers will flash

for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the rear gate or engine

hood remains open after the 30-second

period, the horn will continue to sound for a

maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear

gate or engine hood is closed while the

horn is sounding, the horn will stop

sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to trigger

the illumination of the following interior

lights.

. Map lights (illuminates only when

the door interlock switch is in the

“DOOR” position)

. Dome light (illuminates only when

the dome light switch is in the

“DOOR” position)

The notifications regarding the map

lights and dome light are deactivated

as the factory setting. A SUBARU deal-

er can activate the system. Contact

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Arming the System

s02af04

The alarm system becomes armed when

the following operation is performed.

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped) and turn the ignition switch

to the “OFF” position.

2. Carry the key and get out of the

vehicle.

3. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

4. Lock the doors using any of the

following methods.

. Locking using the remote keyless

entry system. For details, refer to

“Remote Keyless Entry System”

�P124.

. Locking using the keyless access

function (if equipped). For details,

refer to “Locking with the door lock

sensor” �P114.

. Locking using the power door lock-

ing switch. For details, refer to

“Locking using power door locking

switch” �P129.

– CONTINUED –

Alarm System

133

Keys and Doors

(136,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Security indicator light

NOTE

. All doors, the rear gate and fuel filler

lid will lock, an electronic chirp will

sound once, the hazard warning

flashers will flash once, and the

security indicator light will start

flashing rapidly.

. If any of the doors or the rear gate is

not fully closed, an electronic chirp

sounds five times and the hazard

warning flashers flash five times to

alert you that the doors (or the rear

gate) are not properly closed. When

you close the door, doors will auto-

matically lock and the system will

automatically arm in 30 seconds.

5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the

system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state,

the security indicator light will then flash

slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-

onds), indicating that the system has been

armed for surveillance.

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

windows and/or moonroof are open.

Always make sure that they are fully

closed before arming the system.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it

performed by your SUBARU dealer.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

– Doors (including the rear gate)

are unlocked using the access

key fob/remote transmitter.

– Doors (including the rear gate)

are unlocked using the keyless

access function (models with

“keyless access with push-but-

ton start system”).

– Any door (including the engine

hood) is opened.

– The ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position (models with-

out “keyless access with push-

button start system”).

– Push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” position

(models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

& Disarming the System

s02af05

Perform either of the following procedures.

. Briefly press unlock/disarm button (for

less than 2 seconds) on the access key

fob/remote transmitter.

. Carry the access key fob and perform

either of the following procedures

(models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

– Grip the front door handle.

– Press the rear lock button.

– Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator light

will then change slowly (once approxi-

mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-

proximately every 2 seconds), indicating

that the alarm system has been disarmed.

! Emergency disarming

s02af0501

If you cannot disarm the system using the

access key fob/transmitter (i.e., the trans-

mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter

battery is too weak), you can disarm the

system without using the access key fob/

Alarm System

134

(137,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

remote transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn the

ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position to the “ON” position with a

registered key/access key fob.

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, if the ac-

cess key fob battery is discharged,

perform the procedure described in

“Switching Power Status” �P441. In

such a case, replace the battery im-

mediately. Refer to “Replacing Battery

of Access Key Fob” �P497.

& Alarm System Setting

s02af11

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Disarming the System” �P134.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors, the rear gate and engine hood.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down “

” of the driver’s power

door locking switch, open the driver’s

door within the following 1 second, and

wait 10 seconds without releasing the

switch. The setting will then be chan-

ged as follows.

Setting

status

Combination

meter display

(color LCD)

Horn

Activate AL ON Once

Deactivate AL OFF

Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting change

done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If You Have Accidentally

Triggered the Alarm System

s02af03

! To stop the alarm

s02af0301

Do any of the following operations:

. Press any button on the access key fob/

remote transmitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position (models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start system”).

. Turn the push-button ignition to the

“ACC” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the

alarm. If the immobilizer transponder

is not registered, the alarm will not

stop.

& Valet Mode

s02af06

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system to

deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm Sys-

tem Setting” �P135. The security indica-

tor light will continue to flash once every 3

seconds, indicating that the system is in

the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system to activation

mode. Refer to “Alarm System Setting”

�P135.

Alarm System

135

Keys and Doors

(138,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2-7. Child Safety Locks

s02ag

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to

the “LOCK” position when children

sit on the rear seat. Serious injury

could result if a child accidentally

opens the door and falls out.

Each rear door has a child safety lock.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

“LOCK” position, the door cannot be

opened from inside. The door can only

be opened from the outside.

2-8. Windows

s02ah

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s body parts or

any other objects from being

caught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the power

window.

NOTE

. If the power window system detects

resistance, an impact or abnormal-

ity, the window operation may be

automatically stopped to prevent

further jamming, entrapment or mal-

function.

– The closing window slides down

slightly and stops.

– The opening window stops slid-

ing down.

. The power window system may

detect resistance, an impact or an

abnormality in the following cases.

– A substantial sized object is

caught between the window and

the window frame.

– A foreign object is caught be-

tween the window and the win-

dow frame.

– The vehicle drives over a deep

pothole.

. The window cannot be closed for a

few seconds after the window is

automatically stopped by the sys-

tem.

Child Safety Locks

136

(139,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Power Window Operation

s02ah07

! Power window switches

s02ah0701

. Driver’s side power window switches:

1 For front left window*

2 For front right window*

3 For rear left window

4 For rear right window

5 Lock switch

*: With one-touch auto up and down feature

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster on the driver

side door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

. Passenger’s side power window

switches:

Each passenger’s window can be con-

trolled by the power window switch located

on the door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

! Operating the window

s02ah0702

With one-touch auto up and down feature

1 Automatically close*

2 Close

3 Open

4 Automatically open*

*: To stop the window halfway, operate the

switch to the opposite side.

– CONTINUED –

Windows

137

Keys and Doors

(140,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Without one-touch auto up and down

feature

1 Close

2 Open

NOTE

Avoid the following.

. Continuously operating a switch in

the same direction after the window

is fully closed or fully opened.

. Continuously operating three or

more switches all at once in the

same direction after the windows

are fully closed or fully opened.

Either of the operations described

above may cause the power window

breaker to operate making it impossible

to open or close the window. Be sure to

initialize the power windows. Refer to

“Initialization of Power Window (Win-

dows with One-Touch Auto Up and

Down Function)” �P139.

! Anti-entrapment function (windows

with one-touch auto up and down

function)

s02ah0703

While closing the window automatically, if

the window senses a substantial enough

object trapped between the window and

the window frame, it automatically moves

down slightly and stops.

If a foreign object is caught while window is

opening automatically, the window will

stop.

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test the power

window operation using body

parts.

. If an object is caught just before

the window fully closes, the sys-

tem may not operate properly.

NOTE

. If a window detects an impact similar

to that caused by trapping an object

(for example, when the vehicle en-

counters a deep pothole), the anti-

entrapment function may operate.

. You cannot close the window for a

few seconds after the anti-entrap-

ment function operates.

! Off delay function (windows with

one-touch auto up and down func-

tion)

s02ah0705

The windows can be operated for approxi-

mately 40 seconds even after the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”

position. If a front door is opened within 40

seconds, the off delay function is can-

celed.

! Locking the passengers’ windows

s02ah0704

1 Lock

2 Unlock

When the lock switch is in the lock position,

the rear passenger’s window switches on

the driver side door and the passengers’

Windows

138

(141,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

window switches cannot be operated.

When the indicator on the window

switches does not illuminate, the window

switch cannot be operated.

& Initialization of Power Win-

dow (Windows with One-

Touch Auto Up and Down

Function)

s02ah06

If the one-touch auto up and down function

or off delay function does not operate

properly, operate each window according

to the following procedure in order to

initialize the power window system.

1. Close the door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

3. Open the window completely and then

press and hold down the power win-

dow switch for approximately 1 sec-

ond.

4. Close the window completely and then

pull and hold the power window switch

for approximately 1 second.

2-9. Rear Gate

s02aj

CAUTION

When loading and unloading cargo,

be careful not to come in contact

with the hot engine exhaust gas or

the exhaust pipe, because they

could burn you.

NOTE

Avoid keeping the rear gate open for

more than a few hours. Doing so may

drain the vehicle battery.

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using any of the following systems.

. Power door locking switch: Refer to

“Locking and Unlocking from the In-

side” �P130.

. Keyless access with the push-button

start system: Refer to “Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System”

�P108.

. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to

“Remote Keyless Entry System”

�P124.

. Locking and unlocking from the outside

with the emergency key (models with

double locking system): Refer to “Lock-

ing and Unlocking from the Outside”

�P128.

Opening the rear gate:

Rear gate opener button

1. Unlock the rear gate.

2. Press and hold the rear gate opener

button. The rear gate will open slightly.

3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be opened due to

a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-

function in the door locking/unlocking

system or other causes, you can unlock

it by manually operating the rear gate

lock release lever. For the procedure,

refer to “Rear Gate – If the Rear Gate

Cannot Be Opened” �P442.

– CONTINUED –

Rear Gate

139

Keys and Doors

(142,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Closing the rear gate:

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down

firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull down on the inside handle as shown in

the illustration.

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from entering the vehicle,

always keep the rear gate closed

while the engine is running.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed

grip. Also do not close the rear

gate by pulling the grip from

inside the cargo space. There is

a danger of your hand being

caught and injured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading cargo.

. Never attempt to close the rear

gate by grabbing or pressing on

the outer metal surface or da-

mage may result.

. Always use the inside handle to

avoid damaging the exterior sur-

face of the gate.

2-10. Moonroof (If Equipped)

s02ak

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if any of the follow-

ing conditions occur.

. The vehicle stops suddenly.

. The vehicle turns sharply.

. The vehicle is involved in an

accident.

. Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside

objects.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

Moonroof

140

(143,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the moon-

roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to tilt the

moonroof down before doing so.

. If the moonroof does not close,

have the system checked by a

SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Moonroof Switches

s02ak02

! Tilting moonroof

s02ak0201

1 Up

2 Down

To raise the moonroof, press and hold the

switch in the up side and release. To lower

the moonroof, press and hold the switch in

the down side.

NOTE

Release the switch after the moonroof

has been raised or has been lowered

completely. Pressing the switch con-

tinuously may cause damage to the

moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

s02ak0202

1 Open

2 Close

Opening the moonroof:

To open the moonroof using the automatic

function, press and hold the open side of

the switch and then release it.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while opening it, momentarily

press the open or close side of the switch.

The sunshade will also be opened to-

gether with the moonroof. The moonroof

will stop at a position approximately 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) away from the fully opened

position.

Press the open side of the switch again to

open the moonroof completely.

– CONTINUED –

Moonroof

141

Keys and Doors

(144,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Closing the moonroof:

To close the moonroof using the automatic

function, press and hold the close side of

the switch and then release it.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while closing it, momentarily

press the open or close side of the switch.

NOTE

. After washing the vehicle or after it

rains, wipe away water on the roof

prior to opening the moonroof to

prevent drops of water from falling

into the passenger compartment.

. Driving with the moonroof fully open

can cause an annoying sound to be

generated at high speeds. If this

occurs, use the moonroof at the

initial stop position of 0.6 in (1.5

cm) away from the fully opened

position.

. For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with

the moonroof fully opened.

! Anti-entrapment function

s02ak0203

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

& Sunshade

s02ak05

The sunshade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade

also moves back.

Moonroof

142

(145,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(146,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(147,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s03

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without Push-

Button Start System) .................................... 148

Key Positions ..................................................... 148

Key Reminder Chime .......................................... 149

Ignition Switch Light........................................... 149

3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with

Push-Button Start System) .......................... 150

Safety Precautions..............................................150

Operating Range for Push-Button Start System...150

Switching Power Status ...................................... 151

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly ........................................................... 152

3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher................................. 152

3-4. Meters and Gauges ........................................ 152

Speedometer ...................................................... 152

Tachometer.........................................................153

Odometer ........................................................... 153

Double Trip Meter ............................................... 153

Fuel Gauge......................................................... 154

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................... 154

Combination Meter Settings ................................155

3-5. Illumination Brightness Control .................... 155

Auto Dimmer Cancel Function ............................ 156

3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights ........................ 156

Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ...................... 157

SRS Airbag System Warning Light ...................... 160

Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF

Indicators Light ................................................160

CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction

Indicator Light .................................................. 161

Charge Warning Light ......................................... 162

Oil Pressure Warning Light ................................ 162

Engine Low Oil Level Warning Light ................... 162

AT OIL TEMP Warning Light ............................... 162

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (U.S.-Spec.

Models)............................................................ 163

ABS Warning Light............................................. 164

Brake System Warning Light .............................. 165

Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light............. 166

Auto Vehicle Hold Indicator Light ....................... 167

Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................... 167

Door Open Indicator Light .................................. 168

Engine Hood Open Warning Light ...................... 168

Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light ............. 168

All-Wheel Drive Warning Light ............................ 168

Power Steering Warning Light ............................ 168

Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation

Indicator Light.................................................. 169

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light.... 170

Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of

the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start

System (If Equipped) ........................................ 170

Security Indicator Light ...................................... 175

SI-DRIVE Indicator.............................................. 176

Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator................... 176

Turn Signal Indicator Lights ............................... 176

High Beam Indicator Light.................................. 176

High Beam Assist Indicator ................................ 176

Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning

Light ................................................................ 176

LED Headlight Warning Light ............................. 177

Instruments and Controls

(148,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator

Light ................................................................177

Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light .....177

Headlight Indicator Light..................................... 177

Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped)....... 177

Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow) ............... 177

Auto Start Stop OFF Indicator Light ....................177

Auto Start Stop Indicator Light (Green) ............... 177

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected Indicator

Light ................................................................178

X-MODE Indicator ............................................... 178

Hill Descent Control Indicator Light .................... 178

BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator (If Equipped).......... 178

BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator (If Equipped)................ 178

Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator .................... 178

RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)................... 179

RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) .........................179

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator

(If Equipped)..................................................... 179

Driver Monitoring System Operation Indicator

Light (Green) (If Equipped)................................179

Driver Monitoring System Warning Light

(Yellow) (If Equipped)........................................ 179

Driver Monitoring System OFF Indicator Light

(If Equipped)..................................................... 179

Driver Monitoring System Temporary Stop

Indicator Light (If Equipped).............................. 180

3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) ...... 180

Basic Operation.................................................. 181

Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and

Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen ............... 181

Warning Screen .................................................. 182

Meter Information Screen ................................... 182

Telltale Screen ................................................... 184

Basic Screens.................................................... 185

Digital Speed Screen .......................................... 188

3-8. Center Information Display (CID) ...................188

Features ............................................................ 188

Welcome Screen ................................................ 189

Good-Bye Screen ............................................... 189

Interruption Screen ............................................ 190

Touch Screen Operations ................................... 190

11.6-Inch Display Models.................................... 190

Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models (If Equipped) ......... 213

3-9. Clock ................................................................227

Setting the Clock Manually ................................. 227

Setting the Clock Automatically.......................... 228

Time Zone (Models with Navigation System)....... 229

Daylight Saving Time (Models with Navigation

System) ........................................................... 229

3-10. Valet Mode .....................................................230

Activation of Valet Mode..................................... 230

Deactivation of Valet Mode ................................. 231

3-11. Light Control Switch .....................................231

Headlights ......................................................... 232

High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) ...................... 234

Headlight Flasher ............................................... 235

High Beam Assist Function ................................ 235

Daytime Running Light System .......................... 238

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH).........238

3-13. Headlight Beam Leveler................................240

3-14. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped) ..........240

Instruments and Controls

(149,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3-15. Turn Signal Lever ......................................... 241

One-Touch Lane Changer ................................... 241

3-16. Wiper and Washer ........................................ 241

Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches.............. 243

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch .............. 244

3-17. Defogger and Deicer..................................... 246

3-18. Mirrors ........................................................... 247

Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function)

(If Equipped)..................................................... 247

Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass (If Equipped) ...... 248

Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink

(If Equipped) .................................................... 249

Outside Mirrors .................................................. 256

3-19. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .....................257

Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped) ...... 258

3-20. Horn................................................................259

Instruments and Controls

(150,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models

without Push-Button Start

System)

s03aa

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is being

driven or towed because that will

lock the steering wheel, prevent-

ing steering control. And when

the engine is turned off, it takes a

much greater effort than usual to

steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure to

follow this procedure could re-

sult in injury to a child or others.

Children could operate the power

windows, the moonroof or other

controls or even make the vehicle

move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a key

holder or to a large bunch of other

keys, centrifugal force may act on it

as the vehicle moves, resulting in

unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine

is not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in

the “ON” or “ACC” position can

cause the battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the

“ACC” position, turn the steering

wheel slightly to the left and right as

you turn the ignition switch.

& Key Positions

s03aa11

Position Description

LOCK

The key can only be inserted

or removed in this position.

The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you

remove the key.

ACC

In this position the electrical

accessories (audio, acces-

sory power outlet, etc.) can be

used.

This is the normal operating

position after starting the en-

gine.

START

The engine is started in this

position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)

148

(151,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

. To turn the key from the “ACC” to

“LOCK” position:

– Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

– Push in and turn the key.

. If your registered key fails to start

the engine, pull out the key once (the

security indicator light will blink),

and then insert the key again and

turn it to the “START” position again

to restart the engine.

. The engine may not start in the

following cases:

– The key grip is touching another

key or a metallic key holder.

– The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer trans-

ponder.

– The key is near or touching

another transmitter.

& Key Reminder Chime

s03aa05

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

The chime stops under the following

conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The key is removed from the ignition

switch.

. The driver’s door is closed.

& Ignition Switch Light

s03aa06

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for approxi-

mately 30 seconds and gradually turns off

under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is closed.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

– CONTINUED –

Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)

149

Instruments and Controls

(152,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The light gradually turns off under the

following conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The doors are locked using the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. Push-Button Ignition

Switch (Models with Push-

Button Start System)

s03bg

& Safety Precautions

s03bg04

Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P109.

& Operating Range for Push-

Button Start System

s03bg01

1 Antennas

2 Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key fob is not detected

within the operating range of the

antennas inside the vehicle, the

push-button ignition switch and the

engine start cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key fob is

outside the vehicle, if it is placed too

close to the glass, it may be possible

to switch the power or to start the

engine.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places. It may become

impossible to operate the push-

button ignition switch and the en-

gine start.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– At the corner of the cargo area

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the en-

gine, if the access key fob battery is

discharged, perform the procedure

described in “Access Key Fob – If

Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly” �P441. In such a case,

replace the battery immediately. Re-

fer to “Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob” �P497.

Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)

150

(153,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Switching Power Status

s03bg02

1 Operation indicator

2 Push-button ignition switch

The power status is switched every time

the push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal.

Every time the button is pressed, the

power is switched in the sequence of

“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When

the engine is stopped and the push-

button ignition switch is in “ACC” or

“ON”, the operation indicator on the

push-button ignition switch illuminates

in orange.

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off

Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. To prevent the vehicle battery

from discharging, do not leave

the push-button ignition switch

in the “ON” or “ACC” position for

a long time.

. To avoid a malfunction, observe

the following precautions.

– Do not spill drinks or other

liquids on the push-button

ignition switch.

– Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand

that is soiled with oil or other

contaminants.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If the operation indicator on the

push-button ignition switch does

not illuminate even when the

instrument panel illumination is

turned on, have the vehicle in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all

the way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

. If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in

green when the push-button ignition

switch is pressed, steering is

– CONTINUED –

Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)

151

Instruments and Controls

(154,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

locked. When this occurs, press the

push-button ignition switch while

turning the steering wheel left and

right.

! Battery drainage reduction function

s03bg0201

When the push-button ignition switch is left

in the “ACC” position for approximately 20

minutes or the “ON” position (the engine is

not running) for approximately 1 hour, the

push-button ignition switch will be auto-

matically switched to “OFF” to reduce the

possibility of the battery going dead. (This

function is activated when the select lever

is in the “P” position.)

& When Access Key Fob Does

Not Operate Properly

s03bg03

Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key

Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P441.

3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher

s03ab

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn

other drivers when you have to park your

vehicle under emergency conditions. The

hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

press the hazard warning flasher switch on

the instrument panel. All the turn signal

lights and the turn signal indicator lights

will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the

switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

3-4. Meters and Gauges

s03ad

NOTE

Liquid crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges in the

combination meter. You will find their

indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

& Speedometer

s03ad03

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter

needles and gauge needles that occurs

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position can be activated or

deactivated.

For details, refer to “General settings”

�P198 (11.6-inch display models) or

“General settings” �P215 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

Hazard Warning Flasher

152

(155,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Tachometer

s03ad06

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter

needles and gauge needles that occurs

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position can be activated or

deactivated.

For details, refer to “General settings”

�P198 (11.6-inch display models) or

“General settings” �P215 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

& Odometer

s03ad04

1 TRIP RESET switch

2 Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. The

indicators will turn off when the TRIP

RESET switch is not operated for

approximately 10 seconds.

& Double Trip Meter

s03ad05

1 TRIP RESET switch

2 Trip meter

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

TRIP RESET switch.

– CONTINUED –

Meters and Gauges

153

Instruments and Controls

(156,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

To reset the trip meter, select either the A

trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the

TRIP RESET switch.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

. If the connection between the com-

bination meter and battery is broken

for any reason such as vehicle

maintenance or fuse replacement,

the data recorded on the trip meter

will be lost.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position,

the odometer/trip meter will light up.

It is possible to switch between the A

trip meter and B trip meter indica-

tions while the odometer/trip meter

is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset the

trip meter by pressing and holding

the TRIP RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when the

TRIP RESET switch is not operated

for approximately 10 seconds.

& Fuel Gauge

s03ad07

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge

shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains

fuel.

The gauge may move slightly due to fuel

level movement in the tank (e.g., during

braking, turning or acceleration).

NOTE

. You will see the “

” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel

filler lid is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

while the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position,

the fuel gauge will light up and

indicate the amount of fuel remain-

ing in the tank.

The gauge will turn off when the

TRIP RESET switch is not operated

for approximately 10 seconds.

& Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

s03ad08

1 Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

Meters and Gauges

154

(157,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Engine operation is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range

and high revving operation when the

engine is not warmed up enough should

be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “Engine Overheating”

�P435.

& Combination Meter Settings

s03ad16

Meter settings can be set on the center

information display. For details, perform

the procedures described in “General

settings” �P198 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “General settings” �P215 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

3-5. Illumination Brightness

Control

s03aj

The illumination brightness of the combi-

nation meter and center information dis-

play dims under the following conditions.

. The light switch is in the “

” or “ ”

position when the ambient light is dark.

. The light switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination brightness

becomes the maximum and the

automatic dimming function does

not work at all.

. The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch

is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

. The operation method of illumina-

tion brightness will differ depending

whether or not “Brightness Dial” in

the center information display is on.

Refer to the operation method in-

dicated the following table.

“Brightness Dial” is on.

Operational

item

Combi-

nation

meter

Center

informa-

tion dis-

play

Control dial Available Available

“Brightness”*

on the center

information

display

Not avail-

able

Not avail-

able

– CONTINUED –

Illumination Brightness Control

155

Instruments and Controls

(158,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

“Brightness Dial” is off.

Operational

item

Combi-

nation

meter

Center

informa-

tion dis-

play

Control dial Available

Not avail-

able

“Brightness”

on the center

information

display

Not avail-

able

Available

*1: When “Brightness Dial” is on,

“Brightness” on the center infor-

mation display is not available.

For details about “Brightness Dial” on/

off settings, refer to “General settings”

�P198 (11.6-inch display models) or

“General settings” �P215 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

& Auto Dimmer Cancel Func-

tion

s03aj01

When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the max-

imum regardless of the position of the

control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust

the illumination brightness by using the

control dial. When the ambient light is dark,

you can dim the illumination brightness as

described above.

The operational/non-operational setting

and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel

function can be changed by your SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

3-6. Warning and Indicator

Lights

s03ae

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned to

the “ON” position. This permits checking

the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, the following lights

illuminate and turn off after several sec-

onds or after the engine has started:

: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt

warning light turns off only when the

driver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front pas-

senger’s seatbelt warning light (The

seatbelt warning light turns off only

when the front seat passenger fastens

the seatbelt.)

: Rear seatbelt warning light

: SRS airbag system warning light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator light

Warning and Indicator Lights

156

(159,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Engine low oil level warning light

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Electronic parking brake indicator

light

: Power steering warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-

spec. models)

: Low fuel warning light

: Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt Warning Light

and Chime

s03ae01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and passen-

ger’s seat, as required by current safety

standards.

! Driver’s and front passenger’s seats

s03ae0114

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver and

front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by

illuminating the warning lights in the loca-

tions indicated in the following illustration

and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

s03ae011401

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front

passenger’s warning light will illuminate,

then it will blink for several seconds. If the

seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fastened,

the warning chime may make a peep

sound.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened

while driving, the seatbelt warning

system operates as follows accord-

ing to the vehicle speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when driving approximately 4

mph (6 km/h) or less.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

157

Instruments and Controls

(160,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will make a

peep sound when driving be-

tween approximately 4 mph (6

km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). The

warning chime will stop when the

vehicle stops.

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound

loudly when 15 seconds have

elapsed while driving between

approximately 4 mph (6 km/h)

and 13 mph (20 km/h).

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound

loudly when driving approxi-

mately more than 13 mph (20

km/h).

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

seatbelt is fastened.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

system for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

seatbelt warning system monitors whether

or not there is a passenger on the front

passenger’s seat.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

device from functioning correctly or

cause the device to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seat-

back.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occu-

pant to place his/her hands or

legs on the front passenger’s

seatback, or allow him/her to pull

the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Front Seats” �P30.

If the seatbelt warning system for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant, although we

strongly recommend that all children sit

in the rear seat properly restrained.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passen-

ger’s seat are locked into place se-

curely by moving the seat back and

forth.

If still the seatbelt warning system for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

Warning and Indicator Lights

158

(161,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Rear passenger’s seats

s03ae0115

Rear seatbelt warning light

1 Rear left seat

2 Rear center seat

3 Rear right seat

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light and

chime reminds the rear passenger to

fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the

warning lights in the locations indicated in

the above illustration and sounding a

chime.

WARNING

. The driver must check that all the

passengers have fastened their

seatbelts properly since the seat-

belt warning system may not

detect passengers under the fol-

lowing circumstances.

– When cushions or child re-

straint systems, etc., are used.

– When a child or small adult is

sitting in the seat.

. Observe the following precau-

tions

– Do not apply any strong im-

pact to the rear seat.

– Do not fold the seatback for-

ward when objects are on the

seat.

– Do not spill liquid on the rear

seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it

off immediately.

– Do not remove or disassemble

the rear seat.

NOTE

. The seatbelt warning system of the

rear seat detects if the seat is

occupied by a passenger. Heavy

cargo or large pets on the rear seat

may result in the activation of the

passenger seatbelt warning light

and chime. Fastening the rear seat-

belt prior to loading cargo or large

pets will avoid activating the pas-

senger seatbelt warning light and

chime.

. When folding the rear seat, ensure

that the seat is empty prior to fold-

ing. Items caught between the seat

bottom and seatback, when folded,

may damage the seat surface or

activate the passenger seatbelt

warning light and chime.

! Operation

s03ae011501

If passengers in the rear seats do not

fasten their seatbelts while the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or

blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not

fastened.

NOTE

. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)

are/is still not fastened while driving,

the seatbelt warning system oper-

ates as follows according to the

vehicle speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when driving approximately 4

mph (6 km/h) or less.

– When driving approximately be-

tween 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph

(20 km/h), if the seatbelts are not

fastened for 50 seconds, the

seatbelt warning lights will blink

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

159

Instruments and Controls

(162,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

and a warning chime will sound.

The chime will make a peep

sound for 15 seconds, and it then

will become louder and continue

for 35 seconds. The warning light

will blink for 50 seconds, then it

will illuminate steadily and the

chime will stop.

– When driving more than approxi-

mately 13 mph (20 km/h), if seat-

belts are not fastened for 35

seconds, the warning lights of

the unfastened seatbelts will

blink and a chime will sound

loudly. If the rear seatbelts are

not fastened after 35 seconds,

the blinking warning light will

illuminate steadily and the chime

will stop. The warning lights will

continue to illuminate until their

seatbelts are fastened.

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

seatbelt is fastened.

& SRS Airbag System

Warning Light

s03ae02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-

less a technician checks and repairs

the system as needed, the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag

will not operate properly in the event

of a collision, which may result in

injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

For details about the components mon-

itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

Airbag System Monitors” �P102.

& Front Passenger’s Frontal

Airbag ON and OFF Indica-

tors Light

s03ae03

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

For details about the operating conditions

of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer to

“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag Sys-

tem” �P83.

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator lights show you the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag.

The indicators are located as shown in the

illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

Warning and Indicator Lights

160

(163,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indicators

remain illuminated or off simultaneously

even after the system check period, the

system is malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

& CHECK ENGINE

Warning Light/Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light

s03ae04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is at least one problem or

potential problem somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

! If the light illuminates constantly

s03ae0401

If the light illuminates constantly while

driving or does not turn off after the engine

starts, an emission control system mal-

function has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light coming on

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with

the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap

will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/malfunction indicator light turn off

immediately. It may take several driving

trips. If the light does not turn off, take your

vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer

immediately.

! If the light is blinking

s03ae0402

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should conform to

the following instructions.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

161

Instruments and Controls

(164,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light may stop blinking

and illuminate steadily after several driving

trips. You should have your vehicle

checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer

immediately.

& Charge Warning Light

s03ae05

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the drive belt. If the drive belt is

loose, broken or if the drive belt is in good

condition but the light remains illuminated,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

& Oil Pressure Warning

Light

s03ae06

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

& Engine Low Oil Level

Warning Light

s03ae58

This light appears when the engine oil level

decreases to the lower limit.

If the warning light appears, check the

engine oil level on a level surface. When

the engine oil level is not within the normal

range, refill with engine oil. Refer to

“Engine Oil” �P465. After adding or

changing the engine oil, warm up the

engine and stop it on a level surface, then

start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute or

more. Confirm that the warning light has

turned off after the engine has started. If

the warning light does not turn off after

refilling the engine oil, or the light appears

even though the engine oil level is within

the normal range, have the vehicle

checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. The oil level will be detected by the

system just after turning the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. If the

oil level is below the lower limit when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the engine low oil

level warning light will turn on.

. When the vehicle is parked on a

steep slope, the engine low oil level

warning light may not illuminate

even if the oil level is below the

lower limit to avoid erroneous light-

ing.

& AT OIL TEMP Warning

Light

s03ae07

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the transmis-

sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Transmission control system warn-

ing

s03ae0701

If the AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may indicate

that the transmission control system is not

working properly. Contact your nearest

Warning and Indicator Lights

162

(165,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light (U.S.-

Spec. Models)

s03ae08

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will go out.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low

tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately one min-

ute, have the system inspected by your

nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned on or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead, per-

form the following procedure. Other-

wise an accident involving serious

vehicle damage and serious perso-

nal injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while

gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

163

Instruments and Controls

(166,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure to

the COLD tire pressure shown on

the tire inflation pressure label on

the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, refer to “Flat Tires” �P429.

When a replacement tire is mounted

or a wheel rim is replaced without

the original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the Low tire

pressure warning light will illumi-

nate steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately one minute. This indi-

cates the TPMS is unable to monitor

all four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low pres-

sure threshold, the low tire pressure

warning light should turn off a few

minutes later. Therefore, be sure to

install the specified size for the front

and rear tires.

& ABS Warning Light

s03ae09

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position,

but it does not turn off even

after starting the vehicle.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down; however, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light illuminates together

with the brake system warning light if the

EBD system malfunctions. For further

details of the EBD system malfunction

warning, refer to “Brake System Warning

Light” �P165.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

Warning and Indicator Lights

164

(167,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

after the engine is started but turns

off immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been

started, but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately

and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction. When

the battery becomes fully charged, the

light will turn off.

& Brake System Warn-

ing Light

s03ae10

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the brake system warning light

illuminates, the electronic park-

ing brake system may be mal-

functioning. Immediately stop

your vehicle in a safe location,

use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU deal-

er. For details, refer to “Electro-

nic Parking Brake” �P345.

NOTE

. Even if the brake system warning

light illuminates, if the warning light

behavior is as described in the

following examples, the electronic

parking brake system is not mal-

functioning.

– The warning light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is

applied or released.

– The warning light turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position again.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate immediately after the en-

gine is started. However, it is not

malfunctioning if the warning light

turns off after the electronic parking

brake is released.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate after the electronic park-

ing brake is frequently applied and

released. However, the electronic

parking brake system is not mal-

functioning if the light turns off after

a short period of time.

. When the engine is started while the

electronic parking brake is applied/

released, the system may judge an

abnormal situation and the warning

light may illuminate. If the warning

light illuminates, turn the ignition

switch once to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position and then restart the engine.

Then, apply/release the electronic

parking brake. If the warning light

turns off, the system will be re-

stored.

This light has the following functions.

! Brake fluid level warning

s03ae1002

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of

the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

165

Instruments and Controls

(168,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the

reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have

the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

s03ae1003

If the warning light remains on even though

the parking brake is released, the brake

fluid level may be low or there could be a

problem with the EBD system. Park the

vehicle in a safe place immediately and

contact a SUBARU dealer.

! Electronic brake booster warning

s03ae1009

The brake system warning light illuminates

when the electronic brake booster is

malfunctioning. If the warning light illumi-

nates, promptly park in a safe location as

soon as possible and contact your

SUBARU dealer.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

s03ae1004

The brake system warning light illuminates

when the electronic parking brake system

is malfunctioning. If the warning light

illuminates, promptly park in a safe loca-

tion as soon as possible and contact your

SUBARU dealer.

The brake system warning light remains

illuminated when the parking brake cannot

be released even if the parking brake

switch is pushed. For details, refer to

“Electronic Parking Brake” �P345.

! Frequent operation warning

s03ae100403

The brake system warning light illuminates

and a chirp sound will be heard if the

parking brake switch is operated too

frequently. In this case, the operation of

the parking brake switch is restricted to

protect the electronic parking brake sys-

tem.

& Electronic Parking

Brake Indicator Light

s03ae85

! Parking brake indicator

s03ae8501

The light illuminates with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position. It turns off when

the parking brake is fully released.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

s03ae8502

WARNING

. When you release the electronic

parking brake while the engine is

running, the electronic parking

brake indicator light will turn off.

However, if the light still illumi-

nates, stop the vehicle in a safe

location immediately and have

the system inspected by a

SUBARU dealer.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, the elec-

tronic parking brake system may

be malfunctioning. Immediately

stop your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion, use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing and contact your SUBARU

dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-

tronic Parking Brake” �P345.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

electronic parking brake applied, the

electronic parking brake indicator

light remains illuminated for ap-

proximately 30 seconds and then

turns off.

Warning and Indicator Lights

166

(169,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. When the electronic parking brake

switch is pulled to apply the electro-

nic parking brake while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion, the electronic parking brake

indicator light illuminates, remains

illuminated for approximately 30

seconds and then turns off.

. Even if the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, if the warning

light behavior is as described in the

following examples, the electronic

parking brake system is not mal-

functioning.

– The indicator light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is

released.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash immediately after

the engine is started. However, it is

not malfunctioning if the indicator

light turns off after the electronic

parking brake is released.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash after the electro-

nic parking brake is frequently ap-

plied and released. However, the

electronic parking brake system is

not malfunctioning if the light turns

off after a short period of time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes when the electronic parking brake

system is malfunctioning. If the indicator

light flashes, promptly park in a safe

location as soon as possible and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated when the parking

brake cannot be released even if the

parking brake switch is pushed. For de-

tails, refer to “Electronic Parking Brake”

�P345.

! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-

ing

s03ae850201

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated when the parking brake cannot

be applied.

! Frequent operation warning

s03ae850202

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated too frequently. In this case, the

operation of the parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking

brake system.

NOTE

Wait until the indicator light turns off.

& Auto Vehicle Hold Indi-

cator Light

s03ae94

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light does not illuminate even when

“Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” is

touched to activate the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing.

This indicator illuminates when the Auto

Vehicle Hold is activated. This indicator

blinks while the vehicle is stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details,

refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold function”

�P348.

& Low Fuel Warning Light

s03ae11

The low fuel warning light illuminates when

the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.1

US gal (7.8 liters, 1.7 Imp gal). It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

167

Instruments and Controls

(170,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Door Open Indicator

Light

s03ae61

When any of the doors or the rear gate is

not fully closed, the door open indicator

light appears. This function is effective

even if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position or the key is

removed from the ignition switch (models

without “keyless access with push-button

start system”).

The open door is indicated by the corre-

sponding part of the door open indicator

light.

Always make sure this indicator does not

appear before you start to drive.

& Engine Hood Open

Warning Light

s03ae98

The warning light illuminates if the engine

hood is not fully closed. This function is

effective even if the ignition switch is in the

“OFF” or “ACC” position.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

& Windshield Washer

Fluid Warning Light

s03ae42

This light appears when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

0.6 US qt (0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).

& All-Wheel Drive Warn-

ing Light

s03ae13

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe location and then check

whether all four tires are the same

diameter and whether any of the

tires has a puncture or has lost air

pressure for some other reason.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the

AWD warning light may flash. Use of the

temporary spare tire should therefore

be restricted to the minimum time

necessary. Replace the temporary

spare tire with a conventional tire as

soon as possible.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure excessively

low in any of its tires.

& Power Steering Warn-

ing Light

s03ae53

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power steer-

ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

Warning and Indicator Lights

168

(171,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely

low speeds, such as while frequently

turning the steering wheel during

parallel parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long

period of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However, this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

that may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol Warning Light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

Operation Indicator

Light

s03ae14

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

s03ae1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

becomes inoperative, causing the

warning light to illuminate. Although

both the Vehicle Dynamics Control

and ABS are inoperative in this case,

the ordinary functions of the brake

system are still available. You will be

safe while driving in this condition,

but drive carefully and have your

vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only

illuminates. At this time, the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) remains

fully operational.

. The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem malfunctions.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light, ABS warning light, and

brake system warning light illumi-

nate simultaneously if the EBD sys-

tem malfunctions. For further details

of the EBD system malfunction

warning, refer to “Electronic Brake

Force Distribution (EBD) system

warning” �P166.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

169

Instruments and Controls

(172,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns

off immediately and remains off.

. The warning light illuminates after

the engine has started and turns off

while the vehicle is subsequently

being driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but turns off immediately

and remains off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

s03ae1402

The indicator light flashes during activation

of the skid suppression function and during

activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the

engine has been started, especially

in cold weather. This does not in-

dicate the existence of a problem.

The light should turn off as soon as

the engine has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light is

on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine

has warmed up) after the engine has

started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF Indicator Light

s03ae15

The light illuminates when “Vehicle Dy-

namics Control” is selected to deactivate

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The light does not illuminate while the

system check.

. The light does not turn off even after a

period of approximately 2 seconds after

the ignition switch has been turned to

the “ON” position.

& Warning Chimes and Warning

Indicator of the Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System (If Equipped)

s03ae55

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system is equipped with a warning chime

and the access key warning indicator in

order to minimize improper operations and

help protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator appears, take the

appropriate action.

You cannot turn the warning chimes off.

However, the volume setting of the outside

warning chime can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

Warning and Indicator Lights

170

(173,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

dealer for details.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indica-

tor on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the engine. This indicates

the status that the steering wheel is

not released and could result in an

accident involving serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in green, if the operation

indicator is still flashing in green,

there could be a steering lock

malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

. Even when the access key fob is

within the operating ranges inside

the vehicle, the access key warning

for engine start may be provided

depending on the status of the

access key fob and the environmen-

tal conditions.

. When the access key fob is taken out

of the vehicle through an open

window, the access key takeout

warning or passenger access key

takeout warning will not be pro-

vided.

! List of warnings

s03ae5504

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing indicator does not appear, take

the appropriate action.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

171

Instruments and Controls

(174,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding, ding ...

(intermittent)

— —

The driver’s door is opened while the push-

button ignition switch is “ACC” position and

the select lever is in the “P” position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch

the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch is switched

to “OFF” while the driver’s door is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Lockout warning:

The doors are locked by following methods

when an access key fob is left in the car.

. The door is closed when the lock lever of

the door is in the lock position.

. The door is closed when the power door

locking switch is in the lock position.

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,

and lock the doors.

The doors cannot be locked while the access

key fob is inside the vehicle.

A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will

be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Access key lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the

access key fob is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,

and lock the doors.

If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the

doors cannot be locked.

—

Beep, beep,

beep, beep,

beep (5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and

one of the doors including the rear gate is

opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.

If one of the doors including the rear gate is

opened, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding

Long beep (60

seconds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while you

are carrying the access key fob, the push-

button ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF” and the select lever is in the “P”

position.

Return the access key fob inside the vehicle,

or switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

If the push-button ignition switch is not

switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be

locked.

Ding, ding ...

(7 seconds)

— —

Access key warning:

The vehicle is driven while the access key fob

is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive the

vehicle.

Warning and Indicator Lights

172

(175,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding — —

Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch is pressed

while the access key fob is not inside the

vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding

Beep, beep,

beep (3 times)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the access

key fob and closes the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding

Beep, beep,

beep (3 times)

—

Passenger access key takeout warning:

A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the

access key fob and closes a door other than

the driver’s door while the push-button

ignition switch is in a position other than

“OFF”.

Return the access key fob to inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

Long beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous)

—

Access key takeout without “P” position

warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the access

key fob and closes the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Long beep

(continuous)

— —

Select lever position warning:

. Case 1: The engine is turned off by

pressing the push-button ignition switch

while the select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. Case 2: The driver’s door is opened

while the push-button ignition switch is in

a position other than “OFF” and the

select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

. Case 1: Start the engine, shift the select

lever to the “P” position, switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit

the vehicle.

. Case 2: Shift the select lever to the “P”

position, switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

173

Instruments and Controls

(176,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding —

Flashes in green

(15 seconds max)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure is performed, but

the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and left

lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding — Flashes in orange

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction is detected in the power

system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and

have the vehicle inspected.

Warning and Indicator Lights

174

(177,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Security Indicator Light

s03ae16

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation of

the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

s03ae1601

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm System”

�P133.

! Immobilizer system

s03ae1602

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF”

position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the

following conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is

used (for example, the key is unregistered

or the ID code does not match), the power

is not switched to “ON” and the security

indicator light continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

. Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion.

. Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above conditions, it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light illumi-

nates. For details about the immobilizer

system, refer to “Immobilizer” �P123.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It

means that the matching of the ID

code is completed and the immobi-

lizer system is deactivated, and it

does not indicate a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running

– The push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or

closed

Models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running

– For approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON” position to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as the security indicator light

flashes irregularly, it will not affect

the functionality of the immobilizer

system.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

175

Instruments and Controls

(178,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& SI-DRIVE Indicator

s03ae52

SI-DRIVE indicator

1 Sport (S) mode

2 Intelligent (I) mode

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE

mode.

For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to

“SI-DRIVE” �P332.

& Select Lever/Gear Position

Indicator

s03ae43

1 Upshift indicator

2 Downshift indicator

3 Select lever/gear position indicator

The select lever position is displayed on

the indicator.

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator, which shows the

current gear selection, and the available

up shift/downshift indicator light up. Refer

to “Selection of Manual Mode” �P330.

& Turn Signal Indicator

Lights

s03ae20

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing Bulbs” �P491.

& High Beam Indicator

Light

s03ae21

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

operating the headlight flasher.

& High Beam Assist Indi-

cator

s03ae83

This indicator appears when the high

beam assist function is activated. For

details about the high beam assist func-

tion, refer to “High Beam Assist Function”

�P235.

& Automatic Headlight

Beam Leveler Warning

Light

s03ae33

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates while driving, have

your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU

dealer.

Warning and Indicator Lights

176

(179,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& LED Headlight Warning

Light

s03ae76

This light illuminates if the LED headlights

malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF Indicator

Light

s03ae89

This light illuminates when the Steering

Responsive Headlight function is off. For

details about the on/off setting, refer to

“Car settings” �P203.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight Warning

Light

s03aeb2

The light illuminates when a malfunction

occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-

light. Refer to “Steering Responsive Head-

light (SRH)” �P238.

& Headlight Indicator

Light

s03ae24

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. The light switch is turned to the “

” or

“

” position.

. The light switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

& Front Fog Light Indica-

tor Light (If Equipped)

s03ae25

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

& Auto Start Stop Warn-

ing Light (Yellow)

s03ae65

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning light is

illuminated in yellow, there may be a

malfunction in the Auto Start Stop

system. When starting the engine

again after the Auto Start Stop

warning light illuminates, if it is still

illuminating, we recommend that

you have your vehicle inspected at

a SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

The Auto Start Stop warning light will

illuminate in yellow if you open the engine

hood when the engine has been tempora-

rily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.

In this case, to ensure safety, the engine

will not be automatically restarted, even if

you release the brake pedal. Use normal

operation to restart the engine.

& Auto Start Stop OFF

Indicator Light

s03aeb3

This light will illuminate when “Auto Start

Stop” is touched to prevent the Auto Start

Stop system from operating. It will turn off

when “Auto Start Stop” is touched once

more to enable operation of the Auto Start

Stop system. For details about the setting,

refer to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch

display models) or “Setting of the lower

display” �P218 (dual 7.0-inch display

models).

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator

light does not illuminate when “Auto

Start Stop” is touched, we recom-

mend that you contact a SUBARU

dealer for an inspection as soon as

possible.

& Auto Start Stop Indica-

tor Light (Green)

s03ae66

This indicator light illuminates when the

engine has been temporarily stopped by

the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off

when the engine is restarted.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

177

Instruments and Controls

(180,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Auto Start Stop No

Activity Detected Indi-

cator Light

s03aea3

When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator

light illuminates when the operating con-

dition of the Auto Start Stop system is not

met. The light will turn off when the vehicle

starts driving. Refer to “Non-operational

conditions” �P355.

& X-MODE Indicator

s03ae68

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)

1 X-MODE indicator

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)

1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator

2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

This indicator appears while X-MODE is

activated. It will disappear when X-MODE

is deactivated. Refer to “To Activate/

Deactivate X-MODE” �P341.

& Hill Descent Control

Indicator Light

s03ae69

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in standby. It will

flash while the hill descent control function

is operating. It will disappear when the hill

descent control function is not available.

& BSD/RCTA Warning In-

dicator (If Equipped)

s03ae80

This warning indicator appears on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

when the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) or

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) is mal-

functioning for any reason. For further

details, refer to “BSD/RCTA Warning In-

dicator” �P368. If this indicator remains

displayed, have your vehicle inspected by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF Indica-

tor (If Equipped)

s03ae86

This indicator appears on the combination

meter display (color LCD) when “Rear

Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)” is touched

to deactivate the BSD (Blind Spot Detec-

tion) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert),

or when the BSD/RCTA is suspended

temporarily. For details, refer to “BSD/

RCTA OFF Indicator” �P368.

& Icy Road Surface

Warning Indicator

s03ae82

When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning

indicator will illuminate to inform the driver

that the road surface may be frozen.

Warning and Indicator Lights

178

(181,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be

delayed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. The icy road surface warning indi-

cator should be treated only as a

guide. Be sure to check the condi-

tion of the road surface before driv-

ing.

. Once the icy road surface warning

indicator appears, it will not disap-

pear unless the outside temperature

has increased to 418F (58C) or high-

er.

& RAB Warning Indi-

cator (If Equipped)

s03ae91

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc-

tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing (RAB) System” �P371.

& RAB OFF Indicator (If

Equipped)

s03ae92

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is

turned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking (RAB) system is suspended

temporarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) System” �P371.

& Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF Indicator (If

Equipped)

s03ae93

This indicator illuminates when the Sonar

Audible Alarm is turned OFF. For the

setting procedure, refer to “Car settings”

�P203.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem Operation Indicator

Light (Green) (If

Equipped)

s03aea4

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is activated. Refer to

“Driver Monitoring System operation in-

dicator light (green)” �P390.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem Warning Light (Yel-

low) (If Equipped)

s03aeb6

This warning light illuminates if the Driver

Monitoring System malfunctions. We re-

commend that you have your vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible. Refer to “Driver Monitoring

System warning light (yellow)” �P390.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem OFF Indicator Light

(If Equipped)

s03aea5

This indicator illuminates when “Driver

Monitoring System” is touched to deacti-

vate the Driver Monitoring System. Refer

to “Driver Monitoring System OFF indica-

tor light” �P390.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

179

Instruments and Controls

(182,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem Temporary Stop In-

dicator Light (If

Equipped)

s03aea6

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.

Refer to “Driver Monitoring System tem-

porary stop indicator light” �P390.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops

temporarily in the following circum-

stances.

. The temperature of the Driver Mon-

itoring System unit is high.

3-7. Combination Meter Dis-

play (Color LCD)

s03bn

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

combination meter display (color

LCD) while the vehicle is in motion.

When operation of the combination

meter display (color LCD) interferes

with your ability to concentrate on

driving, stop the vehicle before

performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate on

the display while driving. Doing so

may cause you to look away from the

road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

Also, a warning message will appear on

the display if a malfunction is detected. In

addition, several settings for the displayed

content can be performed.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

1 Meter information screen (Refer to “Me-

ter Information Screen” �P182.)

2 Warning screen (Refer to “Warning

Screen” �P182.)/Basic screen (Refer to

“Basic Screens” �P185.)

3 EyeSight screen*

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

180

(183,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

4 Digital speed screen (Refer to “Digital

Speed Screen” �P188.)

5 Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale Screen”

�P184.)

6 Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-

fer to “Select Lever/Gear Position Indi-

cator” �P176.)

7 X-MODE indicator (Refer to “X-MODE

Indicator” �P178.)/SI-DRIVE indicator

(Refer to “SI-DRIVE Indicator” �P176.)

8 Odometer (Refer to “Odometer”

�P153.)/Double trip meter (Refer to

“Double Trip Meter” �P153.)

A: Activating the EyeSight system

B: Deactivating the EyeSight system

*: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight

Owner’s Manual.

& Basic Operation

s03bn01

Control switches

By operating or of the control

switches, the screens can be changed.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the

information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with

on the display,

press the

switch on the steering wheel.

& Welcome Screen (Opening

Animation) and Good-Bye

(Ending Animation) Screen

s03bn08

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen

are motion graphic displayed on the

combination meter display and center

information display upon entering and

exiting the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlocking the door, the wel-

come screen (opening animation) will

appear on the combination meter display

(color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination

meter display (color LCD) gradually turns

off by showing good-bye screen (ending

animation).

NOTE

. The welcome screen and the good-

bye screen may differ in the actual

words and appearance.

. The basic screen will be shown

when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position while the wel-

come screen is displayed.

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

181

Instruments and Controls

(184,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Once the welcome screen appears, it

takes a certain period of time to

display it again.

. If the ignition switch is operated

after unlocking the driver’s door,

the welcome screen will not appear

even when the driver’s door is

opened and closed.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver’s door by

using the remote keyless entry sys-

tem (all models) or the keyless

access function (if equipped) while

the welcome screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen including the

audio/navigation unit can be set to

on or off.

. The welcome screen can be set to on

or off. For details, refer to “General

settings” �P198 (11.6-inch display

models) or “General settings”

�P215 (dual 7.0-inch display mod-

els).

. The good-bye screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Gen-

eral settings” �P198 (11.6-inch dis-

play models) or “General settings”

�P215 (dual 7.0-inch display mod-

els).

& Warning Screen

s03bn05

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear on

combination meter display (color LCD).

Take the appropriate actions based on the

messages indicated.

& Meter Information Screen

s03bn12

The meter information screen can be

changed. For details, refer to “General

settings” �P198 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “General settings” �P215 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

! ECO gauge

s03bn1201

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel con-

sumption since the trip meter was last

reset and the current rate of fuel consump-

tion.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel

efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit

Needle position

“+” side “−” side

MPG Better Poorer

l/100km Poorer

Better

NOTE

. The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication.

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

182

(185,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is

not shown until driving 0.6 miles (1

km). Until that time, the ECO gauge

does not operate.

! Clock and temperature

s03bn1202

This screen displays the clock and outside

temperature.

NOTE

. The clock can be displayed in either

12-hour display or 24-hour display.

For details, refer to “Clock” �P227.

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be

delayed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Celsius (8C) or

Fahrenheit (8F). For details, refer to

“Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch dis-

play models) or “Vehicle setting

icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch display

models).

! Compass (if equipped)

s03bn1203

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

! Driving range on remaining fuel

s03bn1204

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

183

Instruments and Controls

(186,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

& Telltale Screen

s03bn09

1 Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on

the telltale screen.

NOTE

. When there is warning information

to display, it will be displayed in five

warning indicators, starting on the

left in ascending order of severity.

. If there are 6 or more warning

messages to display, the indicators

will be displayed in sequential order.

Mark Name Page

Door open indicator

light

168

Engine hood open

warning light

168

LED headlight warning

light

177

High beam assist indi-

cator

176

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light

177

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

177

Engine low oil level

warning light

162

AT OIL TEMP warning

light

162

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

168

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

179

Mark Name Page

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

179

BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

178

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

178

Hill descent control in-

dicator light

178

Auto Start Stop warning

light (yellow)

177

Auto Start Stop indica-

tor light (green)

177

Auto Start Stop OFF

indicator light

177

Auto Start Stop No Ac-

tivity Detected indicator

light

178

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

176

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

168

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

184

(187,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Mark Name Page

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem operation indicator

light (green) (if

equipped)

179

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem warning light (yel-

low) (if equipped)

179

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem OFF indicator light

(if equipped)

179

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

180

Icy road surface warn-

ing light

178

& Basic Screens

s03bn06

By operating the or switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the screen

that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

AVG: Average fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

: Current fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

185

Instruments and Controls

(188,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Driving information screen:

: Journey time

: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition

switch was turned to the “ON” position)

and journey distance (the distance that

has been driven since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position).

Auto Start Stop screen:

: The total amount of time that the engine

was stopped by means of the Auto Start

Stop system

: The total amount of fuel saved due to the

engine being stopped by the Auto Start

Stop system

The indicated values are calculated from

the most recent reset of the currently

displayed trip meter to the current time.

The indication ranges are as follows.

Total amount of time: from 00’00@ to

9999h59’59@

. Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 gal to

9999.999 gal

NOTE

. When the trip meter is reset, the

corresponding accumulated time

and the amount of fuel saving are

also reset.

. The time spent with the engine

stopped by means of the Auto Start

Stop system is also added to the

journey time.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

This screen displays each tire pressure.

When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire

and the tire pressure will be displayed on

the screen in yellow.

NOTE

. The tire pressure values are dis-

played several minutes after driving.

. You can set the tire pressure units.

For details about setting the units,

refer to “General settings” �P198

(11.6-inch display models) or “Gen-

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

186

(189,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

eral settings” �P215 (dual 7.0-inch

display models).

. Once the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the low tire pressure,

the tire pressure values will display

in yellow until the system detects the

normal tire pressure.

. Immediately adjust the tire pressure

when the warning light illuminates.

When the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the adjusted tire

pressure, the warning light will turn

off and the tire pressure values will

turn to white.

. For information about the specified

value of the air pressure, refer to

“Tires” �P507.

Compass screen (if equipped):

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

Navigation screen (if equipped):

When the route guidance is set in the

navigation system, this item shows the

navigation route information. For details

about the navigation system, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

Audio screen:

The audio screen shows the status of

audio information. For details about the

audio system, refer to the separate navi-

gation/audio Owner’s Manual.

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

187

Instruments and Controls

(190,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Clock and outside temperature screen:

This screen displays the clock and outside

temperature. For details about clock

setting, refer to “Clock” �P227.

NOTE

The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the tem-

perature may not be indicated correctly

or the update may be delayed in the

following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after being

parked for a certain period of time

& Digital Speed Screen

s03bn11

1 Speed limit indicator (if equipped)

2 Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.

3-8. Center Information Dis-

play (CID)

s03bs

WARNING

Always pay attention to safe driving

when operating the center informa-

tion display while the vehicle is in

motion. When operation of the cen-

ter information display is disturbing

your awareness and ability to con-

centrate on driving, stop the vehicle

in a safe place before performing

operations on the display. Also, do

not concentrate on the display while

driving. Doing so could result in an

accident.

& Features

s03bs01

All information is displayed on the center

information display, including vehicle set-

tings, vehicle status, navigation system (if

equipped) operation, audio operation, and

climate control operation.

Center Information Display (CID)

188

(191,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Items

Page for

11.6-inch

display

models

Page for

dual 7.0-

inch display

models

Interruption

screen

190

Vehicle status and

maintenance in-

formation

191 221

Vehicle settings 197 215/218

Climate control

operations

197 214

Rear view camera 358

Navigation system

Refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

Audio/telephone

Refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

EyeSight

Refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for

the EyeSight system.

The center information display can also be

used to set and initialize the center

information display itself.

NOTE

. When the vehicle is in motion,

certain functions and selections

may not be available.

. The language and units for both the

center information display and the

combination meter display (color

LCD) can be changed. For details,

refer to “General settings” �P198

(11.6-inch display models) or “Gen-

eral settings” �P215 (dual 7.0-inch

display models).

For details about unit settings, refer

to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch

display models) or “Vehicle setting

icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch display

models).

. The images displayed in this Own-

er’s Manual are sample images. The

actual image may vary depending on

the region and vehicle specifica-

tions.

& Welcome Screen

s03bs02

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen

are motion graphic displayed on the

combination meter display and center

information display upon entering and

exiting the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the welcome screen will appear for

a short time.

NOTE

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is shown.

. The welcome screen can be turned

on or off. For details, refer to “Gen-

eral settings” �P198 (11.6-inch dis-

play models) or “General settings”

�P215 (dual 7.0-inch display mod-

els).

. For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared,

it may not appear again even when

the driver’s door is opened and

closed. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

& Good-Bye Screen

s03bs08

The good-bye screen will be displayed

under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is opened after the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF”

position.

. 3 minutes have passed after the ignition

switch is put in the “OFF” position with

the driver’s door closed.

. 10 minutes have passed when the

hands-free phone is used after the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF”

position.

. The battery voltage is low when the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF”

position.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

189

Instruments and Controls

(192,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Interruption Screen

s03bs03

Useful messages, such as reminders,

weather information (if equipped) and

traffic information (if equipped) may inter-

rupt the current screen and appear on the

display accompanied by a beep. Take the

proper action according to the message.

& Touch Screen Operations

s03bs04

The center information display has a touch

screen. Operations are performed by

touching the touch screen directly.

! Touch

s03bs0401

Quickly touch and release once.

! Drag

s03bs0402

Touch the screen and move the screen to

the desired position.

! Swipe

s03bs0403

Quickly move the screen by swiping with

your finger.

NOTE

Swipe operations may not be per-

formed smoothly in high altitudes.

& 11.6-Inch Display Models

s03bs05

NOTE

For dual 7.0-inch display models, refer

to “Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models”

�P213.

Center Information Display (CID)

190

(193,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Touch screen

s03bs0501

1 HOME icon (Refer to “HOME icon”

�P197.)

2 Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” �P191.)

3 Information bar (Refer to “Information

bar” �P192.)

4 Main screen (Refer to “Main screen”

�P197.)

5 Manage device icon (Refer to the sepa-

rate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual)

6 Driver profiles icon (Refer to “Driver

profiles icon” �P197.)

7 Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate

control screen” �P197.)

8 Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon (Refer to

“Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon” �P194.)

9 Car settings icon (Refer to “Car settings

icon” �P195.)

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.

! Status bar

s03bs050101

The outside temperature and clock are

displayed on the status bar.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. However, the temperature

may not be indicated correctly or

the update may be delayed in the

following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. You can set the temperature to be

displayed in Celsius or Fahrenheit.

For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P203 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

. The clock can be displayed in either

12-hour display or 24-hour display.

For details, refer to “Clock” �P227.

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen.

Refer to “Clock” �P227.

. For details about Bluetooth device

information, refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

191

Instruments and Controls

(194,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Information bar

s03bs050102

Swipe the information bar or touch or

on the information bar to switch the item

displayed.

Audio screen:

The screen of the currently selected audio

source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio set,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

Navigation screen (models with naviga-

tion system):

The directions to the destination are

displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the

navigation system, the compass orien-

tation, street name and speed limit

remain displayed on the screen.

Favorite screen:

Favorite screen

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

Center Information Display (CID)

192

(195,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item Details

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil temperature

Average vehicle speed

Accelerator opening ratio

Vehicle posture

Direction of the vehicle*

Weather information for the

next three hours*

Weather information for the

next six hours*

Posted speed limit of the

road you are currently driv-

ing on*

Calendar

Driver Monitoring System*

information and the average

fuel consumption of driver

Item Details

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTE

Some items may not be shown depend-

ing on the model and specifications.

The items shown on the favorite screen

can be changed. For details, refer to

“Favorite Widgets” �P208.

Weather information screen (if

equipped):

NOTE

. When all of the following conditions

are satisfied, weather information is

displayed.

– The vehicle is equipped with an

audio and navigation system for

SiriusXM satellite radio.

– The SiriusXM satellite radio sub-

scription is active.

. The weather forecast for the set

destination remains displayed until

a new destination is set or until the

destination is reached.

. Depending on the reception timing

of XM, the weather information may

be delayed.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

193

Instruments and Controls

(196,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

X-MODE screen:

Models with 1 mode

Models with 2 modes

X-MODE information is displayed on the

screen.

Also, X-MODE can be switched to a

different mode on the screen.

! Main screen

s03bs050103

For details about the following menu, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Map

. Apps

. My Subaru

. SUBARU STARLINK

. Add to Shortcut

! Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon

s03bs050108

1 Auto Start Stop indicator (green)

Touching “

” deactivates the Auto Start

Stop system and turns off the Auto Start

Stop indicator (green) on the screen.

Touching “

” again activates the Auto

Start Stop system and turns on the Auto

Start Stop indicator (green). Refer to “To

turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system”

�P356.

! Auto Vehicle Hold icon

s03bs050109

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, touch the “Auto Vehicle Hold” icon.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

turned off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will turn off.

Refer to “To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function” �P349.

Center Information Display (CID)

194

(197,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

s03bs050110

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, touch the “Vehicle Dynamics

Control” icon.

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem is turned off during engine operation,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light on the combination meter illumi-

nates.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will

be deactivated. When “Vehicle Dynamics

Control” icon has been touched again to

reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light turns off.

Refer to “To Turn On/Off the Vehicle

Dynamics Control System” �P339.

! Display Off

s03bs050112

Activation of the display off mode:

1. Touch “Display Off”.

Deactivation of the display off mode:

1. Touch the display or push the tem-

perature control button.

2. Press and hold the volume knob to turn

the screen back on.

! Car settings icon

s03bs050104

Touch to display the items that are

changeable while driving.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

195

Instruments and Controls

(198,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting procedure

1st menu 2nd menu

Vehicle Control

Vehicle Dynamics

Control

ON/OFF 339 207

X-MODE

Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF

Models with 2 modes: Deep Snow/Mud, Normal, Snow/

Dirt

341 207

Cruise Control Accel-

eration

Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic *

—

Steering Responsive

Headlights (SRH)

ON/OFF 238 207

Auto Vehicle Hold

(AVH)

ON/OFF 348 207

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF 356 207

Driving Assistance

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Forward Collision

Warning

Far/Normal/Near

Lane Departure

All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function

Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Rear Vehicle Detec-

tion (BSD/RCTA)*

ON/OFF 368 207

Driver Monitoring

System*

ON/OFF 382 207

More Settings

Warning Volume Min/Mid/Max 367, 380 and *

—

Units

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

152 and 180

207

*1: If equipped

*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Center Information Display (CID)

196

(199,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Driver profiles icon

s03bs050105

Touch (driver profiles icon) to confirm

the driver’s information. For details, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

! Manage devices icon

s03bs050113

Touch the manage devices icon to pair

your vehicle’ system with a device that

uses Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, or a

similar application. For details, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

! HOME icon

s03bs050106

Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.

! Climate control screen

s03bs050107

The climate control status is shown on the

screen.

1 Climate control ON/OFF icon

2 Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)

3 SYNC mode indicator

4 Airflow mode

5 Climate control mode

6 Air inlet selection

7 Dynamic ventilation mode indicator

8 Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

9 Dynamic ventilation ON/OFF icon

10 Customizable icon

11 Fan speed control

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the main screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details, refer

to “Climate Control Panel” �P262.

! Main screen

s03bs0502

To display the main screen, touch

(HOME).

In this Owner’s Manual, the following

settings will be explained. For details

about other items, refer to the separate

navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.

– “Settings” ? “General”

– “Settings” ? “Car”

– “Car Info”

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

197

Instruments and Controls

(200,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! General settings

s03bs050201

Set the time and display general items.

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. Select the preferred menu.

Center Information Display (CID)

198

(201,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Clock

Time Setting*

AUTO/Manual

227

Time Setting*

Sync With Phone/Manual

Time Zone*

AUTO/Pacific/Mountain/Central/

Eastern/Atlantic/Newfoundland/

Hawaii/Alaska

207

Daylight Saving Time*

AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF 207

Clock Format 12H/24H 207

Display

Display Off Turn the screen off. — 207

Brightness Dial ON/OFF 155 207

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness and

contrast of the display.

207 207

Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi ON/OFF

—

Connected to: Select the registered devise.

Available Wi-Fi Networks Add

Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN Setup/Push Button Setup

Registered Wi-Fi Networks —

Wi-Fi Security Infor-

mation

Wi-Fi Security Information (AP

mode)

—

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

199

Instruments and Controls

(202,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Wi-Fi Hotspot

Wi-Fi Hotspot ON/OFF

—

Wi-Fi name (SSID): —

Security Type: —

Password: —

Broadcast Frequency: —

SSID Broadcast ON/OFF

Connected Devices: —

Reminder Screen

Maintenance ON/OFF

190

207

Birthday ON/OFF 207

Anniversary ON/OFF 207

Valet Mode

Passcode Setting*

Keyboard: Enter New Passcode

230 207Activate Valet Mode Keyboard: Enter Your Passcode

Change Passcode Keyboard: Change Passcode

Meter Screen

Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 152 207

Meter Information Screen

Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/

Compass*

/Gas Range

182 207

Turn by Turn Screen Interrup-

tion*

ON/OFF 185 207

Camera

Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 359 207

Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 360 207

Center Information Display (CID)

200

(203,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Climate Control Customize Climate Button

A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recircula-

tion/SYNC

269 207

Temperature Unit 8F/8C — 191 207

Language — English/Français/Español 180 and 188 207

Tire Pressure Units*

— kPa/PSi 185 207

Home Screen Short-

cuts

— ON/OFF *

207

Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 181 207

Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 181 207

Favorite Widgets — Set a favorite widget from the list. 192 208

Birthday List — Set a birthday. 190 208

Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 190 209

Periodic Rest Notifica-

tion*

— ON/OFF

—

Software Update

Update Check if a new software update

Automatically Check for Up-

dates

ON/OFF

Automatically Download Up-

dates

ON/OFF

Default —

SUBARU STARLINK

Apps Recovery

— OK/Cancel

SUBARU STARLINK

Auto Connect

—

ON/OFF

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

201

Instruments and Controls

(204,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel

—

System Information — —

Free/Open Source

Software Information

—

*1: Models with navigation system

*2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK without navigation system

*3: Models without SUBARU STARLINK or navigation system

*4: Models without navigation system

*5: If equipped

*6: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

*7: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.

*8: Displayed until valet mode is set.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

Center Information Display (CID)

202

(205,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Car settings

s03bs050209

Perform the EyeSight system setting and

vehicle setting.

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

203

Instruments and Controls

(206,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

EyeSight

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Forward Collision Warning Far/Normal/Near

Lane Departure

All Functions/Lane Departure

Prevention Function Only/

Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Cruise Control Acceleration

Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dy-

namic

Lead Vehicle Acquisition

Sound

ON/OFF

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF

Select Drive on Left/Drive on

Right

Right Lane/Left Lane

Reverse Automatic Braking*

Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF 371 207

Driver Monitoring System*

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF

382

207

Repeat Facial Scan Perform the user recognition. 209

User Recognition ON/OFF 207

Delete User Delete the registered user. 209

Delete All Users Delete all registered users. 209

Center Information Display (CID)

204

(207,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

Keyless Entry System

Audible Signal*

ON/OFF 121 and 126 207

Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 121 and 127 207

Driver Door Unlock*

Driver Door Only/All 115 207

Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*

Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All 115 207

Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 246 207

Interior Light —

10 seconds/20 seconds/30

seconds/OFF

283 207

Auto Light Sensor

Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 232 207

Wiper Link ON/OFF 233 207

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

233

207

Leaving Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

207

One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 241 207

Auto Door Lock/Unlock

Auto Door Lock

Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out

of PARK/OFF

131

207

Auto Door Unlock

Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/

Shift into or out of PARK/OFF

207

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

205

Instruments and Controls

(208,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 56 207

Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 339 207

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 348 207

Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF 356 207

Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/

RCTA)*

— ON/OFF 368 207

X-MODE —

Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF

Models with 2 modes: Deep

Snow/Mud, Normal, Snow/Dirt

341 207

Steering Responsive Head-

lights (SRH)

— ON/OFF 238 207

Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max 367, 380 and *

207

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

152 and 180

207

*1: If equipped

*2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.

However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc.

*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

Center Information Display (CID)

206

(209,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! How to select items on the screen

s03bs0510

! ON/OFF setting

s03bs051001

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON

or OFF .

! Selecting

s03bs051002

Example

Touch the preferred item.

! How to set items on the screen

s03bs0511

! Brightness/Contrast

s03bs051101

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast

of the center information display.

NOTE

“Brightness” can only be adjusted

when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to

“General settings” �P198.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Display”

5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and

contrast.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

207

Instruments and Controls

(210,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Touch “Default” to revert to the factory

setting.

! Favorite Widgets

s03bs051102

The menu on the favorite screen can be

customized.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Favorite Widgets”

5. Select the icon of the display position.

6. Select the display item.

! Birthday List

s03bs051103

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,

a message will be shown when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. This

function can be set to on or off by

“Reminder Screen”. For details, refer to

“General settings” �P198.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Birthday List”

5. ? “Add”

6. Enter the name.

7. ? “Next”

8. Enter the date.

9. ? “OK”

Center Information Display (CID)

208

(211,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be

stored.

! Anniversary List

s03bs051104

The procedure for setting an anniversary is

the same as “Birthday List” �P208, except

that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.

! Driver Monitoring System (if

equipped)

s03bs051105

The Driver Monitoring System settings can

be changed.

For setting method for the following menu

on the Driver Monitoring System, refer to

“ON/OFF setting” �P207.

. Driver Monitoring System

. User Recognition

Repeat Facial Scan:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Repeat Facial Scan”

6. ? “OK”

7. While seated in the driver’s seat, face

forward and wait for a few moments.

When the scan is completed, the

completion screen is displayed on the

combination meter (color LCD).

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Register User”

6. Select the preferred user from the list.

7. ? “Set”

8. While seated in the driver’s seat, face

forward and wait for a few moments.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

209

Instruments and Controls

(212,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

When the screen changes, the registration

of the facial scan is completed.

A Forward direction

B Display direction

1 Face forward.

2 Do not lower your chin.

3 Face the display.

*: Display

NOTE

. If user registration cannot be per-

formed, turn your face forward as

shown in the illustration, then turn to

the display.

. There are some cases where user

registration cannot be registered

properly. In those cases, refer to

“Driver Monitoring System” �P382.

. If “Unable to register. Try again.”

appears, repeat the procedure be-

ginning from step 5.

9. Enter the name.

10. ? “Next”

Center Information Display (CID)

210

(213,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11. Select the preferred icon.

12. ? “Set”

NOTE

. An existing user can be overwritten

by selecting a registered number.

When a user is registered by over-

writing, the individual fuel economy

data is reset.

. When “User Recognition” is set to

OFF, user registration cannot be

selected.

Delete User:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Delete User”

6. Select the preferred user from the list.

7. ? “Yes”

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

211

Instruments and Controls

(214,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Delete All Users:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Delete All Users”

6. ? “Yes”

! Car information screen

s03bs0503

1. Touch (HOME) to display the top

menu.

2. ? (Car Info)

! Driving Statistics screen

s03bs050301

1 Driving Statistics

2 Steering angle

3 Running condition

4 Vehicle posture

5 Telltale screen

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status func-

tions. For functions that are operating, the

indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle pos-

ture.

. The vehicle posture angle varies not

only due to the angle of the road

surface, but also due to the vehicle

tilt caused by the occupants, cargo,

Center Information Display (CID)

212

(215,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

and acceleration or deceleration.

! Maintenance screen

s03bs050303

Maintenance reminders can be set.

Engine Oil change reminder:

1. Touch “Maintenance” from the 2nd

menu in the car info screen.

2. ?

(Engine Oil)

3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-

tion Distance” of the reminder.

4. ? “Set”

5. ?

Oil Filter change reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Oil

Filter” item in step 2.

Tires rotation reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Tires”

item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the

“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.

NOTE

. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.

. Touch “Update” to revert to the

default value.

& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models

(If Equipped)

s03bs06

NOTE

For 11.6-inch display models, refer to

“11.6-Inch Display Models” �P190.

! Main screens

s03bs0601

A Upper display

B Lower display

1 HOME button (Refer to “HOME button”

�P214.)

2 Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” �P214.)

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

213

Instruments and Controls

(216,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3 Upper main screen (Refer to “Setting of

the upper display” �P215.)

4 Lower main screen (Refer to “Setting of

the lower display” �P218.)

5 Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate

control screen” �P214.)

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.

! HOME button

s03bs0609

Press (HOME) to display the top menu.

! Status bar

s03bs060901

The driver profiles icon, outside tempera-

ture and clock are shown on the display.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. However, the temperature

may not be indicated correctly or

the update may be delayed in the

following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. You can set the temperature to be

displayed in Celsius or Fahrenheit.

For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P203 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

. The clock can be shown in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For

details about the setting, refer to

“Clock” �P227.

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen.

Refer to “Clock” �P227.

! Upper display

s03bs060902

For details about items, refer to “Setting of

the upper display” �P215.

For details about the following menu, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Apps

. SUBARU STARLINK

. Add to Shortcut

! Lower display

s03bs060903

For details about the setting items, refer to

“Setting of the lower display” �P218.

If this screen changes to the climate

control screen, refer to “Dual 7.0-Inch

Display Models” �P263.

! Climate control screen

s03bs060904

1 Climate control ON/OFF icon

2 Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)

3 SYNC mode indicator

4 Airflow mode

5 Climate control mode

6 Air inlet selection

7 Dynamic Ventilation mode indicator

8 Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

9 Dynamic Ventilation ON/OFF icon

10 Customizable icon

11 Fan speed control

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the main screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details about

climate control operation, refer to “Climate

Center Information Display (CID)

214

(217,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Control Panel” �P262.

! Setting of the upper display

s03bs0602

In this Owner’s Manual, the settings of the

“General” menu will be explained. For

details about other items, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

! General settings

s03bs060204

The “General” menu is used to set the

display, language and time.

1. Press

(HOME).

2. Touch (Settings).

3. ? “General”

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

215

Instruments and Controls

(218,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Clock

Time Setting Sync With Phone/Manual

227

Clock Format 12H/24H 228

Display

Display Off Turn the screen off. — 224

Brightness Dial ON/OFF — 224

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness

and contrast of the screen dis-

play and camera display.

— 224

Reminder Screen

Maintenance ON/OFF

190

224

Birthday ON/OFF 224

Anniversary ON/OFF 224

Valet Mode

Passcode Setting*

keyboard: Enter New Pass-

code

230 207

Activate Valet Mode

keyboard: Enter Your Pass-

code

Change Passcode keyboard: Change Passcode

Meter Screen

Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 152 224

Meter Information Screen

Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/

Gas Range

182 224

Camera

Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 359 224

Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 360 224

Center Information Display (CID)

216

(219,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Climate Control Customize Climate Button

A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recircu-

lation/SYNC

269 224

Temperature Unit 8F/8C — 214 224

Language — English/Français/Español 180 and 188 224

Tire Pressure Units*

— kPa/PSi 185 224

Home Screen Shortcuts — ON/OFF *

224

Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 181 224

Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 181 224

Birthday List — Set a birthday. 190 225

Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 190 225

SUBARU STARLINK Apps Re-

covery

— OK/Cancel

—

SUBARU STARLINK Auto

Connect

— ON/OFF

Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel

System Information — —

Free/Open Source Software

Information

—

*1: Displayed until valet mode is set.

*2: If equipped

*3: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

217

Instruments and Controls

(220,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Display Off

s03bs060205

Activation of the display off mode:

1. Touch “Display Off”.

Deactivation of the display off mode:

1. Touch the display or push the tem-

perature control button.

2. Press and hold the volume knob to turn

the screen back on.

! Setting of the lower display

s03bs0605

Touch (Car Settings). Refer to “Vehicle

setting icons” �P221.

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status of the

functions. Refer to “Driving Statistics”

�P226.

Set the timing of the maintenance. Refer to

“Maintenance” �P226.

! Vehicle settings while driving

s03bs060502

Touch (X-MODE), (Vehicle Control),

(Driving Assistance), (More Set-

tings), or

(Auto Start Stop) to display

the items that are changeable while driv-

ing.

Center Information Display (CID)

218

(221,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

X-MODE — — ON/OFF 341 224

Vehicle Con-

trol

Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 339 224

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 348 224

Cruise Control Acceleration —

Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dy-

namic

—

Steering Responsive Head-

lights (SRH)

— ON/OFF 238 207

Driving As-

sistance

Pre-Collision Braking System

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Forward Collision Warning Far/Normal/Near

Lane Departure —

All Functions/Lane Departure

Prevention Function Only/

Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Auto Start

Stop

— — ON/OFF 356 224

More Set-

tings

Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max *

224

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

152 and 180 224

Auto Start Stop — ON/OFF 356

224

*1: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

219

Instruments and Controls

(222,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon

s03bs060503

1 Auto Start Stop indicator (green)

Touching “

” deactivates the Auto Start

Stop system and turns off the Auto Start

Stop indicator (green) on the screen.

Touching “

” again activates the Auto

Start Stop system and turns on the Auto

Start Stop indicator (green). Refer to “To

turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system”

�P356.

! Auto Vehicle Hold icon

s03bs060504

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, touch the “Auto Vehicle Hold” icon.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

turned off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will turn off.

Refer to “To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function” �P349.

NOTE

. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function

is on, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light on the combination meter turns

on. The “Auto Vehicle Hold” indica-

tor also turns on at the same time.

. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function

is off, the Auto Vehicle Hold indica-

tor light on the combination meter

turns off. The “Auto Vehicle Hold”

indicator also turns off at the same

time.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

s03bs060505

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, touch the “Vehicle Dynamics

Control” icon.

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem is turned off during engine operation,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light on the combination meter illumi-

nates.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will

be deactivated. When “Vehicle Dynamics

Control” icon has been touched again to

reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light turns off.

Refer to “To Turn On/Off the Vehicle

Center Information Display (CID)

220

(223,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Dynamics Control System” �P339.

NOTE

. When Vehicle Dynamics Control is

on, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light on the combina-

tion meter turns off. The “Vehicle

Dynamics Control” indicator turns

on at the same time.

. When Vehicle Dynamics Control is

off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light on the combina-

tion meter turns on. The “Vehicle

Dynamics Control” indicator turns

off at the same time.

! Vehicle setting icons

s03bs060501

1. Press (HOME).

2. Touch

(Car Settings).

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

221

Instruments and Controls

(224,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu 4th menu

Car Settings

EyeSight

Pre-Collision Braking

System

Pre-Collision Braking

Setting ON/Setting

OFF

—

Forward Collision

Warning

Far/Normal/Near

Lane Departure —

All Functions/Lane De-

parture Prevention

Function Only/Warning

Buzzer Only/OFF

—

Cruise Control Accel-

eration

—

Eco/Comfort/Stan-

dard/Dynamic

—

Lead Vehicle Acquisi-

tion Sound

— ON/OFF *

224

Lead Vehicle Moving

Monitor

— ON/OFF *

224

Select Drive on Left/

Drive on Right

— Right Lane/Left Lane *

—

Keyless Entry System

Hazard Warning

Flasher

— ON/OFF 127 224

Audible Signal — ON/OFF 121 and 126 224

Defogger — —

15 minutes/Continu-

ous

246 224

Interior Light — —

10 seconds/20 sec-

onds/30 seconds/OFF

283 224

Auto Light Sensor

Light Sensitivity — Min/Low/Mid/Max 232 224

Wiper Link — ON/OFF 233 224

Center Information Display (CID)

222

(225,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu 4th menu

Car Settings

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time Set —

30 seconds/60 sec-

onds/90 seconds/OFF

233

224

Leaving Time Set —

30 seconds/60 sec-

onds/90 seconds/OFF

224

One-Touch Lane Chan-

ger

— — ON/OFF 241 224

Auto Door Lock/Unlock

Auto Door Lock —

Vehicle Speed/Shift

into or out of PARK/

OFF

131

224

Auto Door Unlock —

Ignition OFF/Driver

Door Open/Shift into or

out of PARK/OFF

224

Rear Seat Reminder — — ON/OFF 56 224

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol

— — ON/OFF 339 224

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — — ON/OFF 348 224

Auto Start Stop — — ON/OFF 356 224

X-MODE — — ON/OFF 341 224

Warning Volume — — Min/Mid/Max *

224

Units — —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

152 and 180

224

*1: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

223

Instruments and Controls

(226,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! How to select items on the screen

s03bs0610

! ON/OFF setting

s03bs061001

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON

or OFF .

! Selecting

s03bs061002

Example

Touch the preferred setting.

! How to set items on the screen

s03bs0611

! Brightness/Contrast

s03bs061101

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast

of the center information display.

NOTE

“Brightness” can only be adjusted

when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to

“General settings” �P215.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Display”

5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and

contrast.

Center Information Display (CID)

224

(227,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Touch “Default” to revert to the factory

setting.

! Birthday List

s03bs061102

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,

a message will be displayed when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. This function can be set to on or

off by the “Reminder Screen”. For details,

refer to “General settings” �P215.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Birthday List”

5. ? “Add”

6. Enter the name.

7. ? “Next”

8. Enter the date.

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be

stored.

! Anniversary List

s03bs061103

The procedure for setting an anniversary is

the same as “Birthday List” �P225, except

that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

225

Instruments and Controls

(228,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Driving Statistics

s03bs0603

1 Steering angle

2 Vehicle posture

3 Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status of the

functions. For functions that are operating,

the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle pos-

ture.

. The vehicle posture angle varies not

only due to the angle of the road

surface, but also due to the vehicle

tilt caused by the occupants, cargo,

and acceleration or deceleration.

! Maintenance

s03bs0604

Maintenance reminders can be set.

Engine Oil setting:

1. Touch

(Maintenance).

2. ?

(Engine Oil)

3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-

tion Distance” of the reminder.

4. ? “Set”

5. ?

Oil Filter setting:

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Oil

Filter” item in step 2.

Tires setting:

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Tires”

item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Main-

tenance Schedule” item in step 2.

NOTE

. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.

. Touch “Update” to revert to the

default value.

Center Information Display (CID)

226

(229,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3-9. Clock

s03af

For models with a genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system, the clock

can be adjusted using either auto mode or

manual mode.

& Setting the Clock Manually

s03af03

! Dual 7.0-inch display models

s03af0303

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Press (HOME).

3. Touch

(Settings).

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. ? “Manual”

8. ?

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also be

displayed by touching the clock on the

status bar.

! 11.6-inch display models

s03af0304

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Touch (HOME).

3. ?

(Settings)

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

– CONTINUED –

Clock

227

Instruments and Controls

(230,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7. ? “Manual”

8. ?

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also be

displayed by touching the clock on the

status bar.

& Setting the Clock Automati-

cally

s03af02

! Dual 7.0-inch display models

s03af0204

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Press (HOME).

3. Touch

(Settings).

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. ? “Sync With Phone”

The clock will be set and adjusted auto-

matically when a smartphone is connected

via Bluetooth

for transferring phonebook

data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Own-

er’s Manual for the audio/navigation

system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Own-

er’s Manual for the audio/navigation

system. The clock will be adjusted

automatically.

Clock

228

(231,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

! 11.6-inch display models

s03af0205

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Touch (HOME).

3. ?

(Settings)

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. Models with navigation system:

? “AUTO”

Models with SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security without navigation

system:

? “AUTO”

Models without SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security or navigation

system:

? “Sync With Phone”

! Models with navigation system

s03af020501

The clock will be set automatically where a

GPS signal is available.

! Models with SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security without na-

vigation system

s03af020507

The clock will be set automatically where a

DCM (Data Communication Module in

vehicle cellular connection) signal is avail-

able.

! Models without SUBARU

STARLINK Safety and Security

or navigation system

s03af020508

The clock will be set and adjusted auto-

matically when a smartphone is connected

via Bluetooth

for transferring phonebook

data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Own-

er’s Manual for the audio/navigation

system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Own-

er’s Manual for the audio/navigation

system. The clock will be adjusted

automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

& Time Zone (Models with Na-

vigation System)

s03af06

You can configure the “Time Zone” setting

on the clock setting screen.

If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”

is selected, “Time Zone” is set automati-

cally. Refer to “Main screen” �P197 for the

setting.

& Daylight Saving Time (Models

with Navigation System)

s03af07

You can configure the “Daylight Saving

Time” setting on the clock setting screen.

– CONTINUED –

Clock

229

Instruments and Controls

(232,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”

is selected, “Daylight Saving Time” is set

automatically. Refer to “Main screen”

�P197 for the setting.

NOTE

. When “Time Setting” is set to

“AUTO”, you can change “Daylight

Saving Time” and “Time Zone” set-

tings.

. When “Daylight Saving Time” is set

to “AUTO”, the “Time Zone” setting

can only be set to “AUTO”.

3-10. Valet Mode

s03bt

When leaving your vehicle with a valet

service, such as at a hotel or restaurant,

you can set the valet mode, which disables

the navigation, audio, and vehicle setting

functions.

& Activation of Valet Mode

s03bt01

11.6-inch display models

Dual 7.0-inch display models

1. Touch “Valet Mode”.

11.6-inch display models

Valet Mode

230

(233,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Dual 7.0-inch display models

2. Enter the passcode.

3. Touch “OK”.

& Deactivation of Valet Mode

s03bt02

11.6-inch display models

Dual 7.0-inch display models

1. Touch “Valet Mode” or select OFF

(11.6-inch display models).

Touch “Deactivate” (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

2. Enter the passcode.

3. Touch “OK”.

NOTE

If you enter the passcode incorrectly

three times in a row when setting or

canceling valet mode, a message

prompting you to contact a SUBARU

dealer will be displayed, but it is still

possible to enter the passcode even

after the fourth attempt.

If you have forgotten your passcode,

consult your SUBARU dealer.

3-11. Light Control Switch

s03ah

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the light control switch

is turned to the off position. If the

vehicle is left unattended for a

long time with the light control

switch set to a position other

than the off position, even though

the lights will turn off after 10

minutes, the battery may be dis-

charged.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

231

Instruments and Controls

(234,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be oper-

ated (except auto on/off headlights)

even when under the following condi-

tions.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-

tion (models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

. When the key is not inserted into the

ignition switch (models without

“keyless access with push-button

start system”)

If you leave the headlights on for 10

minutes, the headlights will turn off

automatically. Turn the ignition switch

to the “ON” position to illuminate the

exterior lights again.

If the driver’s door is opened while the

headlights are illuminated under such

conditions, a chirp sound will inform

the driver that the lights are illuminated.

& Headlights

s03ah01

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the light control switch.

“OFF” position (for U.S. models):

The headlights are all off.

Only when the following conditions are

fulfilled, instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

“OFF” position (for Canada models):

The headlights are all off.*

*1: When the light switch is switched to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,

the lights turn off. Then the light switch will

automatically return to the “AUTO” position.

*2: The headlights will automatically change to

the AUTO mode when the following condi-

tions are met:

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

“AUTO” position: Auto on/off head-

lights

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

NOTE

. If the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights

do not turn on when it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position. If this happens, have

your vehicle inspected by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Light Control Switch

232

(235,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. The light sensitivity of the auto on/

off headlights can be changed by

operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P203 (11.6-inch display

models) or “Vehicle setting icons”

�P221 (dual 7.0-inch display mod-

els). Also, the setting can be chan-

ged by a SUBARU dealer. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

lights are on.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear

side marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights are on.

! Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights

s03ah0106

While the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-

matically turn on when the windshield

wipers operate several times. The head-

lights will automatically turn off approxi-

mately 1 minute after the wiper stops.

The ON/OFF setting of this function can be

changed by operating the center informa-

tion display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P203 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual

7.0-inch display models). Also, the setting

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

! Welcome lighting function

s03ah0103

The welcome lighting function turns on the

low beam headlight for smooth approach-

ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or

in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position.

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights.

NOTE

If the engine is turned off after turning

off the light switch, the welcome light-

ing function may not operate (for

Canada models).

! When approaching

s03ah010301

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking

the doors by using the remote keyless

entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds*

and then turn

off. However, if any of the following

operations is done, the low beam head-

lights will turn off.

. The doors are locked.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

! When exiting

s03ah010302

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operation is done.

. The push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” status (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

The low beam headlights will turn off under

any of the following conditions.

. 3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by

the welcome lighting function.

. 30 seconds have passed since the door

is opened and closed.*

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

233

Instruments and Controls

(236,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

procedure after performing the locking

procedure, perform the locking proce-

dure twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which the

low beam headlights remain on by the

welcome lighting function can be changed

by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can

change the setting by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P203 (11.6-inch display models)

or “Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

! Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights

s03ah0101

The sensor is on the dashboard as shown

in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

& High/Low Beam Change

(Dimmer)

s03ah02

While the light control switch is in the “ ”

or “AUTO” position in a dark place, the

headlights will turn on.

Pushing the lever forward and releasing it

will activate the high beam. Pulling the

lever rearward and releasing it will switch

the headlights to low beam.

When the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, pushing the lever for-

ward turns the High Beam Assist is on.

Refer to “High Beam Assist Function”

�P235.

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter is also on.

Light Control Switch

234

(237,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Headlight Flasher

s03ah03

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works even

though the lighting switch is in the off

position.

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

& High Beam Assist Function

s03ah07

NOTE

. The high beam assist function uti-

lizes the stereo camera installed at

the position of the front map lights.

. For details on how to handle the

stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to high

beam.

. When the vehicle speed increases to or

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

. There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.

. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to low beam.

. When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

. When the forward area of the vehicle is

bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-

tioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

. Do not overestimate the capacity of

the high beam assist function. The

driver always has the responsibility

to understand the surrounding si-

tuation, to drive safely, and to

change the headlight mode manu-

ally if necessary.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “opera-

tional”. This setting can be changed

to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU

dealers. For more details, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

! How to use the high beam assist

function

s03ah0701

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights

are on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

235

Instruments and Controls

(238,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

High beam assist indicator

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is

malfunctioning or is temporarily

stopped, the headlight will be fixed at

low beam.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi-

tivity of the high beam assist func-

tion

s03ah0704

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by using the

following operations.

1. After turning the ignition switch to the

“ON” position, set the light control

switch to the “AUTO” position and push

the signal lever forward (high beam

position).

2. After the high beam assist indicator on

the combination meter will illuminate,

turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and within approximately 15

seconds, press the “

/ ” (following

distance setting) switch more than 10

times consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the high beam

assist indicator light “

” on the combina-

tion meter display (color LCD) will flash.

NOTE

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function cannot be lowered

in the following conditions.

– Cruise control indicator is illumi-

nated.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

(yellow) is illuminated.

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function returns to normal

level the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and the engine is

restarted.

! How to change the headlight mode

manually

s03ah0702

Change to the low beam:

. Set the light control switch to “

”.

. Pull the lever while the high beam is

turning on and release it.

Change to the high beam:

Push the lever forward and release it.

At this time, the high beam assist function

will turn off, the high beam assist indicator

will turn off and the high beam indicator

light will turn on.

NOTE

. After manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you

turn on the high beam assist func-

tion, push the lever forward and

release it.

. When manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you

turn the light control switch to the

“

” position, the parking lights,

front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights will turn on.

Light Control Switch

236

(239,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Tips for the high beam assist sys-

tem

s03ah0703

. The high beam assist function recog-

nizes the condition surrounding the

vehicle based on the brightness of

illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc.

Therefore, the headlight mode may

switch in some situations that do not

match to the driver’s sense.

. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be

detected.

. Under the following situations, the

brightness of ambient illumination may

not be detected correctly and the high

beam assist function may not work

properly. As a result, the glare of the

high beam may disturb the oncoming

vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low

beam mode may continue although

there are no oncoming vehicles and

vehicles ahead. In the such cases,

change the headlight mode manually.

– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand

storm, heavy rain, etc.).

– When the windshield glass is dirty or

fogged.

– When the windshield is cracked or

damaged.

– If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail lights in the

surrounding area.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead is driven without its

headlights and tail lights on.

– If the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if

the light beams are not aimed

correctly.

– When a rapid change of brightness

continues while driving.

– When driving on a road with many

ups and downs or uneven surfaces.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When there are some objects that

reflect light strongly, such as a road

sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.

– When the rear part of the vehicle

ahead, such as a container, reflects

light strongly.

– When the headlights of your vehicle

are damaged or dirty.

– When your vehicle is tilted, such as

in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is

being towed.

– When the stereo camera is de-

formed or the stereo camera lenses

are dirty.

– Immediately after the engine has

started.

. In the following conditions, the head-

light mode will not be automatically

changed from the high beam to the low

beam.

– When your vehicle passes an on-

coming vehicle suddenly in a blind

curve.

– When another vehicle passes in

front of your vehicle.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead comes in and out of

view because of continuous curves,

median strips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light of

the front fog lights of an oncoming

vehicle, the headlight mode may

change from the high beam to the low

beam automatically.

. The headlight mode may change from

the high beam to the low beam, or the

low beam mode may continue, when

affected by a street light, traffic signal,

illumination of an advertisement board,

or a reflective object such as a road

sign and signboard.

. The timing of the change of headlight

mode may differ due to the following

factors.

– Color or brightness of the headlights

of an oncoming vehicle or the tail

lights of a vehicle ahead.

– The headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle

ahead are covered with mud, snow,

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

237

Instruments and Controls

(240,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

etc.

– Movement and direction of an on-

coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

– When the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle or the tail lights of a

vehicle ahead illuminate on only one

side.

– When the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,

road surface, etc.).

– Number of passengers and weight

of loaded cargo.

– Limitation of the detection ability of

the stereo camera.

& Daytime Running Light Sys-

tem

s03ah04

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are

illuminated, the tail lights do not

illuminate. When it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position to illuminate the head-

lights and tail lights. This will im-

prove visibility and allow other dri-

vers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati-

cally illuminate when the following condi-

tions are fulfilled.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,

“

” or “OFF”.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “

”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are also illumi-

nated.

3-12. Steering Responsive

Headlight (SRH)

s03bl

1 The target area of illumination when SRH

is activated

2 The target area of illumination when SRH

is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves

the headlight beam to the left or right in

accordance with the steering angle and

vehicle speed. This function helps to

improve the visibility at night by illuminat-

ing the road ahead at corners and inter-

sections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off.

The settings can be changed by using the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P203.

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

238

(241,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Steering Responsive Headlight OFF in-

dicator light

The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

indicator light on the combination meter

display (color LCD) turns off when SRH is

turned on.

The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

indicator light on the combination meter

display (color LCD) illuminates when SRH

is turned off.

1 Steering Responsive Headlight warning

light

If SRH is malfunctioning, the Steering

Responsive Headlight warning light on

the combination meter display (color

LCD) illuminates and a message appears

on the warning screen when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. It indicates

that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

. The SRH function operative/non-op-

erative status is kept when the

engine is turned off, even if the

engine is restarted.

. When you turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, the Steering Re-

sponsive Headlight OFF indicator

light will illuminate and turn off after

several seconds.

. SRH only activates when the vehicle

is traveling forward at the speed of

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or

more.

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

239

Instruments and Controls

(242,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3-13. Headlight Beam Leveler

s03at

The LED headlights produce more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load

and the headlight beams are angled

upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight

beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the

optimum height automatically depending

on the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the head-

lights may become misaligned, and

the headlight beam leveler will not

reset them to the proper angle. This

may occur after transporting your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the

vehicle is parked and restarted on

different angles. In such cases, have

the headlight alignment checked by

a SUBARU dealer.

3-14. Front Fog Light Switch

(If Equipped)

s03ba

1 Headlight switch

2 Fog light switch

To turn on the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch to the “

” position

while the headlights are in either of the

following conditions.

. The headlight switch is in the “

”

position with the low beam mode

selected.

. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights

turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch back down to the

“OFF” position.

Front fog light indicator light

The indicator light located on the combina-

tion meter will illuminate when the front fog

lights are on.

Headlight Beam Leveler

240

(243,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3-15. Turn Signal Lever

s03ai

1 Right turn

2 Lane change right signal

3 Lane change left signal

4 Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering,

return the lever to the neutral position by

hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

& One-Touch Lane Changer

s03ai01

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and

immediately release it.

NOTE

The operational/non-operational

setting of the one-touch lane changer

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details. The setting can also be chan-

ged by operating the center information

display. For details, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P203 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P221

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

3-16. Wiper and Washer

s03am

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level fre-

quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield is dry. This may

scratch the glass, damage the

blade rubbers and might cause

the wiper motor to fail. Before

operating the wiper on a dry

windshield, always use the wind-

shield washer.

– CONTINUED –

Turn Signal Lever

241

Instruments and Controls

(244,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the blade rubbers are not frozen

to the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blade rubbers frozen to

the window glass could cause

not only the blade rubbers to be

damaged but also might cause

the wiper motor to fail. If the blade

rubbers are frozen to the window

glass, be sure to operate the

defroster or windshield wiper

deicer (if equipped) or rear win-

dow defogger before turning on

the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe location, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-

sition and clean the window glass

to allow proper wiper operation.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to “Windshield Washer

Fluid” �P483.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates con-

tinuously under an unusually heavy

load, the circuit breaker may trip to

stop the motor temporarily. If this

happens, park your vehicle in a safe

location, turn off the wiper switch,

and wait for approximately 10 min-

utes. The circuit breaker will reset

itself, and the wipers will again

operate normally.

. Clean your blade rubbers and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt

or road film. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects, or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blade results in jerky wiper opera-

tion and streaking on the glass. If

you cannot remove the streaks after

operating the windshield washer or

if the wiper operation is jerky, clean

the outer surface of the windshield

and rear window using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, how-

ever, use detergent to clean the

blade rubbers. Use only a sponge

or soft cloth (and no neutral deter-

gent or mild abrasive cleaner) when

you clean the blade rubbers. If you

wipe the rubber of the blade

strongly, the black coating compo-

nent will peel off, which will cause

the wiper to judder. Also, after wip-

ing it off, check that the rubber has

not come loose. After cleaning the

window glass and wiper blade rub-

bers, be sure to rinse them with

clean water. Rinse the window until

the water does not form beads on the

glass. This indicates that the glass is

clean.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades (or blade

Wiper and Washer

242

(245,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

rubbers) with new ones. For replace-

ment instructions, refer to “Replace-

ment of Wiper Blades” �P484.

& Windshield Wiper and

Washer Switches

s03am01

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

! Windshield wipers

s03am0101

Type-A

Type-B

: Mist (for a single wipe)

OFF/

: Off

: Intermittent

: Low speed

High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF”/“

” position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

s03am0103

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

– CONTINUED –

Wiper and Washer

243

Instruments and Controls

(246,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Windshield washer

s03am0104

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light appears when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light appears,

refill the tank with fluid. For the tank

refilling method, refer to “Windshield

Washer Fluid” �P483.

& Rear Window Wiper and

Washer Switch

s03am02

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

1 Type-A

2 Type-B

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

: Continuous

: Intermittent

OFF/

: Off

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)

! Rear wiper

s03am0201

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob

switch upward.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob switch

to the “OFF”/“

” position.

Wiper and Washer

244

(247,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

With the switch turned to the “ ” position,

the rear wiper will operate intermittently at

intervals corresponding to the vehicle

speed. In this position, when you move

the select lever to the “R” position, the rear

wiper will switch to continuous operation.

When you move the select lever from the

“R” (reverse) position to another position,

the rear wiper will return to intermittent

operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the

“OFF”/“

” position, if the front windshield

wiper is operating continuously, the rear

wiper will operate intermittently when you

move the select lever to the “R” (reverse)

position.

The factory setting (default setting) of the

reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is

operational.

This setting can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for

details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs

the rear wiper operation on the rear

gate. Doing so may damage the rear

wiper when it operates.

! Washer

s03am0202

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob switch

upward to the “

” position. The washer

fluid sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch

downward to the “

” position. The washer

fluid sprays and the wiper operates until

you release the knob.

The rear view camera washer also oper-

ates while the rear window washer is

operating.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light appears when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light appears,

refill the tank with fluid. For the tank

refilling method, refer to “Windshield

Washer Fluid” �P483.

Wiper and Washer

245

Instruments and Controls

(248,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3-17. Defogger and Deicer

s03bi

1 Rear window defogger

2 Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is acti-

vated only when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

Defogger button (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

Defogger button (11.6-inch display mod-

els)

To activate the defogger and deicer sys-

tem, press the defogger button. The rear

window defogger, outside mirror defogger

and windshield wiper deicer are activated

simultaneously. The indicator light on the

defogger button illuminates while the

defogger and deicer system is activated.

To turn them off, press the defogger button

again. They also turn off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and outside

mirrors have been cleared and the wind-

shield wiper blade rubbers have been

deiced completely before that time, press

the defogger button to turn them off. If

defrosting, defogging or deicing is not

complete, you have to press the defogger

button to turn them on again.

It is possible to set the defogger and deicer

system for the continuous operation mode

by operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P203 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

Defogger and Deicer

246

(249,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than

necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may da-

mage the conductors printed on

the window.

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to

the windshield.

. If the windshield is covered with

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode:

– If the vehicle speed remains at 9

mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

minutes, the windshield wiper

deicer system automatically

stops operating. However, the

rear window defogger system

and outside mirror defogger sys-

tem maintain continuous opera-

tion in this condition.

– If the vehicle battery voltage

drops below the permissible le-

vel, continuous operation of the

defogger system and deicer sys-

tem is canceled and the system

stops operating.

3-18. Mirrors

s03ap

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside Mirror (without Auto-

Dimming Function) (If

Equipped)

s03ap08

1 Normal position

2 Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-

glare position.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

247

Instruments and Controls

(250,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Com-

pass (If Equipped)

s03ap12

1 Compass

2 Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

s03ap1201

Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s green

LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming

feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

s03ap1202

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display

turns on/off. The compass feature will

default to on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a

zone number appears in the dis-

play.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location

zone number appears. After you

stop pressing the switch, your new

zone number will be saved. Within

a few seconds, the display will

show a compass direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccu-

rate, recalibrate the compass. Press

and hold the “

” switch for more than

9 seconds or until a “C” appears in the

display. Once a “C” appears in the

display, slowly drive the vehicle in

circles until compass is calibrated.

Mirrors

248

(251,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Com-

pass with HomeLink

(If

Equipped)

s03ap07

1 Compass

2 HomeLink

buttons

3 Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

help preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

s03ap0705

Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s green

LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming

feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature (if

equipped)

s03ap0706

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display

turns on/off. The compass feature will

default to on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

Compass calibration zones (U.S.)

Compass calibration zones (South Amer-

ica)

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a

zone number appears in the dis-

play.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location

zone number appears. After you

stop pressing the switch, your new

zone number will be saved. Within

a few seconds, the display will

show a compass direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccu-

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

249

Instruments and Controls

(252,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

rate, recalibrate the compass. Press

and hold the “

” switch for more than

9 seconds or until a “C” appears in the

display. Once a “C” appears in the

display, slowly drive the vehicle in

circles until compass is calibrated.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

s03ap0704

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up to

three hand-held radio frequency remotes

used to activate devices such as gate

operators, garage door openers, entry

door locks, security systems, even home

lighting. The below steps are generic

programming instructions; for Genie and

Sommer garage door openers please go

directly to the HomeLink

website. Addi-

tional information and programming vi-

deos can be found at www.HomeLink.

com and www.youtube.com/HomeLink-

Gentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink

with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features

as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect

an object signaling the door to

stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.

. It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-

held remote (garage door opener

remote) of the device for quicker

and more accurate training.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” or “ACC” position before

programming and/or operating

HomeLink

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as

for future HomeLink

program-

ming.

. For security reasons, when trans-

ferring ownership of your vehi-

cle, it is recommended to delete

the programmed HomeLink

but-

tons. Refer to “Erasing

HomeLink

buttons” �P253.

! Programming a New HomeLink

button

s03ap070409

1 Indicator Light

2 HomeLink

buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink

button that you would like to program.

The HomeLink

indicator light will flash

orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing

HomeLink

buttons” �P253).

Mirrors

250

(253,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to

8 cm) away from the HomeLink

button

that you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train

better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches

(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you

have difficulty with the programming

process.

3. While the HomeLink

indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the

hand-held remote button. Continue

pressing the hand-held remote button

until the HomeLink

indicator light

changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held remote

button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to re-

place this “Programming a New

HomeLink

button” step 3 with proce-

dures noted in the “Gate Operator /

Canadian Programming” section. Refer

to “Gate Operator/Canadian Program-

ming” �P253.

1 Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink

button that you

would like to program and observe the

indicator light.

. If the indicator light remains constant

green, your device should operate

when the HomeLink

button is

pressed. At this point, if your device

operates, programming is complete.

. If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for two

seconds and release the HomeLink

button up to three times to complete

the programming process. At this

point if your device operates, pro-

gramming is complete. If the device

does not operate, continue with the

next step of the programming in-

structions.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

251

Instruments and Controls

(254,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 “Learn” button

5. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc.) locate the

“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.

This can usually be found where the

hanging antenna wire is attached to

the motor-head unit (see the device’s

manual to identify this button). The

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete

step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for 2 seconds and release the

HomeLink

button up to three times. At

this point programming is complete

and your device should operate when

the HomeLink

button is pressed and

released.

1 Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, please refer to

“Garage Door Two-Way Communica-

tion” �P253.

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink

information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink

website.

Mirrors

252

(255,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-

gramming

s03ap070410

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-

sion, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink

to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished transmit-

ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the program-

ming procedures, replace “Programming a

New HomeLink

button” step 3 with the

following:

While the HomeLink

indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every

two seconds until the HomeLink

indicator

light changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held remote

button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the “cycling” process

to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink

button” step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink

s03ap070411

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink

button. Activa-

tion will now occur for the trained device

(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,

security system, entry door lock, home/

office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the

hand-held remote of the device may also

be used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink

buttons

s03ap070412

To erase programming from the three

buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as

outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED

indicator will change from continuously lit

to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.

Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

HomeLink

is now ready to be pro-

grammed at any time beginning with

“Programming a New HomeLink

button”

- step 1.

! Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink

button

s03ap070406

To program a previously trained button,

follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orange after 20 seconds. The

HomeLink

button can be released at

this point. Proceed with “Programming

a New HomeLink

button” - step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-

ming of a new device to the button, it

will revert to the previously stored

programming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-

nication

s03ap070413

HomeLink

has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink

can receive and display “clos-

ing” or “opening” status messages from

compatible garage door opener systems.

At any time, HomeLink

can also recall and

display the last recorded status commu-

nicated by the garage door opener to

indicate your garage door being “closed”

or “opened”.

HomeLink

has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

253

Instruments and Controls

(256,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow

your vehicle speed to successfully receive

the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication

s03ap070414

1 Status Indicators

Within 5 seconds after programming a new

HomeLink

button, both of HomeLink’s

garage door status indicators will flash

rapidly green indicating that the garage

door two-way communication has been

enabled. If your garage door status in-

dicators flashed, two-way communication

programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink

information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way Communication

s03ap070415

1 Status Indicator

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink

by simulta-

neously pressing HomeLink

buttons 1

and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink

will

display the last recorded status for 3

seconds.

If two-way communication programming is

successful, HomeLink

will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators (see below).

1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking

Orange)

2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-

ing Orange)

4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

! Certification

s03ap070416

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink

information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline

at 1-800-355-3515.

Mirrors

254

(257,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

. Canada-spec. models

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

255

Instruments and Controls

(258,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-

tion.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operating a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the garage door or other device

to prevent potential harm or da-

mage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a gar-

age door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature

as required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or

call 1-800-355-3515.

& Outside Mirrors

s03ap03

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

s03ap0301

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the

convex mirror to judge the distance

of vehicles behind you when chan-

ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or

glance backwards) to determine the

actual size and distance of objects

that you view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrors

before driving.

Mirrors

256

(259,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Remote control mirror switch

s03ap0302

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left

mirror, “R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional op-

eration.

NOTE

The mirrors can also be adjusted

manually.

3-19. Tilt/Telescopic Steering

Wheel

s03bf

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the

fixed position, adjust the steering

wheel again. It is dangerous to

drive without locking the steering

wheel. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

– CONTINUED –

Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel

257

Instruments and Controls

(260,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Tilt adjustment

2 Telescopic adjustment

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front

Seats” �P30.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and

down, and forward and backward.

& Heated Steering Wheel Sys-

tem (If Equipped)

s03bf01

The Heated Steering Wheel system

warms the steering wheel at a constant

temperature.

1 Heated Steering Wheel switch

2 Indicator light

3 Heated area

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel

system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel

switch when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering

wheel will be warmed and the indicator

light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off

the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull

the switch again. Then the indicator light

will turn off.

CAUTION

. Use the Heated Steering Wheel

system with the engine running.

Otherwise, the battery voltage

may drop below the permissible

level and it may not be possible to

start the engine.

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if they use the Heated

Steering Wheel for a long period

of time. When using the Heated

Steering Wheel, always be sure to

warn the persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated Steering

Wheel with an object such as a

steering wheel cover. Doing so

may cause the Heated Steering

Wheel to overheat.

. Do not spill liquid on the steering

wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it

off immediately and dry it before

using the Heated Steering Wheel

system.

Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel

258

(261,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

. If the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is approximately

above 1048F (408C) when the switch

is turned on, the system will not heat

the steering wheel. Then, the indica-

tor light will continue to illuminate.

. The Heated Steering Wheel system

will automatically turn off approxi-

mately 30 minutes after the system

has been turned on.

. The temperature of the Heated Steer-

ing Wheel system cannot be ad-

justed.

3-20. Horn

s03ar

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Horn

259

Instruments and Controls

(262,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(263,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s04

4-1. Ventilator Control............................................ 262

Center Ventilators ............................................... 262

Side Ventilators .................................................. 262

4-2. Climate Control Panel .................................... 262

Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models .............................. 263

11.6-Inch Display Models ....................................265

4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation........... 267

Sensors.............................................................. 268

4-4. Manual Climate Control.................................. 269

Airflow Mode Selection ....................................... 269

Dynamic Ventilation ............................................ 270

Temperature Control ...........................................271

Fan Speed Control.............................................. 272

Air Conditioner Control....................................... 272

Air Inlet Selection ............................................... 272

To Turn Off the Climate Control System .............. 273

4-5. Defrosting ........................................................273

4-6. Operating Tips for Heater and Air

Conditioner ....................................................274

Cleaning Ventilator Grille.................................... 274

Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct

Sunlight ........................................................... 274

Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant

Circuit.............................................................. 274

Checking Air Conditioning System before

Summer Season............................................... 274

Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity

and Low Temperature Weather Condition ......... 275

Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When

Engine Is Heavily Loaded ................................. 275

Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ...... 275

4-7. Air Filtration System .......................................275

Replacing the Cabin Air Filter............................. 276

Climate Control

(264,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

4-1. Ventilator Control

s04af

& Center Ventilators

s04af01

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all

the way down.

& Side Ventilators

s04af02

1 Open

2 Close

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab.

4-2. Climate Control Panel

s04ag

WARNING

. The cooling function operates

only when the engine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

Ventilator Control

262

(265,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models

s04ag11

1 Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P273.)

2 Defogger button (Refer to “Defogger and

Deicer” �P246.)

3 Climate control screen (lower display)

4 Driver’s side temperature control button

(Refer to “Temperature Control” �P271.)

5 Passeger’s side temperature control but-

ton (Refer to “Temperature Control”

�P271.)

– CONTINUED –

Climate Control Panel

263

Climate Control

(266,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Climate control screen

s04ag1101

Climate control screen (lower display)

: Touch the climate control mode indicator

1 Climate control ON/OFF icon

2 SYNC mode indicator

3 Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)

4 Climate control mode indicator

5 Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

6 Dynamic Ventilation mode indicator

7 Dynamic Ventilation ON/ OFF icon

8 Customizable icon*

9 Fan speed control

10 SYNC icon

11 Climate control mode select icon

12 Airflow mode selection screen

*: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “General settings”

�P215.

Climate Control Panel

264

(267,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& 11.6-Inch Display Models

s04ag12

1 Climate control screen

2 Defogger button (Refer to “Defogger and

Deicer” �P246.)

3 Passenger’s side temperature control

button (Refer to “Temperature Control”

�P271.)

4 Driver’s side temperature control button

(Refer to “Temperature Control” �P271.)

5 Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P273.)

– CONTINUED –

Climate Control Panel

265

Climate Control

(268,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Climate control screen

s04ag1201

Climate control screen

: Touch the climate control mode indicator

1 Climate control ON/OFF icon

2 SYNC mode indicator

3 Climate control mode indicator

4 Dynamic Ventilation mode indicator

5 Dynamic Ventilation ON/ OFF icon

6 Customizable icon*

7 Fan speed control

8 Climate control mode select icon

9 Temperature control screen (passen-

ger’s side)

10 SYNC icon

11 Temperature control bar

12 Airflow mode selection screen

13 Temperature control screen (driver’s

side)

*: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “General settings”

�P198.

Climate Control Panel

266

(269,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

4-3. Automatic Climate Con-

trol Operation

s04ai

Climate control screen (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models)

Climate control screen (11.6-inch display

models)

1 Air inlet selection

2 Air conditioner

3 Airflow mode

4 Fan speed

When the auto mode is selected, the

following functions are automatically con-

trolled.

. Airflow mode

. Air inlet selection

. Air conditioner operation

. Fan speed

To activate this mode, perform the follow-

ing.

“AUTO” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

1. Touch “AUTO”.

2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to

“Temperature Control” �P271.

“AUTO” is not displayed on the custo-

mizable icon:

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch “AUTO”.

3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to

“Temperature Control” �P271.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is

running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

the air conditioner will automatically

turn on if the temperature is set

much lower than the current outlet

air temperature. Even in this case,

the “A/C” indicator light on the

climate control screen illuminates.

. The air conditioner may not operate

in the following cases:

– When the cabin temperature is

low

– When the ambient temperature

decreases close to 328F (08C)

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Automatic Climate Control Operation

267

Climate Control

(270,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. When “AUTO” is displayed, if you

operate the fan speed control or the

airflow mode, press the defroster

button, or turn on MAX A/C mode,

the “AUTO” display will turn off. You

can then manually control the sys-

tem as desired using the climate

control screen. To change the sys-

tem back to auto mode, touch

“AUTO”.

To turn off the climate control system,

touch “ON/OFF”.

At this time, the air inlet selection mode will

differ depending on the auto mode and

manual mode.

. When the air inlet selection is set to

auto mode: Outside air circulation

. When the air inlet selection is set to

manual mode: No change

When the ignition switch is changed to the

“OFF”/“LOCK” or “ACC” position from

“ON”, the air inlet mode will automatically

change to the outside air mode regardless

of whether it is the auto mode or manual

mode.

& Sensors

s04ai03

1 Solar sensor

2 Interior air temperature sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

Automatic Climate Control Operation

268

(271,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

4-4. Manual Climate Control

s04aj

& Airflow Mode Selection

s04aj01

Select the preferred airflow mode by the

following operation.

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the

foot outlets

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the

instrument panel and some through wind-

shield defroster outlets (A small amount of

air flows to the windshield and both side

windows to prevent fogging.)

– CONTINUED –

Manual Climate Control

269

Climate Control

(272,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel

& Dynamic Ventilation

s04aj11

Dynamic Ventilation is a system that uses

sensors and other technology to judge that

someone is sitting in the front passenger

seat or rear seat and prioritizes the climate

control for these seats when they are

occupied.

When the push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position, the climate

control system automatically selects the

Dynamic Ventilation mode according to

where the vehicle occupants are sitting.

“DRIVER” mode (driver’s seat is only

occupied):

When the climate control system judges

that the driver is the only vehicle occupant,

“DRIVER” is displayed on the screen and

the system directs the airflow only to the

driver. To cancel the airflow “DRIVER”

mode, touch the “

” icon, and “ALL” will be

displayed instead of “DRIVER”, and air-

flow will be directed to all the seats.

“FRONT” mode (driver’s seat and front

passenger’s seat are occupied):

When the climate control system judges

that the driver’s and passenger’s seats are

occupied, “FRONT” is displayed on the

screen and the system directs the airflow

to the driver and front passenger. To

cancel the airflow “FRONT” mode, touch

the “

” icon, and “ALL” will be displayed

instead of “FRONT”, and airflow is directed

to all the seats.

Manual Climate Control

270

(273,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

“ALL” mode (rear seats are occupied

by passengers):

When the climate control system judges

that there are passengers occupying the

rear seats, “ALL” is displayed on the

screen and the system directs the airflow

to all vehicle occupants. To cancel the

airflow “ALL” mode, touch the “

” icon and

“DRIVER” or “FRONT” is displayed on the

screen depending on which passenger’s

seats are occupied.

NOTE

. Depending on the settings of the

climate control system or other

factors affecting the temperature in-

side the vehicle, the operation of the

Dynamic Ventilation mode for occu-

pants may differ from the operation

displayed on the screen.

. The climate control system judges

that the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by detecting such things

as the fastening of the seatbelt,

opening or closing of the door, and

operation of the passenger’s side

temperature setting controls.

. If “FRONT” is displayed on the

screen when the front passenger’s

door is opened and then closed and

the climate control system subse-

quently judges that the front pas-

senger’s seat is not occupied, the

screen will display “DRIVER” when

the vehicle speed reaches approxi-

mately 13 mph (20 km/h).

. The climate control system judges

that there are passengers occupying

the rear seats according to the open-

ing and closing of the rear doors.

However, touching “

” icon will turn

off the function that judges whether

the rear doors are open or closed. To

turn the function on again, turn the

ignition switch to the “OFF”/“LOCK”

position for approximately one hour.

. The system may not be able to judge

the presence of passengers accu-

rately, in which case this function

may not operate properly.

& Temperature Control

s04aj02

Perform the following operation to regulate

the temperature of airflow from the air

outlets.

Temperature control buttons:

Press the temperature control button to the

blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).

Temperature control screen (11.6-inch

display models):

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Select the preferred temperature by

the following operation.

. Touch and move the temperature

control bar.

. Touch the “

”/“ ”.

. Touch the preferred temperature in

the temperature control screen.

! Max A/C mode

s04aj0208

For quicker cooling, touch “MAX A/C” on

the climate control mode select icon or

customizable icon.

When the Max A/C mode is on, the

following settings will be changed auto-

matically.

. The air conditioner will turn on.

. The temperature will be set on the

lowest.

– CONTINUED –

Manual Climate Control

271

Climate Control

(274,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. The fan speed will be set on the

maximum speed.

. The air inlet will be set to the recircula-

tion mode.

. The airflow mode setting will be set to

the ventilation mode.

To turn off the Max A/C mode and return to

the previous setting, touch “MAX A/C”

again.

! SYNC mode

s04aj0207

When the SYNC mode is turned on, both

the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-

peratures are synchronized using the

driver’s side temperature control button

and temperature control screen.

. If “SYNC” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon, touch “SYNC” to turn the

SYNC mode on or off.

. If a customizable icon other than

“SYNC” is displayed, touch the climate

control mode indicator. Then touch

“SYNC” to turn the SYNC mode on or

off.

The SYNC mode indicator will turn white.

Touch “SYNC” again, press the passen-

ger’s side temperature control button or

operate the passenger’s side temperature

control bar to cancel the SYNC mode. The

SYNC mode indicator will be grayed out. In

this case, temperature control on the

driver’s side and passenger’s side will be

separated. The temperature will be con-

trolled individually using the driver’s and

passenger’s temperature control button

and the driver’s and passenger’s tempera-

ture control bar.

& Fan Speed Control

s04aj03

Select the preferred fan speed by touching

or on the climate control screen.

& Air Conditioner Control

s04aj04

The air conditioner operates only when the

engine is running.

Perform the following operation while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner.

. If “A/C” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon, touch “A/C”. When the air

conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator

illuminates. And A/C icon will be dis-

played on the climate control mode

indicator.

. If a customizable icon other than “A/C”

is displayed, touch the climate control

mode indicator. Then touch “A/C” on

the climate control mode select icon.

When the air conditioner is on, “A/C”

indicator illuminates. And A/C icon will

be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

To turn off the air conditioner, touch “A/C”

again. The indicator light will turn off or it

will be grayed out.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. However, if the ambient

temperature decreases to approxi-

mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner

and dehumidification system may not

work properly.

& Air Inlet Selection

s04aj05

Select the air inlet by touching the air inlet

selection icon.

Recirculation mode:

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehi-

cle. This mode is used for the following

cases.

. When driving on a dusty road

. When you want cooling performance to

increase (for example, in particularly

hot weather)

Perform the following operation to select

this mode.

is displayed on the customizable

icon:

(1) Touch

Manual Climate Control

272

(275,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. is not displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

(1) Touch the climate control mode

indicator.

(2) Touch

on the climate control

mode select icon.

will be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

Outside air circulation mode:

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment. This mode is used for the

following cases.

. When the road is no longer dusty

. When the interior has cooled to a

comfortable temperature

Perform the same operation as the recir-

culation mode to change the mode.

will be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

WARNING

Continued operation in the recircu-

lation mode may fog up the win-

dows. Switch to the outside air

circulation mode as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

NOTE

When outside air circulation is se-

lected, the system may automatically

adjust the air inlet setting depending on

such factors as the temperature

setting, the temperature inside the

vehicle, or conditions outside the ve-

hicle.

& To Turn Off the Climate Con-

trol System

s04aj07

To turn off the climate control system,

touch the climate control ON/OFF icon.

4-5. Defrosting

s04ah

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows, perform the

following procedures.

. To select the “

” mode, press the

defroster button.

. To select the “

” mode, touch “ ” on

the airflow mode selection screen.

NOTE

. When the “

” or “ ” mode is

selected, the air conditioner oper-

ates automatically regardless of the

position of the air conditioner icon to

defrost the windshield more quickly.

However, the indicator on the air

conditioner icon may not illuminate.

At the same time, the air inlet selec-

– CONTINUED –

Defrosting

273

Climate Control

(276,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

tion is automatically set to the out-

side air circulation mode.

. After defrosting the windshield by

pressing the defroster button “

”,

pressing the button again returns

the system to the setting that had

been selected before the defroster

was activated.

4-6. Operating Tips for Heater

and Air Conditioner

s04ad

& Cleaning Ventilator Grille

s04ad01

1 Front ventilator inlet grille

2 Condenser

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient Cooling after Park-

ing in Direct Sunlight

s04ad02

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of the

air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-

ciency.

& Lubrication Oil Circulation in

the Refrigerant Circuit

s04ad03

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking Air Conditioning

System before Summer Sea-

son

s04ad04

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner

274

(277,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Cooling and Dehumidifying in

High Humidity and Low Tem-

perature Weather Condition

s04ad05

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

& Air Conditioner Compressor

Shut-Off When Engine Is

Heavily Loaded

s04ad06

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for Your Climate

Control System

s04ad07

1 Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).

Before adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant, check the air conditioner label

in the location shown in the illustration to

confirm which type of refrigerant is used in

your vehicle.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.

Repairs needed as a result of using the

wrong refrigerant are not covered under

warranty.

4-7. Air Filtration System

s04ae

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the cabin air filter according to

the replacement schedule found in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This

schedule should be followed to maintain

the filter’s dust collection ability. Under

extremely dusty conditions, the filter

should be replaced more frequently. Have

your filter checked or replaced by your

SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use

only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter.

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

– CONTINUED –

Air Filtration System

275

Climate Control

(278,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Replacing the Cabin Air Filter

s04ae01

1. Remove the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

1 Stoppers

(3) Push both sides of the glove box

inward to unlock the stoppers and

then pull down the glove box as far

as it will go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion.

When doing this, be careful not to

damage the hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according to

the following procedure in order to

prevent dust on the air cleaner from

falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the

filter cover.

(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter

and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).

(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

Air Filtration System

276

(279,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new

one and then reinstall the cover.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

5. Close the glove box.

Air Filtration System

277

Climate Control

(280,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(281,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s05

5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 280

Roof Antenna ..................................................... 280

5-2. Audio Set .........................................................280

Audio

(282,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

5-1. Antenna

s05aa

& Roof Antenna

s05aa03

The satellite radio antenna and telematics

antenna (if equipped) are installed in the

center of the roof at the rear.

5-2. Audio Set

s05ac

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio

system, refer to the separate navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual for details.

Antenna

280

(283,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s06

6-1. Interior Light ................................................... 282

Map Lights ......................................................... 282

Dome Light......................................................... 282

Cargo Area Light ................................................283

OFF Delay Timer.................................................283

6-2. Sun Visors....................................................... 283

Sun Visor Extension Plate................................... 284

Vanity Mirror with Light (If Equipped) .................. 284

6-3. Storage Compartment .................................... 285

Glove Box ..........................................................285

Center Tray......................................................... 285

Center Console................................................... 286

Center Console Tray ........................................... 286

Storage Compartment......................................... 286

6-4. Cup Holder ...................................................... 287

Front Passenger’s Cup Holder ............................ 287

Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder (If Equipped)......... 287

6-5. Bottle Holders ................................................. 288

6-6. Accessory Power Outlets ...............................288

6-7. USB Power Supply ..........................................289

How to Use the USB Power Supply .................... 290

6-8. Wireless Charger (If Equipped) ......................291

How to Use the Wireless Charger ....................... 292

Certification for the Wireless Charger................. 295

6-9. Ashtray (Dealer Option) ..................................296

6-10. Assist Grip .....................................................297

6-11. Coat Hook ......................................................298

6-12. Floor Mat ........................................................298

6-13. Shopping Bag Hook ......................................299

6-14. Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) ...................300

Using the Cover ................................................. 300

To Remove the Cover Housing ........................... 300

Stowage of the Cargo Area Cover....................... 301

To Install the Cover Housing .............................. 301

6-15. Cargo Tie-Down Hooks (If Equipped) ..........302

6-16. Under-Floor Storage Compartment..............302

Interior Equipment

(284,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

6-1. Interior Light

s06aa

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the lights are turned off to

avoid battery discharge.

& Map Lights

s06aa06

! Map light switches

s06aa0606

To turn on the map light, press the lens.

To turn it off, press the lens again.

CAUTION

Do not keep watching the light

source because they use LEDs.

Doing so could damage your eyes.

! Door interlock switch

s06aa0602

1 Door interlock switch

The door interlock switch has the following

positions.

OFF: The map lights do not illuminate

automatically in conjunction with a door

opening. However, the lights can be turned

on manually by pressing the map light

lens.

DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-

matically when any of the doors (other than

the rear gate) is opened even while the

map light is off. Several seconds after all

the doors (other than the rear gate) are

closed, the map lights gradually turn off.

For details, refer to “OFF Delay Timer”

�P283.

& Dome Light

s06aa01

1 ON

2 DOOR

3 OFF

The dome light switch has the following

positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously.

OFF: The light remains off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically in the following cases.

. Any of the doors or the rear gate is

opened.

. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

using the keyless access function (if

equipped). Refer to “Locking and Un-

locking with “Keyless Access” Entry

Interior Light

282

(285,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Function” �P112.

. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

using the remote keyless entry system.

Refer to “Remote Keyless Entry Sys-

tem” �P124.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position.

& Cargo Area Light

s06aa02

1 DOOR

2 OFF

DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear

gate is opened. The light remains illumi-

nated for several seconds and gradually

turns off after the rear gate is closed.

OFF: The light remains off.

& OFF Delay Timer

s06aa07

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

. Dome light

. Map lights

. Cargo area light

When the door interlock switch is set to the

“DOOR” position, the light will automati-

cally turn on and off depending on the

locking and unlocking of the doors, the

opening and closing of the doors, as well

as the position of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time in

which the lights remain on (OFF delay

timer) can be changed by operating the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-

inch display models) or “Vehicle

setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch

display models). Also, the setting of

the lights remain on (OFF delay timer)

can be changed by your SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for details.

6-2. Sun Visors

s06ac

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

– CONTINUED –

Sun Visors

283

Interior Equipment

(286,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Sun Visor Extension Plate

s06ac01

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can use the sun visor exten-

sion plate to prevent glare through the gap

between the sun visor and center pillar. To

use the extension plate, pull it toward the

rear of the vehicle. When you have

finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

would obstruct your view of the

rearview mirror.

& Vanity Mirror with Light (If

Equipped)

s06ac02

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being blinded by glare.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nate when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Sun Visors

284

(287,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

6-3. Storage Compartment

s06ad

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden stops or an

accident.

. Do not store the following items

in the storage compartment.

Otherwise, it may cause a fire or

accident.

– Spray cans, containers with

flammable or corrosive li-

quids or any other dangerous

items.

– Plastic or other heat-vulner-

able or flammable articles

such as a lighter.

& Glove Box

s06ad01

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE

When the instrument panel illumination

is on, the light that illuminates the glove

box (if equipped) is on. Refer to “Head-

lights” �P232.

& Center Tray

s06ad13

The center tray is located below the center

of the instrument panel.

WARNING

For models with the wireless char-

ger:

When the wireless charger is turned

on, do not place coins, keys, clips, or

other metal objects on the center

tray. For details, refer to “Wireless

Charger” �P291.

CAUTION

Do not use the center tray to hold

objects that could roll out of the tray.

– CONTINUED –

Storage Compartment

285

Interior Equipment

(288,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. You may get injured if objects are

thrown out of the tray while the

vehicle is in motion.

NOTE

When the instrument panel illumination

is on, the light that illuminates the

center tray is on. Refer to “Headlights”

�P232.

& Center Console

s06ad02

The center console box provides a storage

space.

To open the lid, pull up the lock release

lever.

& Center Console Tray

s06ad18

The center console tray is located on the

front side of the center console.

& Storage Compartment

s06ad15

Apron trim side pockets are located on

both sides of the cargo room.

Storage Compartment

286

(289,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

6-4. Cup Holder

s06ae

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,

if hot, might burn you and/or your

passengers. Spilled beverages may

also damage upholstery, carpets or

audio equipment.

& Front Passenger’s Cup

Holder

s06ae01

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

. Take care not to spill a beverage

on the select lever or any

switch(es) in the adjacent area. If

the beverage is spilled, it may

cause a malfunction of the select

lever and/or switch(es).

1 Spacer

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console.

Place a spacer in it before putting in a

small cup or can.

& Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder

(If Equipped)

s06ae02

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

CAUTION

When a cup containing a beverage is

in the cup holder, do not fold down

or recline any seat. Otherwise, the

beverage could spill while driving

and, if the beverage is hot, it could

burn you and/or your passengers.

Cup Holder

287

Interior Equipment

(290,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

6-5. Bottle Holders

s06av

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could burn

you and/or your passengers.

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

6-6. Accessory Power Out-

lets

s06af

Power outlet

An accessory power outlet is provided in

the center console. Electrical power (12 V

DC) from the battery is available at any of

the outlets when the ignition switch is in

either the “ACC” or “ON” position.

You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-

ance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120 W. Do

not use an appliance which exceeds the

indicated wattage for each outlet.

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not ex-

ceed 120 W.

Bottle Holders

288

(291,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlet.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not in

use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12 V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 120 W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

When using appliances con-

nected to two or more outlets

simultaneously, the total power

consumed by them must not

exceed 120 W. Overloading the

accessory power outlet can

cause a short circuit. Do not use

double adapters or more than

one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator

and brake pedals. If they do, do

not use the electrical appliance

while driving.

6-7. USB Power Supply

s06ay

CAUTION

. The specification of a USB term-

inal that can be used is the Type-

A and Type-C. If a different spe-

cification of terminal is con-

nected, power supply or charging

may not be possible, or the

device may malfunction.

. There is a risk that a connected

device may malfunction or data

may be damaged. The connec-

tion of a device shall be per-

formed at your responsibility.

. To avoid an electric shock or a

malfunction, observe the follow-

ing precautions.

– Do not connect a USB hub.

– Do not insert any metal or

other foreign object into the

USB terminal.

– Do not spill water or other

liquid on the USB terminal.

. Be careful not to pull the con-

nected cable. Doing so could

break the USB terminal and the

connected device.

– CONTINUED –

USB Power Supply

289

Interior Equipment

(292,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. If a device is connected for a long

time when the engine is not

running, doing so may cause the

risk of a discharged battery. Even

when the engine is running, we

recommend that you do not con-

nect a device for an unnecessa-

rily long time.

. Do not connect a malfunctioning

device. Doing so may cause the

risk of smoke and fire.

NOTE

. The rated voltage of each USB

terminal is 5 V. For details about

the maximum rated power, refer to

“How to Use the USB Power Supply”

�P290. Before connecting a device,

be sure to read the instruction

manual of the device and check

whether or not this specification of

the output is supported by the

device. If a device that requires

power exceeding the maximum rat-

ing is connected, power supply or

charging may not be possible. Even

if charging could be completed, the

time required for charging may be

longer than when the genuine char-

ger for that device is used.

. Depending on the device, charging

may be possible only when a special

cable is used. In this case, be sure to

connect the device using the special

cable.

. When a device that communicates

with a PC is connected, power

supply or charging may not be

possible.

. When connect a device for charging,

disconnect the device promptly after

charging is completed.

& How to Use the USB Power

Supply

s06ay01

Type-A and Type-C

Type-A

Front seat USB power supply (an audio

device can be connected and used)

– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*

– USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two USB

terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.

USB Power Supply

290

(293,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Console USB power supply (charge only)

(if equipped)

– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*

– USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two USB

terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.

Use the USB terminal to use or charge an

electronic device.

When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the power can be supplied

to the electronic device.

6-8. Wireless Charger (If

Equipped)

s06bh

Wireless charger

To charge a cell phone, smartphone or a

similar mobile device compatible with the

Qi wireless charging standard, place the

device in the charging area located below

the center information display.

The “Qi” logo is a trademark of the

Wireless Power Consortium.

1 Indicator light

2 Power switch

3 Charging area

NOTE

Mobile devices and wireless chargers

contain coils for charging. These coils

allow the wireless charging system to

charge a mobile device with a high level

of charging efficiency. When your de-

vice is in the charging area, the wireless

charger detects it and aligns an inte-

grated moving coil with the coil in your

device for charging. If vehicle vibration

causes the two coils to become mis-

aligned while the vehicle is in motion,

the moving coil of the wireless charger

automatically repositions itself and

resumes charging.

– CONTINUED –

Wireless Charger

291

Interior Equipment

(294,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

However, if the mobile device moves

out of the charging area, charging will

automatically stop.

& How to Use the Wireless

Charger

s06bh01

1. The wireless charger operate when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

2. Press the power switch once to turn on

the wireless charger. When the wire-

less charger is ON, the indicator light

illuminates in green, and when the

wireless charger is OFF, the indicator

light turns off.

3. Place the mobile device so that the

screen or keypad is facing up (the

charging surface is facing downward).

The center of the device must also be

aligned with the center of the charging

area. Depending on the mobile device,

the charging coil may not be in the

center of the device. In such cases,

place the mobile device so that its

charging coil is in the center of the

charging area. The indicator light illu-

minates in orange during charging. If

the indicator light does not illuminate in

orange and device charging does not

occur, move the device to the center of

the charging area.

4. The indicator light illuminates in green

when charging is complete.

NOTE

The power status of the wireless char-

ger is stored even when the ignition

switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

! How to use the quick charge

s06bh0101

The following types of mobile devices

support quick charging as opposed to

normal charging (5 W).

. Mobile devices compliant with WPC*

Ver. 1.2.4 and compatible with fast

chargers can be charged up to 10 W.

. iPhone 8 (or later) with an iOS version

compliant with WPC* Ver. 1.2.4 and

compatible with 7.5 W charging.

* WPC: Wireless Power Consortium

1. Press the power switch three times to

change to the quick-charging mode

while your mobile device is charging in

normal mode. The indicator light will

change from orange to alternating

green and orange when the wireless

charger switches to the quick-charging

mode.

2. When charging is complete, the quick-

charging mode ends. To restart quick-

charging, switch to the quick-charging

mode again.

Wireless Charger

292

(295,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Indicator light patterns

s06bh0102

Indicator light Interpretation

Off

The wireless charger is

turned off

Green (illumi-

nated)

Standby (ready for char-

ging)*

Charging is complete*

Orange (illumi-

nated)

A mobile device is in the

charging area (a mobile

device is being detected)

Charging

Green and or-

ange illuminate

alternately

Quick charging is in pro-

gress

*1: No power is output for charging when the

wireless charger is in standby mode. Even if

metal objects are placed on the charging tray

in this state, they will not overheat.

*2: For some mobile devices, the indicator light

remains orange even after charging is

complete.

! List of warnings

s06bh0103

Indicator light

Possible

causes

Solution

Flashes or-

ange once

per second

A communi-

cation error

occurred be-

tween the

wireless

charger and

the access

key fob.

If the engine

is running,

stop the en-

gine and re-

start it.

If the ignition

switch is in

“ACC”, start

the engine

once.

Repeatedly

flashes or-

ange three

times

Metallic for-

eign object

detected.

A foreign ob-

ject is de-

tected be-

tween the

mobile device

and the char-

ging area.

The mobile

device is out

of alignment:

The overheat

prevention

function of

the charging

coils was trig-

gered be-

cause the

mobile de-

vice’s char-

ging coils

were out of

alignment

with the char-

ging area.

Remove any

foreign ob-

jects between

the mobile

device and

the charging

area.

Remove the

mobile device

from the

charging

area, check

that the acti-

vation indica-

tor light is illu-

minating in

green again,

and place the

device in the

center of the

charging

area. If there

is a case or

cover on your

mobile de-

vice, be sure

to remove it.

Indicator light

Possible

causes

Solution

Repeatedly

flashes or-

ange four

times

The tempera-

ture inside

the wireless

charger has

increased.

Remove the

mobile device

from the

charging area

temporarily to

stop char-

ging. When

the tempera-

ture of the

heavy electri-

cal equipment

cools down,

start charging

the device

again.

NOTE

If you hear noise on the AM radio while

your device is charging, you may be

able to reduce the noise by changing

the charging frequency.

To change the charging frequency,

press and hold the power switch to

turn on the system.

After a certain amount of time, the

indicator light will flash orange twice

to indicate the frequency switch.

WARNING

. For safety reasons, drivers must

not operate a charging mobile

device while driving.

– CONTINUED –

Wireless Charger

293

Interior Equipment

(296,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Do not charge small devices such

as cordless headphones or light-

weight cell phones while driving.

Due to their light weight, these

devices may be thrown from the

charging tray resulting in an

accident.

. The wireless power receiver can

affect some implanted or other

electrical medical devices. If you

use a cardiac pacemaker, ventri-

cular pacing pulse generator,

cardioverter-defibrillator, or a si-

milar device, consult with your

physician before using the wire-

less charger.

. Before charging your device,

make sure that there is no metal

between the charging area and

the mobile device. Metal objects

may generate heat and cause

burns when placed in the char-

ging area.

. Do not apply strong force or

impact to the charging area.

. Do not affix aluminum stickers to

or place other metal objects in

the charging area. Also, do not

charge a mobile device that has

aluminum stickers or other metal

objects attached to it that may

come in contact with the char-

ging area. Metal objects may

generate heat and cause burns

when placed in the charging area.

. Do not disassemble, modify, or

remove the wireless charger.

. Do not place magnetized objects

in or near the charging area.

. During charging, do not cover

your device with a cloth, etc.

. Do not charge your device in

dusty conditions.

. Make sure that no foreign objects

or liquids are placed or spilled in

the wireless charger.

CAUTION

. Do not place the access key fob

near the wireless charger.

. When your device is charging,

keep any magnetic cards such as

credit cards and precision de-

vices such as watches away from

the charging area. They may be

damaged. To prevent dischar-

ging the vehicle battery, do not

use the wireless charger for long

periods of time when the engine

is stopped.

. If the access key fob cannot be

detected in the cabin, the battery

cannot be charged. In addition,

charging may be temporarily sus-

pended when the remote keyless

entry system is in operation,

such as when opening and clos-

ing doors.

. Remove the device case to

charge the mobile battery.

. Do not leave objects in the trays

unattended for a long period of

time. The paint on the trays may

deteriorate depending on the

type of device case or accessory.

. If your mobile device does not

charge even after you place it in

the charging area, remove the

device case and any accessories.

. When the OS version of a mobile

device is updated, the charging

specifications may change sig-

nificantly. Also, if the OS versions

compatible with WPC change, the

quick charging function may be-

come unavailable. For details,

check the website of your mobile

device manufacturer.

. To prevent discharging the vehi-

cle battery, do not use the wire-

less charger for long periods of

Wireless Charger

294

(297,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

time when the engine is stopped.

NOTE

. This function is not available for

devices larger than the charger tray.

. The wireless charger and mobile

device will emit heat during char-

ging, but this is not a malfunction.

. When your mobile device emits heat

during charging, the mobile device’s

protective function may cancel char-

ging.

. A beep will sound when the power

switch of the wireless charger is

pressed to turn the power ON or

when a mobile device is being

detected. This is not a malfunction.

. The fan may activate when the

temperature rises, but this is not a

malfunction.

. Qi standard wireless charger can be

used on compatible devices. How-

ever, not all Qi standard devices and

compatibility are guaranteed.

& Certification for the Wireless

Charger

s06bh02

. The U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries

FCC ID: ACJ932AF2201

CAUTION

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

wireless power charger, pursuant to

part 18 of the FCC Rules.

This equipment generates, uses and

can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to

radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a

particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harm-

ful interference to radio communica-

tions, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on,

the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

– Increase the separation between

the equipment and receiver.

– Connect the equipment into an

outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is

connected.

This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth

for an uncontrolled environment

and meets the FCC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure Guidelines. This

equipment should be installed and

operated keeping the radiator at

least 20 cm or more away from

person’s body.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 and

part 18 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

– CONTINUED –

Wireless Charger

295

Interior Equipment

(298,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

FCC ID: ACJ932AF2201

CAUTION

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

wireless power charger, pursuant to

part 18 of the FCC Rules.

This equipment generates, uses and

can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to

radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a

particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harm-

ful interference to radio communica-

tions, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on,

the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

– Increase the separation between

the equipment and receiver.

– Connect the equipment into an

outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is

connected.

This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth

for an uncontrolled environment

and meets the FCC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure Guidelines. This

equipment should be installed and

operated keeping the radiator at

least 20 cm or more away from

person’s body.

6-9. Ashtray (Dealer Option)

s06ag

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This could

cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended

implement.

Ashtray (Dealer Option)

296

(299,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

Holder” �P287. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle Holders”

�P288.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the

ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

6-10. Assist Grip

s06bd

1 Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the

body of the passengers when they are in

the seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when

getting up from the seat. Holding

and pulling the assist grip in the

wrong way could break the grip and

possibly cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the

assist grip. Doing so could break it

and damage the object.

Assist Grip

297

Interior Equipment

(300,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

6-11. Coat Hook

s06ah

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

. Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or pointed objects on

the coat hooks. Hang clothing

directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

. Before hanging clothing on the

coat hooks, make sure there are

no pointed objects in the pock-

ets.

If these instructions are ignored, the

following may occur in sudden

stops or in a collision.

. Serious injuries by the items

thrown through the cabin.

. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-

ployment.

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

The coat hook is attached to each rear

passenger’s assist grip.

6-12. Floor Mat

s06aj

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat designed with

grommets in the correct loca-

tions.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed back in its proper

location and is correctly secured

on its retaining pins.

Coat Hook

298

(301,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

1. Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into

the floor mat eyelets.

A: Align the triangle marks ( ) when

installing the floor mats.

2. Turn the upper knob of each retaining

hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in

place.

6-13. Shopping Bag Hook

s06ai

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

Shopping Bag Hook

299

Interior Equipment

(302,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

6-14. Cargo Area Cover (If

Equipped)

s06ak

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the Cover

s06ak01

To extend the cover, pull the cargo area

cover using the center hole, then insert its

hooks into the catches as shown. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear

gate stays while extending and re-

winding the cover.

Scratches on the stays could cause

leakage of gas from the stays, which

may result in their inability to hold

the rear gate open.

& To Remove the Cover Hous-

ing

s06ak02

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten it.

3. Take it off the retainer.

Cargo Area Cover

300

(303,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Stowage of the Cargo Area

Cover

s06ak04

The cargo area cover can be stowed under

the cargo floor as follows.

1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo

floor board.

2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area end.

3. Put the cargo floor board back.

& To Install the Cover Housing

s06ak05

The right end of the cargo area cover is a

sliding structure.

1. Insert the right end of the cover into the

recessed portion with the arrow mark

facing upward.

2. Hold the cover housing securely and

insert the left end of the cover into the

recessed portion.

Cargo Area Cover

301

Interior Equipment

(304,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

6-15. Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

(If Equipped)

s06am

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the front tie-down hooks, turn

them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that ex-

ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The

maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10

kg) per hook.

6-16. Under-Floor Storage

Compartment

s06an

The subfloor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the cargo area

and can be used to store small items. To

open the lid, pull the strap up.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the sub-

floor storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce

the risk of injury in the event of

sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the subfloor storage

compartment.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

302

(305,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(306,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(307,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s07

7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 307

Fuel Requirements..............................................307

Fuel Filler Lid and Cap........................................ 308

7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ............... 311

7-3. Preparing to Drive .......................................... 312

7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models

without Push-Button Ignition Switch) ......... 313

General Precautions When Starting/Stopping

Engine..............................................................313

Starting Engine................................................... 314

Stopping the Engine ........................................... 315

Steering Lock ..................................................... 315

7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models

with Push-Button Start System) .................. 315

Safety Precautions..............................................315

Operating Range for Push-Button Start System...315

Starting Engine................................................... 315

Stopping Engine................................................. 317

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly ........................................................... 318

Steering Lock ..................................................... 318

7-6. Remote Engine Start System

(Dealer Option) .............................................. 319

Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) ............ 319

Alternate Operation Method for Models with

“Keyless Access with Push-Button Start

System” ........................................................... 322

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via

Remote Start (Models without “Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System”)....................... 322

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via

Remote Start (Models with “Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System”) ...................... 323

Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine

Start Shutdown ................................................ 323

Pre-heating or Pre-cooling the Interior of

the Vehicle ....................................................... 323

Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine

Starter Transceiver).......................................... 323

System Maintenance .......................................... 324

Certification for Remote Engine Starter .............. 325

7-7. Continuously Variable Transmission .............326

Continuously Variable Transmission Features..... 326

Select Lever....................................................... 327

Shift Lock Function............................................ 328

Selection of Manual Mode (If Equipped).............. 330

Selection of “L” (If Equipped)............................. 331

Driving Tips ....................................................... 331

7-8. SI-DRIVE...........................................................332

Intelligent (I) Mode ............................................. 332

Sport (S) Mode ................................................... 332

SI-DRIVE Switch................................................. 332

7-9. Power Steering ................................................333

7-10. Braking ...........................................................334

Braking Tips ...................................................... 334

Brake System..................................................... 334

Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators............ 335

7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ....................336

ABS Self-Check.................................................. 336

ABS Warning Light............................................. 336

Starting and Operating

(308,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

System ........................................................... 336

EBD System Malfunctions................................... 337

7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control System .............. 337

Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor .......... 339

To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control

System ............................................................. 339

7-14. X-MODE ......................................................... 340

To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE........................... 341

Hill Descent Control Function ............................. 342

7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(U.S.-Spec. Models) ...................................... 343

Certification for Tire Pressure Monitoring

System ............................................................. 344

TPMS Screen...................................................... 345

7-16. Parking Your Vehicle .................................... 345

Electronic Parking Brake .................................... 345

Parking Tips .......................................................351

7-17. Hill Start Assist System ............................... 352

7-18. Auto Start Stop System ............................... 353

System Operation ...............................................353

Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status..... 357

System Warning ................................................. 357

7-19. Rear View Camera ........................................ 358

How to Use the Rear View Camera...................... 359

Viewing Range on the Screen ............................. 359

Help Lines .......................................................... 360

7-20. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)............................... 362

System Features.................................................363

System Operation .............................................. 365

BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning

Buzzer ............................................................. 366

BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator.................................... 368

BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator.............................. 368

To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA ............................ 369

Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 369

Handling of Radar Sensors................................. 370

7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

System (If Equipped) ....................................371

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

Overview.......................................................... 372

Operating Conditions ......................................... 374

Sonar Audible Alarm Function............................ 377

Automatic Braking Function Operation ............... 378

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System Operation .................................. 380

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

ON/OFF Setting ................................................ 380

RAB Warning Indicator....................................... 381

Handling of the Sonar Sensors........................... 381

7-22. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped) ......382

User Recognition Function ................................. 386

Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning .................... 388

Driver Monitoring System Indicator/Warning ....... 389

Using the Driver Monitoring System ................... 390

Registering and Deleting a User ......................... 391

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF Settings ........ 392

How to Get the Source Code That Uses Open

Source Software............................................... 392

Starting and Operating

(309,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-1. Fuel

s07aa

CAUTION

. Use of a fuel which is low in

quality or use of an inappropriate

fuel additive may cause damage

to the engine and/or fuel system.

. Some gas stations, particularly

those in high altitude areas, offer

fuels posted as regular octane

gasoline with an octane rating

below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of

those fuels are not recom-

mended.

& Fuel Requirements

s07aa01

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

! Fuel octane rating

s07aa0103

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating

can cause persistent and heavy knocking,

which can damage the engine. Do not be

concerned if your vehicle sometimes

knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or

when you accelerate. Contact your

SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the

specified octane rating and your vehicle

knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON

s07aa010301

This octane rating is the Research Octane

Number.

! AKI

s07aa010302

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane num-

bers and is commonly referred to as the

Anti Knock Index (AKI).

! Unleaded gasoline

s07aa0104

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Reformulated gasoline

s07aa0128

SUBARU supports the use of reformulated

gasoline when available. Reformulated

gasoline has been blended to burn more

cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

! MMT

s07aa0106

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-

cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-

pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be

covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

s07aa0107

Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-

ditives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your

vehicle, but should contain no more than

15% ethanol for the proper operation of

your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 15% ethanol, including from any

pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are

only some examples of fuel containing

more than 15% ethanol).

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

307

Starting and Operating

(310,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station op-

erators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that speci-

fied in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gaso-

line. Methanol can be used in your

vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5%

of the fuel mixture AND if it is accom-

panied by sufficient quantities of the

proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-

tors required to prevent damage to the

fuel system. Do not use fuel containing

methanol EXCEPT under these condi-

tions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may

be fuel related, try a different brand of

gasoline before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel Filler Lid and Cap

s07aa02

! Locations of the fuel filler lid

s07aa0202

! Refueling

s07aa0201

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/ “OFF” position

and turn off all the other electrical

components.

2. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one

of the operations below.

– Press the “

” button on the key fob.

– Press the unlock side of the power

door locking switch.

3. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

4. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.

Open it further by hand.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any sta-

tic electricity that may be present on

your body. If your body is carrying

an electrostatic charge, there is a

possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

Fuel

308

(311,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Open

2 Close

5. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and

then close all vehicle doors and

windows. Make sure that there

are no lighted cigarettes, open

flames or electrical sparks in the

adjacent area. Only handle fuel

outdoors. Quickly wipe up any

spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the left.

Do not remove the cap quickly.

Fuel may be under pressure and

spray out of the fuel filler neck,

especially in hot weather. If you

hear a hissing sound while you

are removing the cap, wait for the

sound to stop and then slowly

open the cap to prevent fuel from

spraying out and creating a fire

hazard.

6. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

7. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add

any more fuel.

8. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-

wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be

certain not to catch the tether under the

cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

9. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

309

Starting and Operating

(312,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel

may damage the paint, be sure to

wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.

Paint damage caused by spilled fuel

is not covered under the SUBARU

Limited Warranty.

NOTE

. You will see the “

” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel

filler lid is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to

“CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/

Malfunction Indicator Light” �P161.

. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one

of the operations below. However if

these operations are performed

when the fuel filler lid is open, the

fuel filler lid will not lock when it is

subsequently closed.

– Press the “

” button on the key

fob.

– Press the lock side of the power

door locking switch.

. When the doors are locked or un-

locked using the automatic door

lock system, the fuel filler lid will be

locked or unlocked at the same time.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could oc-

cur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting and your fuel tank

and emission control system

may be damaged. It could also

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank could

cause damage to the engine.

Continuing to operate your vehi-

cle at an extremely low fuel level

may result in a reduction of

engine performance.

! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened

s07aa0203

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to

a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be

opened from the cargo area.

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch. Remove the access cover at

the right-side of the cargo area trim

Fuel

310

(313,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

using a flat-head screwdriver.

1 Clip

2. Remove the clip from the trim.

3. Pull the clip to unlock the fuel filler lid.

7-2. State Emission Testing

(U.S. Only)

s07ab

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer

when testing an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must

NEVER be performed on a single

two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in uncon-

trolled vehicle movement and may

cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your inspection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspection

of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/

malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an

examination of the OBDII system with

an electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is

– CONTINUED –

State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)

311

Starting and Operating

(314,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

observed, there are no stored diagnos-

tic trouble codes, and the OBDII readi-

ness monitors are all complete.

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is

not properly operating (light is illumi-

nated or is not working due to faulty

LED (Light Emitting Diode)) or there is

one or more diagnostic trouble codes

stored in the vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number

of OBDII system readiness monitors

“NOT READY” is greater than one. If

the vehicle’s battery has been recently

replaced or disconnected, the OBDII

system inspection may indicate that the

vehicle is not ready for the emission

test. Under this condition, the vehicle

driver should be instructed to drive his/

her vehicle for a few days to reset the

readiness monitors and return for an

emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer

for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected in

an attempt to bypass AWD for state

emission testing. An AWD vehicle must

be tested using an AWD dynamometer

with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

7-3. Preparing to Drive

s07ac

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that no small animals enter the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside and

outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seat-

belts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

Preparing to Drive

312

(315,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and drive belt may result in a

malfunction. Check that no small

animal enters the engine compart-

ment and under the vehicle before

starting the engine.

NOTE

. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake

fluid, washer fluid and other fluid

levels should be checked daily,

weekly or at fuel stops.

. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-

ler Hitch (Dealer Option)” �P412.

7-4. Starting and Stopping

the Engine (Models without

Push-Button Ignition Switch)

s07bd

& General Precautions When

Starting/Stopping Engine

s07bd06

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out-

side the vehicle (except when

using the remote engine start

system). It may result in an acci-

dent.

. Do not leave the engine running

in locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors.

The exhaust gas may enter the

vehicle or indoors, and it may

result in carbon monoxide poi-

soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flammable

substances. The exhaust pipe

and exhaust emissions can cre-

ate a fire hazard at high tempera-

tures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during

driving, the catalyst may over-

heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine

start system).

NOTE

. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration

immediately after the engine has

started.

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel used and the driving condition

(repeated short trips when the en-

gine is not warmed up sufficiently).

In such a case, it is recommended to

switch to a different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine

when the accelerator is operated

rapidly such as a rapid start-up and

a rapid acceleration. This is not a

malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and

– CONTINUED –

Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)

313

Starting and Operating

(316,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

rear window defogger are turned off.

& Starting Engine

s07bd01

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine starter

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the engine starter for 5 to

10 seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

NOTE

. It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for main-

tenance or other purposes). This

difficulty is caused by the electro-

nically controlled throttle’s self-di-

agnosis function. To overcome it,

keep the ignition switch in the “ON”

position for approximately 10 sec-

onds before starting the engine.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

engine starter is cranking.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the select lever of a

moving vehicle into the “P” position.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position). The

engine starter will only operate when

the select lever is at the “P” or “N”

position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and Indicator Lights” �P156.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accel-

erator pedal. Release the key immedi-

ately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, perform the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at

least 10 seconds. After checking

that the parking brake is applied,

turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while depressing

the accelerator pedal slightly (ap-

proximately a quarter of the full

stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at

least 10 seconds. Then fully de-

press the accelerator pedal and

turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position. If the engine

starts, quickly release the accel-

erator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the

“LOCK” position. After waiting for

10 seconds or longer, turn the

ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine

has started. The fuel injection system

automatically lowers the idle speed as

the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure

that the select lever is at the “P” or “N”

position and that the parking brake is

applied.

Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)

314

(317,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Stopping the Engine

s07bd02

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK” position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK/

OFF” position.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

& Steering Lock

s07bd07

After stopping the engine and the key is

removed from ignition switch, the steering

wheel will be locked due to the steering

lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

s07bd0701

When you cannot unlock the steering

wheel, perform the following steps.

1. Check that the parking brake is ap-

plied.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while turning the steering

wheel left and right.

If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by

doing the steps, consult your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

7-5. Starting and Stopping

Engine (Models with Push-

Button Start System)

s07be

& Safety Precautions

s07be06

Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P109.

& Operating Range for Push-

Button Start System

s07be01

Refer to “Operating Range for Push-

Button Start System” �P150.

& Starting Engine

s07be03

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General Precau-

tions When Starting/Stopping

Engine” �P313.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch flashes in

green after the engine has

started, never drive the vehicle.

The steering is still locked, and it

may result in an accident.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

315

Starting and Operating

(318,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be a

malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch is flashing in

green after the engine has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. While moving the

steering wheel right and left,

depress the brake pedal, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

. Do not continue pressing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop press-

ing the push-button ignition

switch. Instead, press the push-

button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to

switch the power status to

“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then

press the push-button ignition

switch to start the engine.

NOTE

. When pressing the push-button igni-

tion switch while depressing the

brake pedal:

– The engine starter operates for a

maximum of 10 seconds and after

starting the engine, the engine

starter stops automatically.

– The engine can be started regard-

less of the power status.

. If the engine does not start, check

the security indicator light. Then

press the push-button ignition

switch without depressing the brake

pedal to switch the power to “OFF”.

– If the light had illuminated, try to

start the engine again.

– If the light had been off, press the

push-button ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal more

forcefully.

. The engine start procedures may not

function depending on the radio

wave conditions around the vehicle.

In such a case, refer to “Starting

Engine” �P442.

. If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the steering cannot be unlocked.

Charge the battery.

. It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for main-

tenance or other purposes). This

difficulty is caused by the electro-

nically controlled throttle’s self-di-

agnosis function. To overcome it,

keep the ignition switch in the “ON”

position for approximately 10 sec-

onds before starting the engine.

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

engine starter is cranking.

1 Operation indicator

2 Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the brake pedal,

the engine will start. The starting proce-

dure for the engine is as follows.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

316

(319,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2. Make sure the parking brake is ap-

plied.

3. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”

position. The engine can also start

when the select lever is in the “N”

position, however, for safety reasons,

start in the “P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When

starting with the select lever in the “N”

position, the indicator does not turn

green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

While pressing the select lever button

in, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

& Stopping Engine

s07be04

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will

be switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the engine will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater force

will be required to steer, and it

may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place, and contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position, the power

will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is

left in this condition, the battery

may be discharged.

NOTE

. If you press the push-button ignition

switch while driving, the emergency

engine stop interrupt screen alerts

the driver by messages on the

combination meter display (color

LCD) and beeps.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

317

Starting and Operating

(320,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine dur-

ing driving except in an emergency.

& When Access Key Fob Does

Not Operate Properly

s07be05

Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key

Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P441.

& Steering Lock

s07be07

After stopping the engine and any door is

opened, the steering wheel will be locked

due to the steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

s07be0701

1 Operation indicator

2 Push-button ignition switch

When you cannot restart the engine due to

the steering lock, check the status of

operation indicator and perform the follow-

ing steps.

! Operation indicator flashing in

green

s07be070101

1. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

while turning the steering wheel left

and right.

! Operation indicator flashing in

orange

s07be070102

There may be a malfunction in the steering

lock function. Immediately contact your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

318

(321,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-6. Remote Engine Start

System (Dealer Option)

s07az

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General Precau-

tions When Starting/Stopping

Engine” �P313.

. Do not remote start a vehicle in an

enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a motor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of carbon monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you

to start the engine from outside the vehicle.

In addition, the remote engine start system

can activate the heater or air conditioner,

providing you with a comfortable cabin

upon entry. For more details, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-

mote engine start system.

NOTE

. The length of time for which it is

acceptable to allow the engine to

remain idling may be bound by local

laws and regulations. Check the

local rules when using the remote

engine start system.

. When taking your vehicle in for

service, it is recommended that you

inform the service personnel that

your vehicle is equipped with a

remote engine start system.

& Remote Engine Starter

Transceiver (Fob)

s07az21

1 Fob button

! Starting the engine

s07az2101

NOTE

All vehicle doors and the engine hood

must be closed prior to activating the

remote engine start system. Any open

entry point will prevent starting or

cause the engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the fob button on your

remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

operating range of the system and the start

request is received, the following will

occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps once.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all

conditions are met, the engine will start

within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,

the following will occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps twice.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote

engine start system, the following will

– CONTINUED –

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

319

Starting and Operating

(322,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

occur.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights remain illuminated.

. The fob button flashes once every 3

seconds.

. The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start

(or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional

times. The system will not attempt to

restart the engine if it determines a vehicle

malfunction is preventing starting. If the

engine does not start after 3 additional

attempts, the remote engine start request

will be aborted.

! Stopping the engine

s07az2102

Press and hold the fob button for at least 2

seconds to stop the engine. The fob will

flash and beep three times, indicating the

engine has stopped. If the stop request is

not received (for example, if the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds.

The system will automatically stop the

engine after 15 minutes.

! Remote start safety features

s07az2103

For safety and security reasons, the

remote engine start system will prevent

starting (or stop the engine if running) and

sound the horn twice if any of the following

conditions is detected. In addition, the fob

will flash and beep 3 times.

. The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. A key is in the ignition switch.

. The engine hood is open.

. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

rpm.

. The security alarm is triggered.

. The select lever is not in the “P”

position.

If the system detects any door open during

operation, it will prevent starting or stop the

engine, and sound the horn and flash side

marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights

6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the

vehicle’s engine management system

determines there is a safety risk due to a

vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will

power down and the horn will sound 3

times.

NOTE

. If the alarm system is armed at the

time of remote engine starter activa-

tion (the security indicator light on

the combination meter is flashing),

the alarm system will remain armed

throughout the remote start run

cycle.

. If the alarm system is disarmed at

the time of remote engine starter

activation (the security indicator

light on the combination meter is

not flashing), the alarm system will

remain disarmed throughout the

remote start run cycle.

! Remote start operation - fob con-

firmation

s07az2104

Your remote engine starter fob is a

bidirectional transceiver that can confirm

system operation with several different

visual and audible indications. The fob’s

LED-backlit button and internal piezo

buzzer will indicate the status of the

system using the following the flash and

beep sequences, provided the fob is within

operational range of the system.

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

320

(323,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Precondition

Fob Indication

Meaning

Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed

Continuous while button is

held down

— The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob

button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started

Engine idling by remote engine start operation

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps

Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety

reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and

holding fob button for at least 2 sec

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec —

Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

– CONTINUED –

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

321

Starting and Operating

(324,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Alternate Operation Method

for Models with “Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System”

s07az22

Access key fob

1 Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the

remote engine start transmitter. Operate

the lock button to start or stop the engine

as follows.

! Before starting the engine

s07az2201

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. All doors are closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position.

! Starting the engine

s07az2202

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash

once and the buzzer chirps once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button

briefly again. The hazard warning

flashers then flash once again, and

the buzzer chirps once again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard

warning flashers then flash three

times, and the horn will honk once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine will

then start successfully.

! Stopping the engine

s07az2203

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

! Remote start safety features

s07az2204

For detailed information, refer to “Remote

start safety features” �P320.

& Entering the Vehicle While It

Is Running via Remote Start

(Models without “Keyless

Access with Push-Button

Start System”)

s07az03

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of

the following procedures to disarm the

alarm system. Refer to “Alarm System”

�P133.

– Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn it to the “ON”

position.

– Press any button on the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut

down when any door is opened.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “START” position to

restart the engine.

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

322

(325,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Entering the Vehicle While It

Is Running via Remote Start

(Models with “Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System”)

s07az24

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function and remote

keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of

the following procedures to disarm the

alarm system. Refer to “Alarm System”

�P133.

– Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

– Press any button on the access

key fob.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will

remain running provided the access

key fob is present and detected by the

vehicle.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

once while depressing the brake pedal

before driving your vehicle. The remote

engine starter transceiver (fob) will

flash and beep 3 times to indicate that

the remote start system has been shut

down.

& Entering the Vehicle Follow-

ing Remote Engine Start

Shutdown

s07az10

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the remote keyless entry

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

& Pre-heating or Pre-cooling

the Interior of the Vehicle

s07az04

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting and

operation. After the system starts the

engine, the heater or air conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

& Remote Transmitter Program

(Remote Engine Starter

Transceiver)

s07az13

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are

desired (the system will accept up to eight

transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain open throughout the

entire process).

2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, then back to “ON”

again and leave the ignition “ON”

throughout the programming process.

4. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn three times, indicating

that the system has entered the trans-

mitter learn mode.

5. Press and release the “

” button on

the transmitter that you want to pro-

gram.

6. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that

the system has learned the transmitter.

Upon successful programming, the

remote start confirmation transmitter

button will flash one time.

7. Repeat step 5 for any additional

transmitters (the system will accept

up to eight transmitters).

– CONTINUED –

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

323

Starting and Operating

(326,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

8. The system will exit the transmitter

learn mode if the key is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is

closed or after 2 minutes.

& System Maintenance

s07az09

NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver:

In the event that the vehicle’s battery is

replaced, discharged or disconnected,

it will be necessary to start the vehicle a

minimum of one time using the key

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. This is required to allow

the vehicle electronic systems to re-

synchronize.

! Changing the battery

s07az0901

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the remote engine start

transmitter when replacing the

battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the re-

mote engine start transmitter

when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if

an incorrect replacement battery

is used. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of bat-

tery.

. Battery should not be exposed to

excessive heat such as sunshine,

fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing Battery of Access Key Fob”

�P497.

For remote engine starter transceiver:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)

supplied in your remote engine start

transmitter should last approximately one

year, depending on usage. When the

battery begins to weaken, you will notice

a decrease in range (distance from the

vehicle that your remote control operates).

Follow the instructions below to change

the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-

cated on the back side lower left corner

of the transmitter.

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small

flat-head screwdriver.

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

324

(327,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove

the battery and replace with new one.

Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the

old battery before removing it to ensure

that the new battery is inserted prop-

erly (battery “+” should be pointed

away from the transmitter circuit board

on battery).

4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw

and test the remote engine start

system.

& Certification for Remote En-

gine Starter

s07az23

! U.S.-spec. models

s07az2301

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

! Canada-spec. models

s07az2302

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

325

Starting and Operating

(328,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-7. Continuously Variable

Transmission

s07bg

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to lurch forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Observe the following precau-

tions. Failure to observe these

precautions could cause damage

to the transmission.

– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-

tion only after the vehicle has

completely stopped.

– Do not shift from the “D”

position into the “R” position

or vice versa until the vehicle

has completely stopped.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is applied or

when chocks are used in the

wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Never move the vehicle rearward

by inertia with the select lever set

in a forward driving position or

move the vehicle forward by

inertia with the select lever set

in the “R” position. Doing so may

result in an unexpected accident

or malfunction.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for a

long time with the select lever in

any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

& Continuously Variable Trans-

mission Features

s07bg06

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. For some models, it also

has a manual mode or an “L” position.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, the transmission will

shift at higher engine speeds than

when the coolant temperature is

sufficiently high in order to shorten

the warm-up time and improve dri-

veability. The gearshift timing will

automatically shift to the normal

timing after the engine has warmed

up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalida-

tion of data which the on-board

computer has collected and stored

in memory to allow the transmission

to shift at the most appropriate times

for the current condition of your

vehicle. Optimized shifting will be

restored as the vehicle continues to

be driven for a while.

. When driving under continuous hea-

vy load conditions such as climbing

a long, steep hill, the engine speed,

vehicle speed and air conditioning

system cooling performance may

automatically be reduced. This is

not a malfunction. This phenomenon

results from the engine control func-

tion maintaining the cooling perfor-

mance of the vehicle. The engine

and vehicle speed will return to a

normal speed when the engine is

able to maintain the optimum cool-

ing performance after the heavy load

decreases. Driving under a heavy

load must be performed with ex-

Continuously Variable Transmission

326

(329,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

treme care.

. The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that

provides superior transmission effi-

ciency for maximum fuel economy.

At times, depending on varying

driving conditions, a chain operat-

ing noise may be heard that is

characteristic of this type of system.

. Place the shift boot to the original

position after it is lifted. If the select

lever is operated with the shift boot

in the rolled up position, the shift

boot may have tension and it may

disturb the select lever operation.

& Select Lever

s07bg01

1 Select lever button

1 Models with “L” position

2 Models with manual mode

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button in

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and also has an “L” or “M”

gate.

NOTE

. For some models, to protect the

engine while the select lever is in

the “P” or “N” position, the engine is

controlled so that the engine speed

may not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

. When you change the select lever

position, make sure to move the

select lever firmly to the selected

position.

! P (Park)

s07bg0101

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the “P” to any

other position, you should depress the

brake pedal fully then move the select

lever. This prevents the vehicle from

lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

s07bg0102

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “ACC” position, the movement of the

select lever from the “N” to “R” position is

only possible by depressing the brake

pedal. For details, refer to “Shift Lock

– CONTINUED –

Continuously Variable Transmission

327

Starting and Operating

(330,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Function” �P328.

! N (Neutral)

s07bg0103

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission is

neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

! D (Drive)

s07bg0104

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration you

require. Also, while driving up and down a

hill, the transmission assists and controls

the driving performance and engine brak-

ing while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in “D”

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift.

In this case, the transmission will operate

like a conventional automatic transmis-

sion. When you release the pedal, the

transmission will return to the original gear

position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the

steering wheel is operated while driving in

the “D” position, the transmission will

temporarily switch to the manual mode.

In this mode, you can shift to any gear

position using the shift paddles. For details

about the manual mode, refer to “Selection

of Manual Mode” �P330. Once the

vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission

will switch from the manual mode back to

the “D” position for normal driving.

! While climbing a grade

s07bg010401

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is

prevented from taking place when the

accelerator is released. This minimizes

the chance of subsequent downshifting to

a lower gear when accelerating again. This

prevents repeated upshifting and down-

shifting resulting in a smoother operation

of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift, de-

pending on the way the accelerator

pedal is depressed to accelerate the

vehicle again.

& Shift Lock Function

s07bg04

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P” position to any other position

before the brake pedal is depressed.

Depress the brake pedal first, and then

operate the select lever.

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the key from the “ACC” position to the

“LOCK” position and remove the key

from the ignition key cylinder (models

without “keyless access with push-

button start system”).

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the push-button ignition switch to the

“OFF” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“ACC” position while the select lever is

in the “N” position, the select lever may

Continuously Variable Transmission

328

(331,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

not be moved to the “P” position without

depressing the brake pedal and press-

ing the select lever button.

! Shift lock release

s07bg0401

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position, then move the select lever to

the “P” position with the select lever button

pressed and the brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, check

and confirm the following and release the

shift lock accordingly.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P” to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion” �P329.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:

Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”

position, then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

If the select lever still does not move, refer

to “Shift lock release using the shift lock

release portion” �P329.

If the shift lock cannot be released without

using the shift lock release button in the

above cases, there may be a malfunction

in the shift lock system or the vehicle

control system.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion as soon as possible.

! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion

s07bg0402

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and stop the

engine.

1 Slit

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver

into the two slits and then lift upward.

3. Remove the center tray or wireless

charger (if equipped).

4. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the shift lock release portion,

and then move the select lever.

– CONTINUED –

Continuously Variable Transmission

329

Starting and Operating

(332,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as

soon as possible.

& Selection of Manual Mode (If

Equipped)

s07bg02

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select the

manual mode.

1 Upshift indicator

2 Downshift indicator

3 Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter illuminate. The gear

position indicator shows the currently

selected gear in the 1st-to-8th gear range.

The upshift and downshift indicators show

when a gearshift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “

” is on, upshifting is

possible. When the downshift indicator

“

” is on, downshifting is possible. When

both indicators are on, upshifting and

downshifting are both possible. When the

vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “−”

indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D” position from the “M”

position. While driving with the select lever

in the “D” position, if you change gears by

operating the shift paddle, the gear posi-

tion indicator illuminates and shows the

current gear condition.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on the

shift paddles. Doing so may result in

Continuously Variable Transmission

330

(333,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when the

engine speed is too high, i.e., when a

downshift would push the tach-

ometer needle beyond the red zone,

beeps will be emitted to warn you

that the downshift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the trans-

mission will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operat-

ing the shift paddle twice in rapid

succession.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the transmis-

sion fluid becomes too high, the AT

OIL TEMP warning light will illumi-

nate. Immediately stop the vehicle in

a safe place and let the engine idle

until the warning light turns off.

& Selection of “L” (If Equipped)

s07bg03

“L” is for using engine braking when going

down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move

the select lever from the “D” position to the

“L” position.

When selected, the indicator “L” will

illuminate on the combination meter.

To deselect “L”, move the select lever to

the “D” position.

& Driving Tips

s07bg05

NOTE

If the accelerator and brake pedals are

depressed at the same time, driving

torque may be restrained. This is not a

malfunction.

. On a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull

away from a standstill safely and easily

by first selecting the 2nd gear of the

manual mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Make sure to apply the parking brake

when parking your vehicle. Do not hold

the vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D” position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly accel-

erates or rapidly pulls away from a

standstill. This phenomenon does not

indicate a malfunction.

Continuously Variable Transmission

331

Starting and Operating

(334,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-8. SI-DRIVE

s07bc

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)

works to maximize engine performance,

control and efficiency.

This system consists of the following

modes:

. Intelligent (I) mode

. Sport (S) mode

Intelligent (I) mode is selected when the

push-button ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position. By adjusting the SI-DRIVE

switch, the character of the power unit

changes.

& Intelligent (I) Mode

s07bc02

! For smooth, efficient performance

driving

s07bc0201

The linear acceleration characteristic of

the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal

driving usage.

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-

balanced performance with greater fuel

efficiency and smooth driveability without

stress. Power delivery is moderate during

acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

This is ideal for around-town driving and

situations that do not require full power

output. It provides better control in difficult

driving conditions, such as slippery roads

or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle

response.

& Sport (S) Mode

s07bc03

! For all-around performance driving

s07bc0301

The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

power desired by those who want to make

the driving experience their own personal

adventure.

& SI-DRIVE Switch

s07bc01

NOTE

. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators

blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer.

. The default mode of the SI-DRIVE

system is the Intelligent (I) mode.

Once you turn off the engine, the

previous setting mode is canceled

and the SI-DRIVE system returns to

SI-DRIVE

332

(335,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

the Intelligent (I) mode the next time

you turn on the engine.

. While the engine is running, if the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light illuminates,

the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the

Intelligent (I) mode. In this case, it is

not possible to change to another

mode.

SI-DRIVE switch

To select the intelligent (I) mode, press the

“I” side of the switch. To select the Sport

(S) mode, press the “S” side of the switch.

7-9. Power Steering

s07aj

Power steering warning light

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

power steering warning light on the com-

bination meter illuminates to inform the

driver that the warning system is function-

ing properly. Then, if the engine started,

the warning light turns off to inform the

driver that the steering power assist is

operational.

CAUTION

While the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely

low speeds, such as while frequently

turning the steering wheel during

parallel parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long

period of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However, this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

– CONTINUED –

Power Steering

333

Starting and Operating

(336,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

this may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

7-10. Braking

s07ak

& Braking Tips

s07ak01

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads.

! When the brakes get wet

s07ak0101

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

s07ak0102

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To help

prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get

stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

s07ak0103

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake System

s07ak02

! Two separate circuits

s07ak0201

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake

system. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Electronic brake booster

s07ak0207

The vehicle is equipped with an electronic

brake booster to provide additional braking

force. Do not turn off the ignition switch

while driving because that will turn off the

brake booster, resulting in poor braking

power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, you will have

to depress the pedal much harder than

during normal braking, and the braking

distance will increase.

Braking

334

(337,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

When the following operations are

performed, an operating sound from

the electronic brake boost control

module may be heard. This is not a

malfunction.

. The brake pedal was operated.

. The driver’s door was opened.

. The EyeSight function was acti-

vated.

. Several minutes have passed after

the engine stopped.

! Supplemental booster function

when pressure fails

s07ak020701

If there is a malfunction in the braking

system, the power for the braking will be

stored by controlling the hydraulic pres-

sure of the VDC system.

When the brake pedal is depressed while

the supplemental booster function is oper-

ating, an operation sound and brake pedal

vibration may be generated.

! Brake assist system

s07ak0203

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following

phenomena occur. However, even

though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal is

applied by lighter force and gener-

ates a greater braking force.

. You might hear the sound of ABS

operating from the engine compart-

ment.

& Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning

Indicators

s07ak03

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle inspected by

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

Braking

335

Starting and Operating

(338,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake

System)

s07al

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with an ABS equipped

vehicle could easily lead to a serious

accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy road, or

over newly fallen snow, stopping

distances may be longer for a

vehicle with the ABS than one

without. When driving under

these conditions, therefore, re-

duce your speed and leave ample

distance from other vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when the

ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

& ABS Self-Check

s07al01

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating noise of the

ABS from the engine compartment just

after the vehicle is started. This is caused

by an automatic functional test of the ABS

being carried out and does not indicate any

abnormal condition.

& ABS Warning Light

s07al02

Refer to “ABS Warning Light” �P164.

7-12. Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) System

s07am

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of the

braking force. It functions by adjusting the

distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

function fails, the EBD system also stops

working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)

336

(339,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& EBD System Malfunctions

s07am01

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the following

warning lights illuminate simultaneously.

. Brake system warning light

. ABS warning light

. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If all of the warning lights remain on even

though the parking brake is released, the

brake fluid level may be low or there could

be a problem with the EBD system. Park

the vehicle in a safe place immediately and

contact a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol System

s07an

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics

Control system equipped vehicle

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

traveled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Dynamics Control System

337

Starting and Operating

(340,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle equipped with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, have

an inspection of that system

performed by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly.

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

tire inflation pressure label

attached to the driver’s side

door pillar.

– When replacing a flat tire, use

only the specified temporary

spare tire. However, even with

the specified temporary spare

tire, the effectiveness of the

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system will be reduced.

. If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating noise from the en-

gine compartment is heard

briefly when starting the engine

and when driving off after start-

ing the engine.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

engine.

. In the following circumstances, the

vehicle may be less stable than it

feels to the driver. The Vehicle

Dynamics Control System may

therefore operate. Such operation

does not indicate a system malfunc-

tion.

– On gravel-covered or rutted

roads

– On unfinished roads

– When the vehicle is towing a

trailer

Vehicle Dynamics Control System

338

(341,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

– When the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation

of the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for nor-

mal conditions.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if the vehicle is equipped with

Vehicle Dynamics Control.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so

may render the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system unable to operate

correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

System Monitor

s07an01

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control Warn-

ing Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Op-

eration Indicator Light” �P169 and “Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light”

�P170.

& To Turn On/Off the Vehicle

Dynamics Control System

s07an07

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Car settings” �P203

(11.6-inch display models) or “Vehicle

setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by

deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system temporarily may help to escape

from the following situations. Turn the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when

necessary.

. A standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. Extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system during engine operation,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light on the combination meter illumi-

nates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control

system will be deactivated. When “Vehicle

Dynamics Control” has been touched

again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator light turns off.

You should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

the above-mentioned situations.

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem helps prevent unstable vehicle

motion such as skidding using con-

trol of the brakes and engine power.

Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system unless it is abso-

lutely necessary. If you must turn off

the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem, drive very carefully based on

the road surface condition.

NOTE

. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”

has been touched to deactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem automatically reactivates itself

the next time the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” position and the

engine is restarted.

. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”

has been touched to deactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

the vehicle’s running performance is

comparable with that of a vehicle

that does not have a Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system except when absolutely

necessary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is deactivated, com-

ponents of the brake control system

may still activate. When the brake

control system is activated, the

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Dynamics Control System

339

Starting and Operating

(342,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light flashes.

7-14. X-MODE

s07bi

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with X-MODE could easily lead to

a serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with hill descent control function

could easily lead to a serious

accident. Be especially careful,

and depress the brake pedal if

necessary when driving on ex-

tremely steep downhill, frozen,

muddy or sandy roads. Failure

to control the vehicle’s speed

may cause a loss of control and

result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with X-MODE, winter tires should

be used when driving on snow-

covered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having

X-MODE does not guarantee that

the vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activate X-MODE when you en-

counter a very slippery surface at

low speed. However, having

X-MODE is no guarantee that full

vehicle control will be maintained

at all times and under all condi-

tions. When activating X-MODE,

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle, have the system in-

spected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. Observe the following precau-

tions in order to ensure that

X-MODE is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

label attached to the vehicle’s

door pillar.

X-MODE

340

(343,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

– Use only the special tempor-

ary spare tire to replace a flat

tire. With a normal temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness of

X-MODE is reduced and this

should be taken into account

when driving the vehicle in

such a condition.

. If the hill descent control function

has operated continuously for a

long time, the temperature of the

brake disc may increase and the

hill descent control function may

be temporarily disabled. In this

case, the hill descent control

indicator light will disappear.

When the hill descent control

indicator light disappears, the hill

descent control function is dis-

abled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system

of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, etc. for driving with bad

road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can

drive more comfortably even in slippery

road conditions including uphill and down-

hill.

X-MODE has the following functions.

. Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function, you

can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed

driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is

likely to increase, the brake control system

will be activated to adjust the vehicle

speed.

. Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing

ability and driving ability as well as

enabling smooth application of torque for

easier control of the steering wheel.

& To Activate/Deactivate

X-MODE

s07bi01

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)

1 X-MODE indicator

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)

1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator

2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

To activate or deactivate X-MODE, oper-

ate the center information display. Refer to

“Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch display

models) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P221

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

NOTE

. Even if you try to activate X-MODE

when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20

km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be

activated. At this time, a buzzer will

sound twice.

. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph

(40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is

activated, a buzzer will sound once

and X-MODE will be deactivated.

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE

341

Starting and Operating

(344,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

X-MODE will automatically reacti-

vate when the vehicle speed drops

below 22 mph (35 km/h).

– When you use the cruise control

after X-MODE is automatically

deactivated, X-MODE will not be

automatically reactivated when

the vehicle speed drops below

22 mph (35 km/h).

. While the engine is running, if any of

the following conditions is met,

X-MODE will be deactivated. In this

case, it is not possible to activate

X-MODE. Also, the SI-DRIVE mode

will change to the Intelligent (I) mode

and it will not be possible to change

to the other modes.

– The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/Malfunction indicator light

illuminates.

– The AT OIL TEMP warning light

flashes.

– The ABS warning light illumi-

nates.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light illuminates.

. The Auto Start Stop system will be

stopped while X-MODE is activated.

. If there is a possibility that the

engine could overheat because of a

temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it is not possible to activate

X-MODE. Even while X-MODE is

activated, X-MODE will be deacti-

vated when the engine coolant tem-

perature increases. In this case, the

SI-DRIVE mode will change to the

Intelligent (I) mode.

. The SI-DRIVE mode will not be

affected even if the SI-DRIVE switch

is pressed while X-MODE is acti-

vated. At this time, the buzzer will

sound twice.

Models with 2 modes:

. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving

on a snow-covered road where the

points of contact between the tires

and road surface are visible, or for

driving on an unpaved road.

. DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for

driving on a road covered with deep

snow where the points of contact

between the tires and road surface

are not visible, or for driving on a

muddy road.

& Hill Descent Control Function

s07bi03

The hill descent control function will be in

standby mode when X-MODE is activated

and the vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill des-

cent control function may not be

sufficient when strong braking

power is needed (e.g., when towing

a trailer).

NOTE

. Even while the hill descent control

function is operating, you can vary

the vehicle speed using the brake

pedal or accelerator pedal.

. During braking by the hill descent

control function, the stop lights will

illuminate.

X-MODE

342

(345,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient

of the road.

. The hill descent control function

may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– An operating sound is heard

briefly from the engine compart-

ment while the hill descent con-

trol function is operating.

– The sensation of depressing the

brake pedal is different, (harder

than usual etc.) when the brake

pedal is depressed during hill

descent control function opera-

tion.

! Hill descent control indicator light

s07bi0301

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in the standby

mode. It flashes while the function is

operating. It will disappear when the

function is in the disabled mode. When

this function is changed from operational

to non-operational, it will disappear when

the vehicle speed reaches more than

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

7-15. Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS) (U.S.-

Spec. Models)

s07ao

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message by

sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this

system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a sharp

object).

– CONTINUED –

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

343

Starting and Operating

(346,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire inflation

pressure label on the door

pillar on the driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. Refer

to “Tires and Wheels” �P474.

The tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem does not function when the

vehicle is stationary. After adjust-

ing the tire pressures, increase

the vehicle speed to at least 20

mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS

rechecking of the tire inflation

pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should

turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P429.

. When a replacement tire is

mounted or a wheel rim is re-

placed without the original pres-

sure sensor/transmitter being

transferred, the low tire pressure

warning light will illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This

may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the tire pressure monitor-

ing system will not function prop-

erly.

& Certification for Tire Pressure

Monitoring System

s07ao01

! U.S.-spec. models

s07ao0101

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

344

(347,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

& TPMS Screen

s07ao05

This screen displays each tire pressure.

Refer to “Basic Screens” �P185.

7-16. Parking Your Vehicle

s07ap

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If engine

exhaust gas enters the passen-

ger compartment, occupants in

the vehicle could die from carbon

monoxide (CO) contained in the

exhaust gas.

& Electronic Parking Brake

s07ap03

1 Electronic parking brake switch

2 Indicator light

3 Release the electronic parking brake

4 Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, make

sure that you turn off the engine.

Otherwise, the parking brake may

be released and an accident may

occur.

. If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunc-

tioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in a safe location, use tire

stops under the tires to prevent

– CONTINUED –

Parking Your Vehicle

345

Starting and Operating

(348,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

the vehicle from moving and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

. If the electronic parking brake is

operated under the following

conditions, the electronic park-

ing brake indicator light may

flash.

– The brake is overheated.

– The vehicle is on a steep

slope.

In such cases, the vehicle may

start to move which may lead to

an accident. Always use the tire

stops.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parking

brake cannot be applied due to a

malfunction, contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for

an inspection. If you have to park

your vehicle in such conditions,

perform the following procedure.

– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.

– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position. When the select le-

ver cannot be shifted into the

“P” position, you must release

shift lock. Refer to “Shift Lock

Function” �P328.

– Use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

. Never drive with the parking

brake applied. Doing so will

cause unnecessary brake pad

wear. Before driving off, always

make sure that the parking brake

has been released and the brake

system warning light has turned

off.

. The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trai-

ler).

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

parking brake. You can apply/release the

parking brake by operating the parking

brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and

pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake

switch firmly while the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

Electronic parking brake indicator light

When the parking brake is applied while

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the following indicator lights illuminate.

. The indicator light on the parking brake

switch

. The electronic parking brake indicator

light on the combination meter (for

details, refer to “Electronic Parking

Brake Indicator Light” �P166.)

NOTE

. The parking brake will not be re-

leased under the following condi-

tions even if the parking brake

switch is pressed.

– The ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

Parking Your Vehicle

346

(349,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

– The brake pedal is not depressed.

. The electronic parking brake system

uses motors to apply the parking

brake. Therefore, operating sounds

from the motors will be heard when

applying or releasing the parking

brake. Make sure that the motor

sounds are heard when applying or

releasing the parking brake.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction or the

electronic parking brake operation

is prohibited temporarily, if the park-

ing brake switch is operated, a chirp

sound is heard and the electronic

parking brake indicator light flashes.

. When you cannot release the park-

ing brake due to, for example, a

system malfunction, contact your

SUBARU dealer and have your

SUBARU dealer release the parking

brake.

. If the operation of the electronic

parking brake switch is stopped

midway or performed extremely

slowly, the system may detect an

error and turn on the brake system

warning light. However, this does

not indicate a malfunction if the

warning light turns off after operat-

ing the switch.

. When the electronic parking brake

has not been used for a long period

of time, the electronic parking brake

may operate automatically after the

ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. This oc-

curs due to checking the proper

operation of the electronic parking

brake and does not indicate a mal-

function.

. If the electronic parking brake

switch is malfunctioning and the

electronic parking brake cannot be

released, refer to the instructions

described in “Automatic release

function by accelerator pedal”

�P347.

. After activating the electronic park-

ing brake, you may hear a short

sound several minutes after the

electronic parking brake indicator

light and the indicator light on the

electronic parking brake switch illu-

minate as the system confirms prop-

er engagement. This sound is differ-

ent from the apply and release

sound.

This can occur:

– If the brakes are extremely hot.

– If the car is parked on a steep

incline.

– If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch is

turned OFF.

This is a normal operating sound

under any of these conditions.

. The Auto Start Stop system is deac-

tivated while the electronic parking

brake is applied.

. If you operate the electronic parking

brake switch while the Auto Start

Stop system is activated, the Auto

Start Stop system will be deacti-

vated. The electronic parking brake

will activate after the engine is

restarted. After the electronic park-

ing brake indicator light is illumi-

nated, release your foot from the

brake pedal.

. When starting the engine or restart-

ing the engine using the Auto Start

Stop system, if you operate the

electronic parking brake switch, the

electronic parking brake indicator

light may flash temporarily. How-

ever, this is not a malfunction if the

light turns off after the electronic

parking brake is deactivated.

! Automatic release function by ac-

celerator pedal

s07ap0301

The electronic parking brake system has

an automatic release function. The parking

brake will be automatically released by

– CONTINUED –

Parking Your Vehicle

347

Starting and Operating

(350,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

depressing the accelerator pedal. How-

ever, the automatic release function does

not operate under the following conditions.

. Any door (other than the rear gate) is

open.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

If the parking brake is automatically

released, the electronic parking brake

indicator light and the indicator light on

the parking brake switch turn off.

NOTE

Even if you have applied the parking

brake, the parking brake will be auto-

matically released when the accelera-

tor pedal is depressed.

! Auto Vehicle Hold function

s07ap0305

The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-

matically keep the vehicle stopped even

after releasing the brake pedal when the

vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at

traffic signals.

WARNING

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function on a steep hill or slip-

pery road. The vehicle may move

even when using the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, causing serious

injury or accidents.

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function to park the vehicle. The

vehicle may move unexpectedly,

causing serious injury or acci-

dents. Make sure to shift the

select lever to the “P” position

and apply the electronic parking

brake in the following cases.

– When you are going to park

your vehicle.

– When passengers are getting

in or out of the vehicle.

– When you are loading or un-

. When using the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, do not release the

brake pedal before the Auto Ve-

hicle Hold indicator illuminates.

The vehicle may move unexpect-

edly, causing serious injury or

accidents.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function in the following cases.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move

unexpectedly, causing serious

injury or accidents.

– When washing your vehicle in

an automatic car wash

– When being towed

CAUTION

. When stopping on a steep slope

with the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion turned on, the electronic

parking brake may be automati-

cally applied. Then the electronic

parking brake indicator light will

flash. In such a case, depress and

hold the brake pedal while stop-

ping. Otherwise, the vehicle may

move.

. When being towed, turn off the

Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE

We recommend turning on the Auto

Vehicle Hold function when stopping

on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is turned off, the vehicle may

roll backward when driving off.

Parking Your Vehicle

348

(351,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function

s07ap030501

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Car settings” �P203

(11.6-inch display models) or “Vehicle

setting icons” �P221 (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

turned ON, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will turn on.

NOTE

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction while the

Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned

on, a chirp will sound, the Auto

Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn

off and the brake system warning

light will turn on.

. Every time when starting the engine,

the Auto Vehicle Hold function will

be set to “OFF”.

! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function

s07ap030503

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake

pedal when all of the following conditions

are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold

function will operate.

. Driver’s door is closed.

. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

While the vehicle is kept stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto

Vehicle Hold indicator light will flash.

! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold

function

s07ap030504

Perform any of the following operations to

release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

. Depress the accelerator pedal.

. Depress the brake pedal again.

. Apply the electronic parking brake.

. Shift the select lever to the “P” position

with the brake pedal pressed.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion operating with the center informa-

tion display while depressing the brake

pedal.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will change from flashing to illumi-

nated.

Under any of the following conditions, the

Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-

matically released and the electronic

parking brake will be automatically ap-

plied.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has

been in operation for 10 minutes.

. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.

. The ignition switch is turned to the

– CONTINUED –

Parking Your Vehicle

349

Starting and Operating

(352,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

. The vehicle is stopped on a steep

slope.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is

malfunctioning.

In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold

indicator light will turn off and the electronic

parking brake indicator light will illuminate.

! Tips

s07ap030505

. When the electronic parking brake is

automatically applied with the vehicle

kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, release the electronic parking

brake by either of the following opera-

tions before starting off. Then make

sure that the electronic parking brake

indicator light is off.

– Depress the accelerator pedal with

the driver’s seatbelt fastened and

with the doors closed.

– Press the electronic parking brake

switch with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

. Under certain conditions, including a

malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a

warning buzzer will sound and a warn-

ing message will appear on the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD). All

warning messages should be strictly

observed.

. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be

kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold

function. In such a case, depress and

hold the brake pedal.

. When stopping on a steep slope with

the Auto Vehicle Hold function acti-

vated, the electronic parking brake may

be automatically applied after stopping,

then the electronic parking brake in-

dicator light may flash. In such a case,

depress and hold the brake pedal while

stopped. Otherwise, the vehicle may

move. When getting out of the vehicle,

stop the vehicle on a flat surface, then

apply the electronic parking brake.

. If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

does not illuminates even after touch-

ing “Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” with the

operating conditions met, the function

may have a malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

. You may hear a sound while the Auto

Vehicle Hold function is keeping your

vehicle stopped. This is normal, and

does not represent a malfunction.

. When you depress the brake pedal to

release the Auto Vehicle Hold function,

an operation sound or vibration may be

generated, or the brake pedal may

return slowly. This is not a malfunction.

. While the vehicle is kept stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake

pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not

a malfunction.

. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, depress the brake pedal

firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold

may not operate.

! Emergency brake

s07ap0303

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in

case of an emergency. If the emer-

gency brake is excessively used, the

brake parts will wear down faster or

the brake may not work sufficiently

due to brake overheating.

NOTE

. While using the emergency brake,

the electronic parking brake indica-

tor light and the indicator light on the

parking brake switch illuminate and

a chirp sounds.

. While using the emergency brake, a

sound may be heard from the engine

compartment. This is the operating

sound of the brake that is activated

by the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, and does not indicate a

malfunction.

Parking Your Vehicle

350

(353,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can

stop the vehicle by pulling the parking

brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light and

the indicator light on the parking brake

switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

s07ap0304

CAUTION

If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in

the nearest safe location and con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system, the brake system

warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic

parking brake system warning” �P166.

& Parking Tips

s07ap02

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake.

. Place the select lever in the “P” (Park)

position.

Never rely on the transmission alone to

hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel as described here. When

the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front

wheels should be turned away from the

curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a bumper under

guard (optional), pay attention to

blocks and other obstructions on

the ground when parking. The un-

derspoiler could be damaged by

contact with them.

Parking Your Vehicle

351

Starting and Operating

(354,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-17. Hill Start Assist System

s07au

CAUTION

. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver

to START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents

when the vehicle is parked on a

slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the

parking brake, make sure that the

vehicle remains stationary when

the brake pedal is released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “OFF” position while the Hill

start assist system is operating.

The Hill start assist system will

deactivate, causing an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations

easier.

NOTE

. The Hill start assist system will

activate when the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is deactivated.

. The Hill start assist system will

deactivate when the Auto Vehicle

Hold function is activated.

1 Starting forward facing uphill

2 Starting backward facing downhill

A Brake pedal

In both these cases, the Hill start assist

system operates under the following con-

dition.

. When the vehicle has stopped with the

brake pedal depressed.

Braking power is maintained temporarily

(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill

start assist system after the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle in the same way as on a

level grade, just using the accelerator

pedal.

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal

is released, apply more braking power by

depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.

Hill Start Assist System

352

(355,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. When starting backward facing uphill

. When starting forward facing downhill

. While the parking brake is applied

. While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “OFF” position

. While the Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light is illuminated. Refer to

“Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning

Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Opera-

tion Indicator Light” �P169.

. While the Auto Start Stop warning light

is illuminated. Refer to “Auto Start Stop

Warning Light (Yellow)” �P177.

When using the Hill start assist system, a

braking effect may be felt even after the

brake pedal has been released.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start

assist system may not be sufficient

when strong braking power is

needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

7-18. Auto Start Stop System

s07bh

The Auto Start Stop system is designed to

automatically stop and restart the engine

when the vehicle is stationary for a short

period of time (while waiting for a traffic

light or in a traffic jam) after the engine has

warmed up. The system operates in order

to reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emis-

sions and undesired idling noise.

& System Operation

s07bh01

WARNING

Turn off the Auto Start Stop system

before towing the vehicle.

CAUTION

The Auto Start Stop system is de-

signed to automatically stop and

restart the engine for a short period

of time during idling. Do not use the

system when parking the vehicle

normally.

So that it can be used safely and comfor-

tably, in addition to driver operations, the

Auto Start Stop system is designed to

constantly monitor the vehicle conditions

– CONTINUED –

Auto Start Stop System

353

Starting and Operating

(356,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

as well as the environment inside and

outside the vehicle, in order to control

stopping and restarting of the engine.

After the vehicle has been completely

stopped by depressing the brake pedal

with the select lever in the “D” position, the

engine will be automatically stopped.

If you release the brake pedal with the

select lever kept in the “D” position, the

engine will be automatically restarted.

However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold

indicator light illuminates, the engine will

not restart.

Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)

If the engine is temporarily stopped by the

system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light

on the combination meter will illuminate in

green. This indicator light will turn off when

the system restarts the engine.

NOTE

. After starting the engine, if the

vehicle is left idling without being

driven, the Auto Start Stop system

will not operate.

. Your vehicle is equipped with a

special high-performance battery.

When replacing the vehicle battery,

be sure to replace it with a genuine

SUBARU battery (or equivalent) de-

signed specifically for use in a

vehicle equipped with the Auto Start

Stop system. For details, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

! Operational conditions

s07bh0105

The engine can be automatically stopped

by the Auto Start Stop system when all of

the following conditions are met.

. The engine is sufficiently warmed up.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The driver’s door is closed.

. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

. The CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is off.*

. The airflow mode selection is set to a

mode other than “

” mode.

. The rear window defogger is not in use.

. X-MODE has been turned off.

After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will

be automatically stopped when the follow-

ing conditions are met.

. The steering wheel is in the straight

ahead position.

. The steering wheel is not being oper-

ated.

*1: Even if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is illuminated, the

Auto Start Stop system may operate when

the system recovers from the malfunction.

NOTE

. After the vehicle is stopped, the

engine may not automatically stop

under the following conditions.

– The vehicle is stopped on a road

with a steep slope.

– The vehicle is stopped by hard

braking.

. After the vehicle is stopped, the

engine may not automatically stop

if the brake pedal is not fully de-

pressed. Make sure to depress the

brake pedal firmly when stopping

the vehicle.

. In the following cases, it may take

some time for the Auto Start Stop

system to operate.

– When the battery is discharged

because the vehicle has not been

Auto Start Stop System

354

(357,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

used for a long period of time,

etc.

– The coolant temperature is low.

– When the battery terminals have

been reconnected after replacing

the battery, etc.

! Non-operational conditions

s07bh0106

In any of the following cases, the Auto

Start Stop system will not operate.

. When the Auto Start Stop warning light/

Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light is

illuminating.

. When the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light is illumi-

nating.*

. The electronic parking brake is applied.

. When the engine hood is opened.

. When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently

warmed up.

. When the temperature of the CVT fluid

is abnormally high.

. When the vehicle battery is not in good

condition.

. When using the climate control system,

the temperature difference between the

setting temperature and the tempera-

ture inside the vehicle is significant.

. When using the climate control system,

the amount of air flow is significant.

*1: Even if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is illuminated, the

Auto Start Stop system may operate when

the system recovers from the malfunction.

NOTE

The Auto Start Stop system may not

operate in the following cases:

. The CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light or other

warning lights on the combination

meter are illuminated or flashing.

. You are driving the vehicle in a high-

elevation area.

! Engine restart operational condi-

tions

s07bh0107

In any one of the following cases, the

engine will be automatically restarted even

if the brake pedal is kept depressed.

. When slightly releasing the brake pedal

on road with a steep slope and the

vehicle begins rolling.

. When further depressing the brake

pedal.

. When depressing the accelerator ped-

al.

. When you move the select lever to the

“R” position.

. When turning the steering wheel.

. When operating the electronic parking

brake switch.

. When activating X-MODE.

. When the air flow mode selection set to

“

” mode.

. When the climate control system can

no longer maintain the set temperature.

. When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt.

. When opening the driver’s door.

. When activating the rear window de-

fogger.

. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

released, refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold

function” �P348.

! Engine restart non-operational

conditions

s07bh0108

WARNING

Do not open the engine hood when

the Auto Start Stop system is in

operation. It may cause the vehicle

to move while on a slope, the steer-

ing wheel operation may become

heavy, or the brakes may not work

well, which can create dangerous

conditions.

To ensure safety, the engine will not be

automatically restarted if the engine hood

is opened when the Auto Start Stop

system is in operation, even if the brake

– CONTINUED –

Auto Start Stop System

355

Starting and Operating

(358,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

pedal is released. In this case, check the

surrounding area and restart the engine by

normal operation.

Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold opera-

tion indicator light is illuminated, the

engine will not restart.

NOTE

. When the Auto Start Stop system is

in operation, the brake pedal may

feel stiff. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. When the battery is discharged, the

engine will be automatically re-

started even if you keep the brake

pedal depressed.

. In the following cases, the length of

time that the engine is temporarily

stopped by the Auto Start Stop

system may be shorter.

– When the climate control system

is in operation.

– When the outside temperature is

high, or when it is low (because

the climate control system can no

longer maintain the set tempera-

ture).

– When consumption of electricity

by electrical components is high.

. When the engine is automatically

restarted by the Auto Start Stop

system, the power provided via the

accessory power outlet will be re-

duced. Depending on the connected

appliance, the power of the appli-

ance may temporarily turn off.

! Auto Start Stop warning light

s07bh0109

Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)

The Auto Start Stop warning light will

illuminate in yellow when initially turning

the ignition switch to the “ON” position. The

light will turn off after the engine has

started.

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning light

does not turn off after the engine has

started, the Auto Start Stop system

may be malfunctioning. Contact

your authorized SUBARU dealer for

an inspection.

! To turn on/off the Auto Start Stop

system

s07bh0111

Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light

To turn the Auto Start Stop system on and

off, operate the center information display.

Refer to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch

display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”

�P221 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

When the Auto Start Stop system is turned

OFF, the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator

light on the combination meter display

(color LCD) will illuminate.

While the engine is temporarily stopped by

the system, if the Auto Start Stop system

turns off, the engine will be restarted even

if you do not release the brake pedal.

Auto Start Stop System

356

(359,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

. If the engine is restarted when the

Auto Start Stop system is not opera-

tional and the ignition switch has

been turned to the “OFF” position,

the Auto Start Stop system will turn

on again.

. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to

the “OFF” position when leaving the

vehicle. Failure to do so could result

in the battery discharging.

! Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected

indicator light

s07bh0110

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected

indicator light

If the operational conditions are not met

when the vehicle is stopped, the engine

will not stop and the Auto Start Stop No

Activity Detected indicator light will illumi-

nate. It will turn off when the vehicle begins

to drive.

& Displaying the Auto Start

Stop System Status

s07bh02

Approximate indications of the time that

the engine has been stopped by the Auto

Start Stop system and/or the amount of

fuel saved can be displayed on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

For details, refer to “Basic Screens”

�P185.

& System Warning

s07bh03

So that it can be used safely and comfor-

tably, the Auto Start Stop system is

designed to constantly monitor the vehicle

conditions as well as the environment

inside and outside the vehicle in addition

to driver operations, and to provide various

warnings to the driver via the warning light

and/or indicator light illuminating and a

buzzer sounding. For details about the

warning light and indicator light, refer to

“Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow)”

�P177.

! Warning buzzer

s07bh0301

The buzzer will sound when the engine

hood is opened while the engine is

stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.

When this occurs, the buzzer will stop

sounding when the following operations

are performed.

. The engine is restarted by normal

operation. (Refer to “Preparing to

Drive” �P312.)

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position.

! Display of warning messages

s07bh0302

If a warning message is displayed on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

while driving, a malfunction may have

occurred in the Auto Start Stop system.

In this case, the Auto Start Stop warning

light will illuminate. Have your vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

Auto Start Stop System

357

Starting and Operating

(360,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-19. Rear View Camera

s07br

A rear view camera is attached to the rear

gate. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position and the select lever is set to

“R”, the rear view camera automatically

displays the rear view image behind the

vehicle on the center information display.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses a

wide-angle lens, the image on the

monitor is different from the

actual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range of the image on

the monitor is limited, always

check the rear view and the

surrounding area with your eyes

and mirrors, and move backward

at a slow speed. Moving back-

ward only by checking the rear

view image from the camera

could cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If

smoke comes out or you smell a

strange odor, stop using the rear

view camera immediately. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection. Continued use may

result in accident, fire or electric

shock.

CAUTION

. When washing your vehicle with

a high-pressure washer, do not

allow water to touch the camera

directly. Entry of water in the

camera lens may result in con-

densation, malfunction, fire or

electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful when removing it.

Otherwise, damage to the camera

may cause a fire or electric

shock. Pour water or lukewarm

water over the camera to remove

mud and ice, and wipe it with a

soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure

to use a fuse with the specified

rating. Use of a fuse with a

different rating may result in a

malfunction.

. If you use the rear view camera

for a long time while the engine is

not operated, the battery may

become completely discharged.

NOTE

. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with

a cloth moistened with a diluted

neutral detergent. Then wipe it with

a soft, dry cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If

it comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

Rear View Camera

358

(361,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

. The camera lens has a hard coating

to help prevent scratches. However,

when washing the vehicle or clean-

ing the camera lens, be careful not to

scratch the camera lens. Do not use

a washing brush directly on the

camera lens. The image quality of

the rear view camera may deterio-

rate.

. Strong light shined on the camera

lens may develop vertical lines

around the light source. This is not

a malfunction.

. Under the fluorescent light, the dis-

play may flicker. However, this is not

a malfunction.

. The image of the rear view camera

may be slightly different from the

actual color of the objects.

. If there is a malfunction on the center

information display, refer to “Mal-

functions of the Center Information

Display” �P443.

& How to Use the Rear View

Camera

s07br01

When the select lever is set to “R”, the rear

view camera automatically displays the

rear view image from the vehicle. When

the lever is set to other positions, the

image before setting to “R” is displayed.

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Set the select lever to “R”.

NOTE

. The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle inside mirror or the

outside mirror.

. When “Rear Camera Delay Control”

is on, the rear view image will be

displayed on the center information

display for a certain period of time

after the select lever is shifted to a

position other than the “P” position

from “R”. To turn the function on and

off, refer to “General settings”

�P198 (11.6-inch display models)

or “General settings” �P215 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

. It may be difficult to see the image of

the rear view camera in the following

cases. This is not a malfunction of

the camera.

– The vehicle is in a dark place (at

night, in a tunnel, etc.).

– The vehicle is in an extremely hot

or cold place.

– An object (such as raindrops,

snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

view of the rear view camera

sticks to the lens of the camera.

– Strong light is shining directly on

the camera lens (occasionally,

there are vertical lines on the

screen).

& Viewing Range on the Screen

s07br02

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may

cause an accident or injury.

Range of view

– CONTINUED –

Rear View Camera

359

Starting and Operating

(362,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper

cannot be viewed.

Also, the image from the rear view camera

looks shorter than the actual distance.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a wide

projection on its upper part such as a sign

pole behind the vehicle, the projection

cannot be seen on the screen.

& Help Lines

s07br03

The help lines are a guide to help you

realize the actual distance from the screen

image.

NOTE

If you shift to the “R” range within

several seconds after turning on the

ignition switch, the warning message

may not be displayed. Wait for several

seconds after turning on the ignition

switch before shifting to the “R” range.

Then, the warning message will be

displayed.

Rear View Camera

360

(363,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Help lines

1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2 Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

6 Vehicle centerline

7 Dynamic guidelines

When the select lever is set to “R”, the

monitor screen displays the help lines

together with the rear view image.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the help lines.

Otherwise, it may cause an acci-

dent or injury.

. The actual position may be differ-

ent from the indication of the help

lines.

. Differences may occur due to the

number of passengers or the

loaded cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or

inclined against the road, the

indication is different from the

actual position.

NOTE

When “Steering Angle Lines” is off, the

dynamic guidelines will disappear on

the center information display. To turn

the dynamic guidelines on and off, refer

to “General settings” �P198 (11.6-inch

display models) or “General settings”

�P215 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

! Difference between screen image

and actual road

s07br0301

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading condi-

tions or road conditions.

! When there is an upward slope at

the back

s07br030101

1 3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

– CONTINUED –

Rear View Camera

361

Starting and Operating

(364,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! When there is a downward slope

at the back

s07br030102

1 3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance as in an

upward slope.

! Feature of distance marker

s07br0302

1 3 ft (1 m) line

2 10 ft (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or another

object close behind, distance cannot be

correctly displayed.

7-20. BSD/RCTA (If

Equipped)

s07bm

The BSD/RCTA consists of radar sensors

with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert.

These functions of BSD/RCTA are the

systems that detect objects and vehicles to

the rear and draw attention to the driver

when changing a lane or when driving in

reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the

vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver in changing lanes or rever-

sing safely by monitoring the rear

and side areas of the vehicle. How-

ever, you cannot rely on this system

alone in assuring the safety during a

lane change or reversing. Overcon-

fidence in this system could result in

an accident and lead to serious

injury or death. Since the system

operation has various limitations,

the flashing or illumination of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

BSD/RCTA

362

(365,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

may be delayed, or the warning

buzzer may be delayed or inopera-

tive, even if there is a vehicle travel-

ing in a neighboring lane or ap-

proaching your vehicle from either

side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

& System Features

s07bm01

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-

tions.

. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an

adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching

at high speed while driving the vehicle

(Blind Spot Detection)

. To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the

vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the

following features.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by radio wave-related laws

applicable in the U.S. and other FCC

compliant countries, including Canada.

When driving your vehicle in countries

other than the U.S. and Canada, you

must obtain certification for the coun-

try where you are driving the vehicle.

For more information on certification in

the U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries, including Canada, refer to

“Certification for the BSD/RCTA”

�P369.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

s07bm0101

1 Operating range

The system notifies the driver of the

presence of vehicles in its blind spot.

. If the system detects a vehicle in its

blind spot, it warns the driver by

illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light(s) on the outside mirror

(s).

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction where the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-

nating, the system warns the driver of

dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light.

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

s07bm010101

1 Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

approaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes.

. If the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes, it warns the driver

of dangers by illuminating the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the

outside mirror(s).

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction where the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

363

Starting and Operating

(366,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

nating, the system warns the driver of

dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light.

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

s07bm0103

1 Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

. An icon appears on the center informa-

tion display.

! Limitations of the detectability of

RCTA

s07bm010301

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,

the RCTA may not operate properly in

angled parking.

Example 1

1 The detection range of the radar sensors

2 Area out of detection range of the radar

sensors

A Vehicle that may not be detected

B Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not

be detected because the detection

range is limited by the parked vehi-

cle (B). Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

reversing the vehicle.

Example 2

1 The detection range of the radar sensors

C Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle

Always be sure to check the surround-

ings with your eyes when reversing the

vehicle.

BSD/RCTA

364

(367,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& System Operation

s07bm02

! Operating conditions

s07bm0201

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the

following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned

off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7

mph (12 km/h) (except when rever-

sing).

. The select lever is in the “R” position

(RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.

. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator does not appear (except when

reversing).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will stop operating and the

BSD/RCTA warning indicator will

appear.

– When a malfunction occurs in the

system, including the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light

. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator

appears, exercise proper caution.

For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA

Warning Indicator” �P368.

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will temporarily stop operat-

ing (or may stop operating) and the

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will ap-

pear.

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the

orientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for any reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper

surface around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an en-

vironment in which there are no

objects around (such as in a

desert) for a prolonged period of

time

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors increases exces-

sively due to long driving on

uphill grades in the summer, etc.

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors becomes extre-

mely low

– When the vehicle battery voltage

lowers

– When the vehicle voltage ex-

ceeds the battery voltage rating

The BSD/RCTA will resume opera-

tion once these conditions are cor-

rected, and the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator will disappear. However,

if the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ap-

pears for a prolonged period of time,

have the system inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

. The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA

detection may be impaired and the

system may not operate properly

under the following conditions.

– When the rear bumper around the

radar sensors is distorted

– When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface

around the radar sensors

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

– During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads and

through puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

365

Starting and Operating

(368,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

following vehicles and objects.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians, stationary objects on

the road or road side, etc.

– Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehi-

cles with lower body height such

as a trailer with no cargo and

sports cars)

– Vehicles that are not approaching

your vehicle even though they

are in the detection area (either

on a neighboring lane to the rear

or beside your vehicle when

reversing) (The system deter-

mines the presence of approach-

ing vehicles based on data de-

tected by the radar sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-

most the same speed as your

vehicle for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles traveling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that you are

trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehi-

cles driving in a lane next to the

neighboring lane.

& BSD/RCTA Approach Indica-

tor Light/Warning Buzzer

s07bm03

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-

ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver:

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light (when there are vehicles in the

neighboring lanes).

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light and warning buzzer (when a

vehicle is approaching from the left or

right side while your vehicle is rever-

sing)

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

s07bm0301

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted on each side of the outside

mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a

vehicle approaching from behind is de-

tected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following

conditions.

. While the indicator light is illuminating, if

the turn signal lever is operated toward

the side in which this light turned on

. When reversing the vehicle while the

system detects a vehicle approaching

from either side

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light dimming function

s07bm030101

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

. You may have difficulty seeing the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

under the following conditions.

– When sunlight shines directly on

– When the headlight beams from a

vehicle traveling behind shines

directly on it

. While the illumination brightness

control dial is in the fully upward

position, even if the headlights are

BSD/RCTA

366

(369,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

turned on, the brightness of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

will not be reduced. For details about

the illumination brightness control

dial, refer to “Illumination Bright-

ness Control” �P155.

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-

zer (only when reversing)

s07bm0302

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to

“Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch display

models) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P221

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

s07bm0303

. In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

and the warning buzzer may be de-

layed or the system may fail to issue

these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-

boring lane from a lane next to the

neighboring lane

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and down-

hill grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring

lane are driving on the far side of

each lane.

– When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersec-

tion)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neigh-

boring lane

– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by touching “Rear Vehicle

Detection (BSD/RCTA)”

– Immediately after the select lever is

shifted to the “R” position

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the cargo area

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may illuminate when driving close

to solid objects on the road or road side

(such as guardrails, tunnels and side-

walls).

. When turning at an intersection in

urban areas, or a multilane intersection,

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may flash.

. If a building or a wall exists in the

reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light may flash and

the warning buzzer may sound.

. In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

– When your vehicle drives on the

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

367

Starting and Operating

(370,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

near side of its lane from the

corresponding vehicle

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

away drives on the near side of its

lane from your vehicle

& BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator

s07bm08

! System temporary stops

s07bm0801

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message

2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is

used at extremely high or low tempera-

tures or when abnormal voltage exists.

Once these conditions are corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis-

appear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a

prolonged time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stops due to

reduced radar sensitivity

s07bm0802

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due

to reduced radar sensitivity

2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectabil-

ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once

the condition is corrected, the system will

recover from the temporary stop condition

and the indicator will disappear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a

prolonged time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

& BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator

s07bm04

! System malfunction

s07bm0403

1 BSD/RCTA malfunction message

2 At first, this message will appear

3 Then this message will appear

4 BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

BSD/RCTA

368

(371,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA

s07bm09

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off,

operate the center information display.

Refer to “Car settings” �P203 (11.6-inch

display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”

�P221 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

When the BSD/RCTA system is turned

OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the

combination meter display (color LCD) will

illuminate.

NOTE

. In the following cases, turn off the

BSD/RCTA system. The system may

not operate properly due to blocked

radar waves.

– When towing a trailer

– When a bicycle carrier or other

item is fitted to the rear of the

vehicle

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When running the engine and

making the wheels rotate while

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last

known status of the system is main-

tained. For example, if the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position with the BSD/RCTA

deactivated, the BSD/RCTA remains

deactivated the next time the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

& Certification for the BSD/

RCTA

s07bm06

. The U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

369

Starting and Operating

(372,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Canada-spec. models

& Handling of Radar Sensors

s07bm07

Radar sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of the

vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

BSD/RCTA

370

(373,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

To ensure correct operation of the

BSD/RCTA, observe the following

precautions.

. Always keep the bumper surface

near the radar sensors clean.

. Do not affix any stickers or other

items on the bumper surface near

the radar sensors. For details,

consult your SUBARU dealer.

. Do not modify the bumper near

the radar sensors.

. Do not paint the bumper near the

radar sensors.

. Do not expose the bumper near

the radar sensors to strong im-

pacts. If a sensor becomes mis-

aligned, a system malfunction

may occur, including the inability

to detect vehicles entering the

detection areas. If any strong

shock is applied to the bumper,

be sure to contact your SUBARU

dealer for inspection.

. Do not disassemble the radar

sensors.

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the radar sensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

7-21. Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) System (If

Equipped)

s07bn

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a

system designed to help avoid collisions or

reduce collision damage when reversing

the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is

detected in the reversing direction, the

system will notify the driver with a warning

sound and may activate the vehicle’s

brakes automatically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) is not a system intended

to replace the driver’s responsi-

bility to check their surroundings

for vehicles or obstacles to avoid

a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driv-

ing safely. Before reversing, be

sure to first depress the brake

pedal and visually check the

surroundings.

. There are some cases in which

the vehicle cannot avoid colli-

sion, because the system opera-

tion has limitations. The warning

sound or automatic braking may

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

371

Starting and Operating

(374,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

be delayed or may not operate at

all even when an obstacle is

present.

. Make sure to set the Automatic

Braking function to OFF when the

vehicle is on the free roller or on

the chassis dynamometer. Other-

wise, the vehicle may move and it

may cause an accident.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including chil-

dren), animals or other moving

objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi-

tion or the surrounding environ-

ment, the sonar sensor’s ability

to detect objects may become

unstable.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system records and stores the follow-

ing data when automatic braking oper-

ates. It does not record conversations,

personal information or other audio

data.

. Distance from the object

. Vehicle speed

. Accelerator pedal operation status

. Brake pedal operation status

. Select lever position

. Outside temperature

. The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU may acquire and use the

recorded data for the purpose of vehi-

cle research and development.

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU will not disclose or provide

the acquired data to any other third

party except under the following con-

ditions.

. The vehicle owner has given his/her

consent.

. The disclosure/provision is based

on a court order or other legally

enforceable request.

. Data that has been modified so that

the user and vehicle cannot be

identified is provided to a research

institution for statistical processing

or similar purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System Overview

s07bn01

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system will operate the following 2 func-

tions using 4 sonar sensors.

. Sonar Audible Alarm function

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system detects objects rearward and

warns the driver by warning message on

the center information display and warning

beeps.

. Automatic Braking function

The Automatic Braking function detects

objects rearward and if there is a high risk

of a collision, the system decelerates the

vehicle and controls the braking to reduce

damage.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

372

(375,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 When reversing

2 When either strong automatic braking or

torque control is applied to prevent

collision (in this case, short warning

beeps or continuous warning beeps will

sound)

3 When the vehicle is stopped by the

system (in this case, the continuous

beep will remain sounding)

4 Object (e.g., a wall)

! Detecting range

s07bn0101

1 Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2 Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

3 Detecting range (length): Approximately

5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-

road crossing and you are trying to

escape by reversing through the

crossing gate, the system may re-

cognize the crossing gate as an

obstacle and brake may activate. In

this case, remain calm and either

continue to depress the accelerator

pedal or cancel the system. To

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

373

Starting and Operating

(376,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-

ing the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System Operation” �P380.

& Operating Conditions

s07bn02

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system will operate when all of the follow-

ing conditions are met.

1 EyeSight warning indicator

2 RAB warning indicator

3 RAB OFF indicator

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.

. The RAB warning indicator is off.

. The RAB OFF indicator is off.

. The select lever is in the “R” position.

Sonar Audible Alarm function

. Sonar Audible Alarm is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0

to 15 km/h).

Automatic Braking function

. Automatic Braking is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph

(1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system

will not operate. Promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

is illuminated.

– The RAB warning indicator is

illuminated.

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system

cannot be operated.

– The

(EyeSight Temporary Stop

indicator: White) is illuminated,

and the messages correspond-

ing to the EyeSight temporary

stop are displayed on the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD).

For details, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

– The RAB OFF indicator is illumi-

nated.

. In the following cases, the functions

may not be able to properly work.

Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the sonar sensors or

the rear bumper near the sonar

sensor.

– The rear bumper is modified.

– The rear bumper has been re-

moved and attached.

– The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading con-

dition or modification.

– There is damage to the sonar

sensors or the rear bumper near

the sonar sensor.

– The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper

is deformed.

. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-

matic braking ability will be reduced.

. The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed

is less than approximately 3 mph (5

km/h). However, the system does not

guarantee that the vehicle will be

able to avoid collisions in any situa-

tion.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

374

(377,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. If the vehicle is reversed at an

extremely slow speed, the driver’s

operation may be prioritized. In this

case, automatic braking will not

operate.

. The system may not be able to detect

and apply the brake with the follow-

ing objects.

– Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which

may not reflect the sound wave

emitted from the sonar sensor.

– Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select

lever is set to the “R” position.

– Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave

emitted from the sonar sensor

such as a chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed

to detect and apply brake.

– Pedestrians.

– Moving objects including moving

vehicles.

– Objects which absorbs sound

waves such as cloth or snow.

– Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle.

– Objects that are low to the ground

such as parking blocks.

– Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above.

– Objects that are out of range of

the center of the vehicle in the

horizontal direction.

– Objects that are not perpendicu-

lar to the ground.

– The surface of the object is

uneven or wavy.

. When reversing the vehicle, the

functions may not be able to work

properly or may cause a system

malfunction if the following condi-

tions exist.

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby:

– Horn sound from another vehicle.

– Engine sound from other vehi-

cles.

– Sound of an air brake.

– Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle.

– A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted near by.

– A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction.

Weather conditions:

– Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area

near the sonar sensor becomes

too hot or too cold to operate.

– The sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors

are exposed to heavy rain or a

significant amount of water.

– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

– Air is moving rapidly such as

when a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor:

– Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna)

or commercial attachment parts

(trailer hitch, bicycle carrier,

bumper guard) are attached.

– Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensor.

– The vehicle is significantly in-

clined.

– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehi-

cle’s loading condition, etc.

– When the sonar sensor is mis-

aligned due to a collision or an

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

375

Starting and Operating

(378,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

accident.

Surrounding environment:

– A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars

are present in the reversing di-

rection.

– When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area.

– When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to

the vehicle such as narrow tun-

nels, narrow bridges, narrow

roads or narrow garages.

– Wheel track or hole is present in

the ground of the reversing direc-

tion.

– When reversing over a drainage

cover (grating cover).

– The path of the reversing direc-

tion is inclined such as on a steep

uphill.

– When reversing downhill.

– A curb or step is present in the

reversing direction.

– Reversing in a garage with a low

ceiling or a tunnel.

– There is a patch of snow rear-

ward.

– There is a puddle of water.

– There is an obstacle that is next

to an object.

– Going back along a wall.

– The area where the road starts

touching dirt and snow

– When reversing on an uneven

road.

. In circumstances such as the follow-

ing, it may not be possible to avoid a

collision even when the system

operates normally.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

376

(379,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

– Roads are slippery.

– The tire air pressure is not cor-

rect.

– The tires have become worn.

– Tire chains are installed.

– Tires which are not the desig-

nated size are installed.

– Emergency repairs were per-

formed using a puncture repair

kit.

– The suspension was modified.

– Vehicle driving is unstable due to

accident or malfunction.

– The brake warning light is illumi-

nated.

& Sonar Audible Alarm Func-

tion

s07bn03

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system is in operation, audible

warning beeps will sound to warn the

driver of a potential collision in 3 levels:

medium proximity, short proximity, closest

proximity.

NOTE

It may take time to display the wall and

sound warning beeps after the object

was recognized by the Sonar Audible

Alarm function.

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob-

ject detected)

43 in (110 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity

alert (approaching the

object)

28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert

(approaching closer

to the object)

20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity

alert (too close to the

object)

20 in (50 cm) or less Red

Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

377

Starting and Operating

(380,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Obstacle detected and alert level

s07bn0301

Long proximity alert (object detected)

1 Green: 43 in (110 cm) or more

Medium proximity alert (approaching the

object)

1 Yellow: 28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm)

Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer)

1 Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the

object)

1 Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object

will be shown on the center information

display.

A warning alarm will sound and, depend-

ing on the speed, either torque control to

generate engine braking or automatic

braking will be applied.

& Automatic Braking Function

Operation

s07bn08

! Object close behind warning

s07bn0801

Automatic braking warning

1 Warning message

If the system determine the risk of collision

with the object. Short warning beeps or

continuous warning beeps will sound and

either strong automatic braking or torque

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

378

(381,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

control will be applied to prevent collision.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

Depress brake pedal warning

1 Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is

depressed, a message will be displayed

on the center information display and the

continuous beep will remain sounding.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

NOTE

The Sonar Audible Alarm function and

Automatic Braking function are differ-

ent in operation conditions. Therefore,

there are cases in which only one of

these functions will activate.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal immedi-

ately after the system stops the

vehicle by automatic braking. De-

pending on the conditions of the

road surface and tires, the vehicle

may not remain stopped, possibly

leading to an accident.

! After the vehicle is stopped by the

system

s07bn0802

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the

system will temporarily stop operating.

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

the select lever is shifted to a position other

than the “R” position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position.

NOTE

. In the following cases, after the

vehicle has been stopped by the

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system, brake control is released

and the electronic parking brake

operates. For details about releasing

the parking brake, refer to “Electro-

nic Parking Brake” �P345.

– When 2 minutes pass after the

vehicle is stopped

– When any door is opened

. The Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system may stop operating

temporarily in the following cases

and the RAB OFF indicator will

illuminate.

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensor.

– Objects are too close to the rear

bumper when the select lever is

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

379

Starting and Operating

(382,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

set to the “R” position.

– The system detects sounds of a

similar frequency to the RAB

sonar.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF mode and TRACK mode are

selected.

& Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking (RAB) System

Operation

s07bn04

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system can be temporarily canceled by

any of the following operations.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the

brake pedal is depressed.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed

continuously (In this case, limited ac-

celeration will be canceled and the

vehicle will continue reversing.)

. The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the

object is no longer detected.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System ON/OFF

Setting

s07bn05

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

can be set by operating the center in-

formation display.

1 ON setting key of Automatic Braking

function

2 OFF setting key of Automatic Braking

function

3 ON setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

4 OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

When the ON setting key is shown, the

corresponding setting is ON.

Touch the ON setting key to turn the setting

OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the

corresponding setting is OFF.

Touch the OFF setting key to turn the

setting ON.

When the Automatic Braking function is

turned OFF, the following indicator(s) will

illuminate.

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

the corresponding function is turned ON.

NOTE

When the settings cannot be changed,

the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed

out.

Also, the following settings can be chan-

ged by operating the center information

display.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

380

(383,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Warning volume

. Sonar Audible Alarm

For details, refer to “Car settings” �P203.

& RAB Warning Indicator

s07bn07

1 RAB malfunction message

2 RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system malfunctions, the above indicator

illuminates on the combination meter.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

& Handling of the Sonar Sen-

sors

s07bn06

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear

bumper. To ensure the proper operation of

the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system, observe the following precau-

tions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the sonar sensor or the bumper

surface near the sonar sensors.

. Always keep the sonar sensor and the

rear bumper surface near the sonar

sensors clean.

. Do not modify rear bumper.

. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar

sensors.

. Do not apply high pressure water to the

sonar sensors with a high pressure car-

washing machine.

. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

malfunction may occur, including in-

ability to detect objects in the reversing

direction. If any strong impact is applied

to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors re-

quires repair, paintwork or replace-

ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

381

Starting and Operating

(384,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

7-22. Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem (If Equipped)

s07bp

Driver Monitoring System is introduced as

DriverFocus in some countries.

The Driver Monitoring System monitors

possible cases when the driver is not

paying attention to the forward direction,

and also recognizes individual users.

This system warns the driver of inattentive/

drowsy driving, and can support safe and

comfortable driving by automatically re-

trieving the following settings.

– Climate control setting

– Meter setting

– Center information display setting

When a user is registered, various settings

are automatically retrieved when the user

enters the vehicle.

1 Camera

CAUTION

. Always use the utmost care in

driving

– Overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the

Driver Monitoring System

could easily lead to a serious

accident.

. This system cannot detect if the

driver is feeling drowsy or is

concentrating on safe driving.

. It cannot judge if the driver is

awake or asleep, if their driving

abilities have diminished, or if

they are concentrating on safe

driving.

. In some circumstances, the sys-

tem may not be able to correctly

detect the driver state.

NOTE

. The user recognition camera does

not save images, audio, or video.

. The Driver Monitoring System may

not operate correctly when sunlight

is shining into the vehicle in the

following ways.

– Sunlight is shining directly (or

through glass) onto the user

recognition camera.

– There are shadows on the dri-

ver’s face caused by sunlight (or

any light with a strong infrared

component).

– There are large momentary fluc-

tuations in the strength of the

sunlight (or any light with a

strong infrared component) shin-

ing on the face.

. Correct detection may not be possi-

ble when a device that includes an

infrared light source (such as a

commercially available Driver Mon-

itoring System) is installed in the

vehicle interior.

. The Driver Monitoring System may

Driver Monitoring System

382

(385,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

not operate correctly at the following

times when the driver is wearing

glasses or sunglasses.

– The sunglasses do not allow the

easy passage of infrared light.

– The surrounding scenery is re-

flected strongly in the lenses of

the glasses or sunglasses.

– The eyes are hidden by the frame

of the glasses and the user

recognition camera cannot de-

tect the eyes.

– The light from an infrared light

source (LED) is reflected in the

lenses of the glasses or sun-

glasses.

– The driver is wearing an eye-

patch.

– The driver is wearing a hat set

deeply over the eyes.

. Depending on the type of mask,

correct detection of inattentive/

drowsy driving may not be possible.

. Correct user recognition is not pos-

sible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is

covered with a mask, muffler, sun-

glasses, or other item.

. The Driver Monitoring System may

not operate correctly when the eye-

brows, eyes, nose, or mouth is

hidden due to item that is between

the face and the system.

. If a thick cover is attached to the

steering wheel, then depending on

the position set for the tilt/telescopic

steering wheel, the cover may block

the system’s view of the face, and

the system and the Driver Monitor-

ing System may not operate cor-

rectly.

. Do not attach any stickers to the

user recognition camera or the infra-

red light source (LED). If the user

recognition camera or infrared light

source (LED) is covered by an

obstruction, it will not be possible

to correctly monitor the driver.

. If an accessory is hung from the

inside mirror, correct detection may

not be possible.

. Do not touch the user recognition

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) directly with your fingers. If

there is dirt or a fingerprint on these

parts, it will not be possible to

correctly monitor the driver. If there

is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts,

either wipe them with a soft dry

cloth, or wipe gently with a damp

cloth after first firmly wringing the

water out.

. If the surface of the user recognition

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) becomes scratched, correct

detection may not be possible. Be

careful that hard objects do not

contact these parts.

. If there is condensation on the user

recognition camera or the infrared

light source (LED), correct detection

may not be possible. If there is

condensation on these parts, wipe

it away with a soft dry cloth.

. When registering a user for user

recognition, avoid closing your eyes

as much as possible.

. If the user recognition success rate

is low, it is possible that the user is

not correctly registered. Delete the

registered data and perform regis-

tration again.

. If a user frequently drives both with

glasses and contact lenses, it is

recommended that registration be

performed both when wearing

glasses and when wearing contact

lenses.

. User recognition starts immediately

after entering the vehicle, however if

the user looks downward or at the

driver side mirror for a long time, the

user may not be recognized.

. When one person among twins or

another pair of persons with similar

facial features is registered, the

other person may be incorrectly

recognized as the registered user

when entering the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

383

Starting and Operating

(386,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. If the person in the passenger’s seat

leans into the driver’s seat, or in

other cases when there are two or

more faces near the driver’s seat, the

system may not operate correctly.

. There are cases when the system

concludes that the user’s eyes are

closed when the user is looking

downward during driving, such as

when checking instruments or the

navigation screen. In such cases,

the drowsy driving warning buzzer

may sound or the system may

otherwise not operate correctly.

. If the eyes are narrowed when laugh-

ing or when there is a dazzling

outside light, the system may judge

that the eyes are closed and the

drowsy driving warning buzzer may

sound or the system may otherwise

not operate correctly.

. The drowsy driving or asleep warn-

ing states are recognized from the

length of time and percentage of

time that the eyes are closed. The

drowsy driving warning buzzer will

not sound simply when the driver

feels sleepy or yawns.

. Even when the driver does not feel

sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed

or if he or she blinks frequently, the

drowsy driving warning buzzer may

sound.

. The inattentive driving warning buz-

zer may sound if the driver leans

forward or puts his or her head out of

the window while driving.

. The inattentive driving warning buz-

zer will not sound when the vehicle

is stopped or traveling at slow speed

even if the driver is not looking

ahead.

. The Driver Monitoring System col-

lects and stores data regarding

drivers’ facial features. Facial recog-

nition data is stored locally and does

not leave the vehicle. It is not

transmitted to or stored by SUBARU

or anyone else. The Driver Monitor-

ing System may be disabled and any

stored driver data may be deleted by

following the instructions below. If

the Driver Monitoring System is

disabled, it will be unable to provide

any of its safety or convenience

functions.

Driver Monitoring System

384

(387,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System

setting and the user recognition function setting.

Available functions

Driver Monitoring System*

ON OFF

User recognition

function*

Inattentive/drowsy

driving warning

Available Not available

User recognition

function

Available Not available

OFF

Inattentive/drowsy

driving warning

Available Not available

User recognition

function

Not available

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

385

Starting and Operating

(388,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Available function items

Driver Monitoring System*

ON OFF

User recognition

function*

Delete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available Not available

OFF

Delete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available

Not available

*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer to “

Car settings”

�P203.

*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings.

Refer to “Car settings” �P203.

The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is

registered.

Available functions

The user is registered. The user is not registered.

User recognition function Available

Not available

& User Recognition Function

s07bp01

When a user is registered, it is possible to

retrieve the following settings.

! Meter personalization

s07bp0102

. Combination meter display (color LCD)

basic screen

Displays the screen which the user had

selected at the time when he/she last

exited the vehicle.

! Center information display perso-

nalization

s07bp0103

. Center information display basic

screen

Displays the screen which the user had

selected at the time when he/she last

exited the vehicle.

. Fuel consumption screen

Displays the average fuel economy for

past driving by that user.

! Climate control personalization

s07bp0104

. Climate control settings

Retrieves the preferred setting tempera-

ture, airflow mode selection, and other

settings which the user had selected at the

time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

NOTE

When a recognized user exits the

vehicle while the Max A/C mode is on

Driver Monitoring System

386

(389,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

and the push engine switch is turned

off, the system stores the setting con-

figured before Max A/C mode was

turned on.

! Changing the personalization settings

s07bp0106

Item

Meter personalization*

Combination meter display

(color LCD) basic screen

When the customization screen

linked with the synchronized

user function is selected and

the setting is changed, it is

automatically stored.

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the

conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the

screen was selected and the setting was changed.

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

387

Starting and Operating

(390,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Inattentive/Drowsy Driving

Warning

s07bp02

While driving, the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem monitors possible cases of driver

inattention or drowsiness and warns the

driver.

When the inattentive/drowsy driving warn-

ing activates, the buzzer sounds and an

interrupt display appears.

NOTE

. The inattentive/drowsy driving warn-

ing operates regardless of the status

of the user recognition function.

. The inattentive driving warning does

not activate when the turn signal is

operating or when the select lever is

in the “R” position.

. When the pre-collision brake system

OFF indicator is illuminated on the

combination meter display (color

LCD), the inattentive driving warning

activates at the same timing as usual

even when a vehicle ahead or ob-

stacle is detected. For details about

the EyeSight system, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

! Inattentive driving warning

s07bp0201

When the system monitors that the driver

may be inattentive, it warns the driver.

When the inattentive driving warning acti-

vates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt

display appears on the combination meter

display (color LCD).

When the EyeSight system has detected a

vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward

direction, the inattentive driving warning

may activate at earlier timing than usual.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

Driver Monitoring System

388

(391,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Drowsy driving warning

s07bp0202

Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning

is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and

an interrupt display appears.

Combination meter

display (color LCD)

Center information

display

Warning chime

Drowsy driving

Beep, beep... (Con-

tinues until the driver’s

eyes open.)

Very drowsy

Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep (5 times)

Slightly drowsy

— Beep

Not drowsy — —

—

& Driver Monitoring System In-

dicator/Warning

s07bp03

1 Driver Monitoring System operation in-

dicator light (green)

2 Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator

light

3 Driver Monitoring System temporary stop

indicator light

4 Driver Monitoring System warning light

(yellow)

The Driver Monitoring System indicator/

warning indicates the status of the Driver

Monitoring System on the combination

meter display (color LCD).

NOTE

When the Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop indicator, or Driver

Monitoring System warning is illumi-

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

389

Starting and Operating

(392,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

nated, the Driver Monitoring System

function cannot be used. In addition,

the following items cannot be selected.

. Register User

. Delete User

. Delete All Users

! Driver Monitoring System operation

indicator light (green)

s07bp0301

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is operating.

! Driver Monitoring System OFF in-

dicator light

s07bp0302

This indicator illuminates when the user

has turned off the Driver Monitoring

System and the Driver Monitoring System

is not operating.

! Driver Monitoring System tempor-

ary stop indicator light

s07bp0303

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops

temporarily in the following circum-

stances.

. When the temperature of the main

unit of the Driver Monitoring System

is high or low.

. When the Driver Monitoring System

cannot monitor the driver’s eye

movement.

. When the Driver Monitoring System

cannot monitor the driver’s eye-

brows, eyes, nose or mouth.

. When the camera and the infrared

light source (LED) are covered and

the Driver Monitoring System can-

not monitor the driver correctly.

! Driver Monitoring System warning

light (yellow)

s07bp0304

This warning illuminates when there is a

problem with the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

& Using the Driver Monitoring

System

s07bp04

! User recognition

s07bp0401

When a user is registered with the user

recognition function, the Driver Monitoring

System performs the following.

1. When the door is opened and the

push-button ignition switch is OFF,

the user recognition screen appears

and the Driver Monitoring system

starts user recognition.

The user recognition screen may not

appear when the door is opened in

some cases, such as when only a short

time has passed after the push-button

ignition switch was turned OFF. In such

cases, user recognition starts when the

door is closed however the user

recognition screen does not appear.

Driver Monitoring System

390

(393,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face forward

for a few moments.

3. When user recognition is completed,

the Hello screen appears on the center

information display.

At this time, climate control settings,

combination meter display (color LCD)

basic screen, center information display

basic screen, and customization settings

all change based on the user information.

NOTE

. When a center information display

operation switch is pressed, the

user recognition screen is canceled,

however user recognition con-

tinues.

. If user recognition fails, perform

recognition again following the in-

structions, refer to “When a user is

not recognized” �P391.

. User recognition is not performed

while driving.

! When a user is not recognized

s07bp0402

In the following case, user recognition may

not be possible and “User recognition

stopped.” may be displayed.

. There is an object blocking the camera.

Remove the obstacle and follow the

reference procedure to perform user re-

cognition again.

Refer to “Driver Monitoring System”

�P209.

1 Camera

NOTE

. User recognition may not be possi-

ble when there is dirt or fingerprints

on the user recognition camera. To

clean, either wipe using a soft cloth

or else wipe gently using a mois-

tened cloth that has been thoroughly

wrung out.

. When the synchronized user func-

tion is turned OFF, manual repeat

facial scan is not possible.

& Registering and Deleting a

User

s07bp05

Users can be registered in the Driver

Monitoring System, and registered users

can be deleted. For the user registration

and delete procedures, refer to “Driver

Monitoring System” �P209.

NOTE

. When the Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring

System temporary stop indicator,

or Driver Monitoring System warn-

ing is illuminated, the following

items cannot be selected.

– Register User

– Delete User

– Delete All Users

. User information can also be deleted

by resetting the center information

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

391

Starting and Operating

(394,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

display to the factory default set-

tings. When the settings are reset to

the factory default settings, all user

information is deleted. The settings

cannot be reset to the factory default

settings when the Driver Monitoring

System is OFF.

& Driver Monitoring System

ON/OFF Settings

s07bp07

NOTE

. When the Driver Monitoring System

is turned OFF after user recognition

was completed, the user recognition

function stores the Driver Monitor-

ing System ON/OFF state.

. Even when the Driver Monitoring

System is set to OFF, the Driver

Monitoring System automatically

turns ON once the driver’s door is

opened and closed while the vehicle

is stopped. This only occurs when

the user recognition setting is ON.

The system then reverts automati-

cally to the OFF state.

. After the Driver Monitoring System

was turned OFF, if the Driver Mon-

itoring System is turned ON while

the driver’s door is open, user

recognition may not occur correctly.

! To turn on/off the Driver Monitoring

System

s07bp0701

To turn the Driver Monitoring System on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Car settings” �P203.

When the Driver Monitoring System is

turned OFF, the Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator on the combination meter

display (color LCD) will illuminate.

NOTE

Even when the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem is turned off, the user recognition

does not switch on or off automatically.

! User recognition settings

s07bp0702

The Driver Monitoring System User recog-

nition function can be turned ON/OFF. For

the setting procedure, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P203.

NOTE

. The user recognition function

setting cannot be changed for each

individual user.

. The default setting for the user

recognition function is ON.

. When the user recognition function

is turned OFF, the following items

cannot be selected.

– Repeat Facial Scan

– Register User

& How to Get the Source Code

That Uses Open Source Soft-

ware

s07bp09

Free Open-Source Software Information

This product uses Free Open-Source

Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the source

code of such FOSS can be found at the

following URL:

http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/

RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0101/

Driver Monitoring System

392

(395,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(396,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(397,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s08

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First

1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 396

8-2. Fuel Economy Hints ....................................... 396

8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)...... 396

8-4. Catalytic Converter......................................... 397

8-5. Periodic Inspections....................................... 398

8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries ......................... 398

8-7. Frequent Driving Prevents Vehicle Battery

from Discharging .......................................... 398

8-8. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles ...................... 399

8-9. On-Road and Off-Road Driving...................... 400

Before Driving ....................................................401

During Driving .................................................... 401

After Driving....................................................... 402

8-10. Winter Driving ............................................... 402

Operation during Cold Weather........................... 402

Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads ........................ 403

Corrosion Protection .......................................... 404

Snow Tires ......................................................... 405

Tire Chains ........................................................ 405

Rocking the Vehicle ........................................... 406

8-11. Loading Your Vehicle ....................................406

Vehicle Capacity Weight ..................................... 407

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 407

Roof Rail (If Equipped) ....................................... 408

Roof Molding and Crossbar (If Equipped) ........... 409

Roof Tent ........................................................... 410

8-12. Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option).........................412

Connecting a SUBARU Genuine Trailer Hitch...... 413

If Not Towing a Trailer ........................................ 414

8-13. Trailer Towing ................................................414

Warranties and Maintenance............................... 415

Maximum Load Limits ........................................ 415

Trailer Hitches (Dealer Option)............................ 418

When You Do Not Tow a Trailer .......................... 419

Connecting a Trailer ........................................... 419

Trailer Towing Tips............................................. 420

Driving Tips

(398,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In

Driving – the First 1,000 miles

(1,600 km)

s08aa

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000

rpm except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast

or slow.

. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-

celeration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-

gency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to a newly installed or overhauled

engine or when brake pads are replaced

with new ones.

8-2. Fuel Economy Hints

s08ab

The following suggestions will help to save

your fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire inflation

pressure label, which is located under

the door latch on the driver’s side. Low

pressure will increase tire wear and fuel

consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

. The indication of the ECO gauge shows

a reference for saving fuel. For details,

refer to “ECO gauge” �P182.

8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas

(Carbon Monoxide)

s08ac

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a long time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

396

(399,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

8-4. Catalytic Converter

s08ad

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,

thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a

small amount of leaded gasoline will

damage the catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring,

backfiring or incomplete combustion),

have your vehicle checked and re-

paired by an authorized SUBARU deal-

er.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield

of catalytic converter and the exhaust

system.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

Catalytic Converter

397

Driving Tips

(400,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

8-5. Periodic Inspections

s08ae

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

8-6. Driving in Foreign Coun-

tries

s08af

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel Requirements”

�P307.

. Comply with all regulations and require-

ments of each country.

8-7. Frequent Driving Pre-

vents Vehicle Battery from

Discharging

s08au

Vehicle batteries are a consumable item. If

the battery charge is not maintained

regularly, the battery will deteriorate and

may require replacement sooner than

expected. The battery is charged by

running the engine. It is recommended to

drive the car for a longer time occasionally

to prevent the vehicle battery from becom-

ing drained, especially if it is regularly

driven only a short time daily (e.g. only 10

minutes) or if it is parked for 10 days or

more. It may be possible to recover the

state of charge and maintain the battery

performance by driving for a longer time (e.

g. more than 30 minutes). If you cannot

drive enough, we recommend to charge

the battery as needed. If no action is taken,

the battery will become discharged. This is

a normal characteristic of any battery.

Periodic Inspections

398

(401,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

8-8. Driving Tips for AWD Ve-

hicles

s08ag

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechan-

ical damage could be caused to

the drivetrain of the car, and

affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored

in the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By

shifting power between the front and rear

wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide

added traction during acceleration, and

added engine braking force during decel-

eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging the

AWD system, you should keep the follow-

ing tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

– CONTINUED –

Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles

399

Driving Tips

(402,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

conditions than a two wheel drive

vehicle. There is little difference in

handling, however, during extremely

sharp turns or sudden braking. There-

fore, when driving down a slope or

turning corners, be sure to reduce your

speed and maintain an ample distance

from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire inflation pressure label, which is

located on the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

steep hills or dusty roads will necessi-

tate more frequent replacement of the

following items than that specified in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

– Rear differential gear oil

– Continuously variable transmission

fluid

– Front differential gear oil

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehi-

cle. For detailed information, refer to

“Towing” �P436.

8-9. On-Road and Off-Road

Driving

s08ah

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. Never attempt to drive through

pools and puddles, or roads

flooded with water. Water enter-

ing the engine air intake or the

exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage

your vehicle and may cause it to

stall. In this case, contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately. Re-

gardless of its depth, it can wash

away the ground from under your

tires, resulting in possible loss of

traction and even vehicle roll-

over.

CAUTION

. Frequent driving of an AWD mod-

el under hard-driving conditions

such as rough roads or off roads

will necessitate more frequent

replacement of the following

items than that specified in the

maintenance schedule described

in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to

your SUBARU while operating it

off-road and not using common

On-Road and Off-Road Driving

400

(403,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

sense precautions such as those

listed here is not eligible for

warranty coverage.

. After driving on gravel roads or

rough roads, check the under-

carriage of the vehicle body for

any damage, deformation, or

paint removal. If you notice any

irregularities, contact a SUBARU

dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.

Because of the AWD feature and higher

ground clearance, you can drive your

SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.

But please keep in mind that an AWD

SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither

a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-

terrain vehicle. If you do take your

SUBARU off-road, certain common sense

precautions such as those in the following

list should be taken.

& Before Driving

s08ah09

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a

shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and

cell phone or citizens band radio.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

piled higher than the seatbacks. During

sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle

and cause injury. Do not pile heavy

loads on the roof. Those loads raise the

vehicle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this

manual.

& During Driving

s08ah10

General precautions:

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas

or over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. A vehicle

can much more easily tip over sideways

than it can end over end. Avoid driving

straight up or down slopes that are too

steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk

the wheel and injure your hands.

Instead, drive with your fingers and

thumbs on the outside of the rim.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass

or fallen leaves, as they may burn

easily. The exhaust system is very hot

while the engine is running and right

after the engine stops. This could

create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under espe-

cially dangerous situations:

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the

select lever back and forth between

“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race

the engine. For the best possible

traction, avoid spinning the wheels

when trying to free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction

by starting the vehicle with the trans-

mission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to

“Selection of Manual Mode” �P330.

– CONTINUED –

On-Road and Off-Road Driving

401

Driving Tips

(404,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& After Driving

s08ah11

. Always check your brakes for effective-

ness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal.

Repeat that process several times to

dry out the brake discs and brake pads.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that

there is no grass, bush, paper, rags,

stones, sand, etc. adhering to or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the underbody. If

the vehicle is used with these materials

trapped or adhering to the underbody, a

mechanical breakdown or fire could

occur.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components

are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so

they need to be washed thoroughly.

8-10. Winter Driving

s08ai

& Operation during Cold

Weather

s08ai01

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,

a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-

peratures reduce battery capacity. The

battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

If you fill the windshield washer tank with a

fluid with a different concentration from the

one used previously, purge the old fluid

from the piping between the windshield

washer tank and washer nozzles by

operating the washer for a certain period

of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of

the fluid remaining in the piping is too low

for the outside temperature, it may freeze

and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the windshield washer tank.

. Be careful foreign matter does

not contaminate the washer fluid

when filling the tank. Contamina-

tion could cause malfunctions,

such as clogging the pump.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

Winter Driving

402

(405,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

s08ai0101

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and driving

dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-

mulated under the fenders to avoid making

steering difficult. During severe winter

driving, stop when and where it is safe to

do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

s08ai0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake

when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze

in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in

snow or when it snows, raise the

wiper blades off the glass to

prevent damage to them.

. Under either of the following

conditions, icing may develop

on the brake system, which could

cause poor braking action.

– When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads

heavily covered with snow

– When the vehicle has been left

parked during a snowstorm

Check for snow or ice buildup on

the suspension, disc brakes and

brake hoses underneath the ve-

hicle. If there is caked snow or

ice, remove it, being careful not

to damage the disc brakes and

brake hoses and ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the following

tips.

1. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weather

s08ai0103

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an anti-

freeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for

an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on Snowy and Icy

Roads

s08ai02

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehi-

cle control.

– CONTINUED –

Winter Driving

403

Driving Tips

(406,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information about braking on slippery

surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake

System)” �P336 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control System” �P337.

! Wiper operation when snowing

s08ai0201

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the

windshield or rear window, perform the

following procedure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blade

rubbers, use the defroster with the

airflow selection in “

” and the tem-

perature set for maximum warmth until

the wiper blade rubbers are completely

thawed. Refer to “Climate Control”

�P261.

. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer

to “Defogger and Deicer” �P246.

. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,

use the rear window defogger. Refer to

“Defogger and Deicer” �P246.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow selection in “

” and the

temperature set for maximum warmth.

After the windshield gets warmed enough

to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away

using the windshield washer. Refer to

“Windshield washer” �P244.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the

vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer

to “Hazard Warning Flasher” �P152.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and freez-

ing temperatures. Blades of this type give

superior wiping performance in snowy

conditions. Be sure to use blades that are

suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion Protection

s08ai03

Refer to “Corrosion Protection” �P450.

Winter Driving

404

(407,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Snow Tires

s08ai04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win-

ter tire(s), all four tires must be

the same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechan-

ical damage could be caused to

the drivetrain of the car, and

affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” which are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving. In winter, it may be possible to

enhance performance through use of tires

designed specifically for winter driving

conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

& Tire Chains

s08ai05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of clear-

ance between the tires and vehicle

body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of

another type of traction device (such as

spring chains) may be acceptable if use

on your vehicle is recommended by the

device manufacturer, taking into ac-

count tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

– CONTINUED –

Winter Driving

405

Driving Tips

(408,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with a

traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the Vehicle

s08ai06

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the select

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the

best possible traction, avoid spinning the

wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission in

2nd than 1st.

For information on holding the transmis-

sion in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of

Manual Mode” �P330.

8-11. Loading Your Vehicle

s08aj

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on a

folded rear seatback, in the cargo

area. Doing so may result in serious

injury.

WARNING

. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure long items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the

extended cargo area cover. Such

items could tumble forward in the

event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

Loading Your Vehicle

406

(409,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle Capacity Weight

s08aj01

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

s08aj02

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door pillar shows GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR

(Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to each

axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

– CONTINUED –

Loading Your Vehicle

407

Driving Tips

(410,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle

scale, found at a commercial weighing

station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof Rail (If Equipped)

s08aj04

1 Roof rails

Cargo can be carried on the roof after

securing the crossbars to the roof rails and

installing an appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing crossbars and a

carrying attachment, follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is

designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars

and carrying attachment) of no more than

176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to exceed

your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.

CAUTION

. When using a carrying attach-

ment, make sure that the total

carrying load of the cargo, cross-

bars and carrying attachment

does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg).

Overloading may cause damage

to the vehicle.

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rails must be used together

with the crossbars and any ap-

propriate carrying attachment

that may be needed. The roof

rails must never be used alone

to carry cargo. Otherwise, da-

mage to the roof or paint, or a

dangerous road hazard due to

loss of cargo could result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting driving

characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

Loading Your Vehicle

408

(411,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Roof Molding and Crossbar

(If Equipped)

s08aj06

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof molding must be used to-

gether with a roof crossbar kit

and the appropriate carrying at-

tachment. Otherwise, damage to

the roof or paint or a dangerous

road hazard due to loss of cargo

could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

Cargo can be carried after securing the

roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and

installing the appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing the roof crossbar kit,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

When carrying cargo on the roof using the

roof crossbar kit and carrying attachments,

never exceed the maximum load limit as

explained below. You should also be

careful that the vehicle does not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

and front and rear Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR). For information about

loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,

refer to “Loading Your Vehicle” �P406.

The maximum total load on the roof

(including crossbars, carrying attachments

and cargo) must not exceed 176 lbs (80

kg). Refer to the crossbar installation

instructions for the maximum crossbar

capacity. Place the heaviest load at the

bottom, close to the roof, and evenly

distribute the cargo. Always properly se-

cure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

s08aj0601

When installing any carrying attachments

such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike

carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo

basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s

instructions of the load capacity and make

sure that the attachments are securely

installed. Use only attachments designed

specifically for the crossbars. Before oper-

ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo

is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

– CONTINUED –

Loading Your Vehicle

409

Driving Tips

(412,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Removal and installation of the

crossbars

s08aj0602

Each of the two roof moldings has two

mounting points for crossbars. Each

mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use

a screwdriver to remove the covers. When

installing the crossbars on the roof mold-

ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

& Roof Tent

s08aj14

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof

can adversely affect handling, brak-

ing, and rollover resistance. The

vehicle must never be driven with a

total roof rail load in excess of 176

lbs (80 kg).

CAUTION

. The roof rail load limit for sta-

tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))

applies only when the vehicle is

parked and the load is evenly

distributed left/right and front/

rear and the roof crossbars and

roof tent are tightly secured to

the vehicle. If these conditions

are not met, the load limit will be

lower.

. The maximum load limit of the

roof crossbars must be obtained

from the manufacturer or retailer

of the roof rack. When driving the

vehicle, the maximum roof rail

load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the

crossbar load limit (whichever is

lower).

Roof tents may be used under certain

conditions at your own risk.

! When driving the vehicle

s08aj1401

The total weight on the roof rails, including

the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not

exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176

lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.

Loading Your Vehicle

410

(413,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

A: Roof rails

B: Roof crossbars

C: Roof tent

B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)

! When the vehicle is parked on level

ground

s08aj1402

A: Roof rails

B: Roof crossbars

C: Roof tent

D: Occupants in the roof tent

The total weight on the roof rails –

including the roof crossbars, roof tent,

and all occupants and contents in the roof

tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s

roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly

distributed, or the load limit of the roof

crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A).

B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause

damage to the vehicle or racking system.

The vehicle must never be driven with

occupants in the roof tent. Before the

vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo

must be removed from the roof tent and

the roof rail load must be restored to within

the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).

Refer to the user manual that accompa-

nied the roof tent for important safety

information and instructions on the proper

installation and use of the tent.

Loading Your Vehicle

411

Driving Tips

(414,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

8-12. Trailer Hitch (Dealer

Option)

s08ak

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. For possible recommenda-

tions and limitations, refer to

“Trailer Towing” �P414.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the tow load exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg).

. Be sure your trailer has safety

chains and that each chain will

hold the trailer’s maximum gross

weight. Towing trailers without

safety chains could create a traf-

fic safety hazard if the trailer

separates from the hitch due to

coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin and

safety pin for positive locking

placement before towing a trailer.

If the ball mount separates from

the receiver the trailer could

become loose and create a traffic

safety hazard.

. Although towing regulations for

trailer or caravan vehicles vary

by state/region, all regulations

agree that specifications such

as the maximum gross trailer

weight must not exceed the les-

ser of the following:

– Maximum gross trailer weight

– Maximum gross tongue

weight

– GVWR

– GAWR

. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will

also negate your insurance cov-

erage and/or may violate the state

road and traffic acts and regula-

tions.

. It is recommended to only use the

Genuine Subaru Ball Mount de-

veloped for use with this trailer

hitch available at your Subaru

dealership. Use the hitch only as

a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch.

. The standard bumper beam must

be installed after you remove the

trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU

dealer for purchase of a standard

bumper beam if you do not have

the original.

. Safety performance is decreased

and there is increased risk of

injury to passengers in the case

of an accident if the SUBARU

genuine trailer hitch or a stan-

dard bumper beam is not in-

stalled. One of them must always

be installed on the vehicle.

. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is

not possible to install the rear

towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

When towing a trailer with brakes

Maximum gross trai-

ler weight

Maximum gross ton-

gue weight

1,500 lbs (680 kg)

150 lbs (68 kg)

When towing a trailer without brakes

Maximum gross trai-

ler weight

Maximum gross ton-

gue weight

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

100 lbs (43 kg)

Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option)

412

(415,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

Towing” �P414.

& Connecting a SUBARU Gen-

uine Trailer Hitch

s08ak01

1 Ball mount

2 Hitch pin

3 Safety pin

A Hitch receiver tube

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located

on the hitch receiver tube so that the

pin passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin through the hole

located on the hitch pin securely.

4. Check the ball mount assembly by

pulling on it to make sure it does not

come off the hitch receiver.

1 Hitch ball installation point

2 Hooks for safety chains

5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball

that is appropriate for the ball mount

and your trailer. The hitch ball must be

securely installed on the ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

– CONTINUED –

Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option)

413

Driving Tips

(416,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any

part of the vehicle other than the

safety chain hooks.

1 Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

electrical wire harness by individually

activating the brake, stop and turn

signal lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer electrical

wire harness before launching or re-

trieving a watercraft.

& If Not Towing a Trailer

s08ak02

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch electrical wire

harness to protect against possible

damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal

grease.

8-13. Trailer Towing

s08al

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle.

Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to

assist you in purchasing a hitch and other

necessary towing equipment appropriate

for your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-

ment other than genuine SUBARU towing

equipment. In addition, be sure to follow

the instructions for proper installation and

use provided by the trailer or caravan’s

manufacturer.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

Trailer Towing

414

(417,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Warranties and Maintenance

s08al01

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused by

trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow

a trailer, more frequent maintenance will

be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer be

towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with

any new powertrain component (engine,

transmission, differential, wheel bearings,

etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of

driving.

& Maximum Load Limits

s08al02

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

! Total trailer weight

s08al0201

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum total trailer weight in the follow-

ing table.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer Towing

415

Driving Tips

(418,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an

outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

750 lbs (340 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

s08al0202

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-

bined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Trailer Towing

416

(419,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Certification label

GVWR of your vehicle that is given by

SUBARU is shown on the certification

label located at the bottom of driver’s side

door pillar of your vehicle.

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

s08al0203

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR of your

vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also

shown on the certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

! Tongue load

s08al0204

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and

does not exceed the maximum value. For

details about the trailer tongue load, refer

to “Trailer hitch” “Trailer Hitch (Dealer

Option)” �P412.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer Towing

417

Driving Tips

(420,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Jack

2 Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustration

above. When weighing the tongue load, be

sure to position the towing coupler at the

height at which it would be during actual

towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper

distribution of the load in the trailer. Never

load the trailer with more weight in the

back than in the front; approximately 60

percent of the trailer load should be in the

front and approximately 40 percent in the

rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as

possible on both the left and right sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

& Trailer Hitches (Dealer Op-

tion)

s08al03

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

Trailer Towing

418

(421,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

hitch or other trailer towing

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than a

genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU trailer hitch is available from

your SUBARU dealer.

& When You Do Not Tow a

Trailer

s08al14

CAUTION

. The housing should be kept dirt

and corrosion-free at the points

of contact. The surfaces only

require cleaning with a cloth.

Grease or other lubricants

should never be used.

. If the ball is not installed, the

plastic insert and/or bumper cov-

er should then be installed for

protection and to prevent it from

getting dirty.

When the ball is not used, place the ball

cap and store securely.

& Connecting a Trailer

s08al04

! Trailer brakes

s08al0401

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-

commended, and must be installed prop-

erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-

form with Federal, state/province and/or

other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

s08al0402

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Two chains should be used in

total, one to the right side and the other to

the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains

crossing each other under the trailer

tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping

onto the ground in the event the trailer

tongue should disconnect from the hitch

ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains

taking tight turn situations into account;

however, be careful not to let them drag on

the ground.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer Towing

419

Driving Tips

(422,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Outside mirrors

s08al0403

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard outside mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard outside mirrors, use towing mirrors

that conform with Federal, state/province

and/or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

s08al0404

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s

electrical system requires modifications to

the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its

capacity and accommodate wiring

changes. To ensure the trailer lights are

connected properly, please consult your

SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-

tion of the turn signals and the brake lights

each time you connect a trailer to your

vehicle.

! Tires

s08al0405

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tempor-

ary spare tire is used. The temporary

spare tire is not designed to sustain

the towing load. Use of the tempor-

ary spare tire when towing can result

in failure of the spare tire and/or less

stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”

�P507.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications. Also check federal, state,

province and/or other applicable regula-

tions.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representative or profes-

sional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire

is firmly secured.

& Trailer Towing Tips

s08al05

CAUTION

. For models equipped with the

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

driving support systems, when

towing a trailer, touch “Rear Ve-

hicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)” to

deactivate the system. The sys-

tem may not operate properly due

to the blocked radar waves. For

details about how to turn on/off

the BSD/RCTA, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P203.

. For models equipped with the

Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system, consult your

SUBARU dealer for additional

information about towing a trai-

ler.

Trailer Towing

420

(423,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly

country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent when compared to normal

operation. For safety’s sake, you

should employ extra caution

when towing a trailer and you

should never drive at excessive

speeds. You should also keep the

following tips in mind:

. The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trai-

ler).

If your vehicle is equipped with SI-DRIVE,

and when towing a trailer on an uphill

slope, do not drive in the Intelligent (I)

mode. It is recommend that you drive in the

Sport (S) mode. However, it is possible to

tow a trailer in any mode of the SI-DRIVE

on a downhill slope.

! Before starting out on a trip

s08al0501

. Check the towing regulations for trailer

or caravan vehicles that vary by state/

region. Failure to comply with the

procedures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will also

negate your insurance coverage and/or

may violate the state road and traffic

acts and regulations.

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow

the trailer.

. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-

tally with the trailer attached. If the

vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front

and down at the rear, check the total

trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue

load again, then confirm that the load

and its distribution are acceptable.

. Check that the tire rating and pressures

are correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that:

– The trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– The trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’s brake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is

operated.

– The safety chains are connected

properly.

– All cargo in the trailer is secured

safely in position.

– The outside mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a

significant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combina-

tion before starting out on a trip. In an

area free of traffic, practice turning,

stopping and backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

s08al0502

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss

of control.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

larger than normal turning radius be-

cause the trailer wheels will be closer

than the vehicle wheels to the inside of

the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could

hit your vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer,

causing sway. Crosswinds can be due

to weather conditions or the passing of

large trucks or buses. If swaying oc-

curs, firmly grip the steering wheel and

promptly begin decelerating your vehi-

cle at a gradual pace.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer Towing

421

Driving Tips

(424,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. When passing other vehicles, consider-

able distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can

be difficult and requires experience.

Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and

grip the bottom of the steering wheel

with one hand.

To reverse around a corner, perform the

following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-

site direction to the way you want to

turn.

2. Once the trailer begins to swing

around, straighten the steering wheel.

3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-

tion.

4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line

with the trailer, then straighten the

steering again.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop

towing the trailer and have repairs

performed immediately by your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

! Driving on grades

s08al0503

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if

necessary, use 1st gear) in order to

utilize the engine braking effect and

prevent overheating of your vehicle’s

brakes. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automati-

cally to protect the engine from over-

heating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather,

because the engine and transmission

are relatively prone to overheating, pay

attention to the following items.

– Engine coolant temperature gauge

– AT OIL TEMP warning light

Trailer Towing

422

(425,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. If any of the following conditions occur,

immediately turn off the air conditioner

and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe

location. Refer to “If You Park Your

Vehicle in an Emergency” �P426 and

“Engine Overheating” �P435.

– Engine coolant temperature gauge

needle approaches the OVERHEAT

zone. Refer to “Engine Coolant

Temperature Gauge” �P154.

– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP

Warning Light” �P162.

. Do not use the accelerator pedal to stay

stationary on an uphill slope instead of

using the parking brake or foot brake.

That may cause the transmission fluid

to overheat.

! Parking on a grade

s08al0504

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until

the blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into the “P” position and shut off

the engine.

Trailer Towing

423

Driving Tips

(426,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(427,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s09

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ... 426

9-2. Temporary Spare Tire..................................... 426

9-3. Maintenance Tools.......................................... 428

Tool Locations.................................................... 428

9-4. Flat Tires ......................................................... 429

Changing a Flat Tire ........................................... 429

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 432

TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................433

9-5. Jump Starting ................................................. 433

How to Jump Start..............................................434

9-6. Engine Overheating ........................................ 435

If Steam Is Coming from the Engine

Compartment.................................................... 435

If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine

Compartment.................................................... 435

9-7. Towing ............................................................. 436

Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes ............ 436

Using a Flat-Bed Truck ....................................... 439

Towing with All Wheels on the Ground ............... 439

9-8. Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic

Parking Brake Cannot Be Released ............440

9-9. Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob

Does Not Operate Properly ..........................441

Locking and Unlocking....................................... 441

Switching Power Status ..................................... 441

Starting Engine .................................................. 442

9-10. Rear Gate – If the Rear Gate Cannot Be

Opened...........................................................442

9-11. Malfunctions of the Center Information

Display ...........................................................443

9-12. Moonroof (If Equipped) – If the Moonroof

Does Not Close .............................................445

9-13. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident...445

To Restart the Engine When Involved in

an Accident...................................................... 445

Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation

When Involved in an Accident .......................... 445

In Case of Emergency

(428,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle

in an Emergency

s09aa

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pressing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pressing the switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher are

flashing, the corresponding turn signal

indicator will also flash.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Temporary Spare Tire

s09ab

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

. For U.S.-spec. models, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel

rim is replaced without the origi-

nal pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire

pressure warning light will illumi-

nate steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute. This

indicates the tire pressure mon-

itoring system (TPMS) is unable

to monitor all four road wheels.

Contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible for tire and

sensor replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.

If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency

426

(429,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

. Never use any temporary spare

tire other than the original. Using

other sizes may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle.

. Always conform to the following

instructions when using the tem-

porary spare tire. Otherwise, a

seriously dangerous situation

may occur.

The temporary spare tire is stored under

the under-floor storage compartment.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. For the correct pressure,

refer to “Temporary Spare Tires” �P508.

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

. Drive with caution when the temporary

spare tire is installed. Avoid hard

acceleration and braking, or fast cor-

nering, as control of the vehicle may be

lost.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire

size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clear-

ance is reduced.

1 Tread wear indicator bar

2 Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with

a rear wheel and install the temporary

spare tire in place of the removed rear

wheel.

Temporary Spare Tire

427

In Case of Emergency

(430,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

9-3. Maintenance Tools

s09ah

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

& Tool Locations

s09ah15

1 Jack handle

1 Wheel nut wrench*

2 Screwdriver

3 Jack

4 Towing hook (eye bolt)

*: The shape of the wheel nut wrench differs

depending on the vehicle model.

The maintenance tools are stored under

the under-floor storage compartment. For

the method to use the jack, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P429.

Maintenance Tools

428

(431,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

9-4. Flat Tires

s09ac

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a Flat Tire

s09ac01

WARNING

. Use only the jack and the jack

handle provided with your vehi-

cle. The jack supplied with the

vehicle is designed only for chan-

ging a tire. Never get under the

vehicle while supporting the ve-

hicle with this jack.

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in

serious injury or death.

. Before jacking up the vehicle, be

sure that there are no occupants

or cargo on board.

. Do not jack up the vehicle with an

object on or underneath the jack.

The jack can be unstable and this

can result in a severe accident.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out of

the jacking point due to a jolt and

this can result in serious injury or

death.

. All passengers must exit the

vehicle before you raise it with

the jack. Raising the vehicle with

someone inside of it could result

in serious injury or death.

. Do not start the vehicle while it is

supported by the jack. Doing so

could result in serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

Do not hit and bend the disc rotor

backing plate when removing and

installing the tire. A bent backing

plate may scrape against the disc

rotor and cause noise while the

vehicle is in motion.

NOTE

Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking

up the vehicle using a garage jack.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

select lever in the “P” position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

unload all occupants and luggage from

the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat

tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the floor of the cargo area. Refer

to “Maintenance Tools” �P428.

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

429

In Case of Emergency

(432,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

NOTE

. Make sure that the jack is well

lubricated before using it.

. To take out the tools and spare tire,

store the cargo area cover to the

original position and open the un-

der-floor storage. Refer to “Mainte-

nance Tools” �P428.

6. Take out the under-floor storage com-

partment and turn the attaching bolt

counterclockwise, then take the spare

tire out.

NOTE

Carefully read “Temporary Spare Tire”

�P426 and strictly follow the instruc-

tions.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the

flat tire.

9. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the

jack head engages firmly into the jack-

up point.

10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the

Flat Tires

430

(433,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

vehicle higher than necessary.

11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and

hub with a cloth.

13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts when the spare tire is

installed. This could cause the nuts

to become loose and lead to an

accident.

14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in

the illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque,

refer to “Tires” �P507. Never use your

foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe

extension on the wrench because you

may exceed the specified torque. Have

the wheel nut torque checked at the

nearest automotive service facility.

1 Support holder

16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Install with the support

holder facing upward and secure the

flat tire by firmly tightening the attach-

ing bolt.

NOTE

If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try

turning the support holder upside

down.

17. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel

nut wrench in their storage locations.

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

431

In Case of Emergency

(434,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s09ac02

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused by running

over a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire inflation

pressure label on the door

pillar on the driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P429.

. When a replacement tire is

mounted or a wheel rim is re-

placed without the original pres-

sure sensor/transmitter being

transferred, the low tire pressure

warning light will illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

Flat Tires

432

(435,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s09ac05

This screen displays each tire pressure.

Refer to “Basic Screens” �P185.

9-5. Jump Starting

s09ad

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area

with water immediately. Get med-

ical help if the fluid has entered

your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

. Do not jump start unless cables in

suitable condition are available.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, drive belt

and any other moving engine

parts. Removing rings, watches

and ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

– CONTINUED –

Jump Starting

433

In Case of Emergency

(436,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& How to Jump Start

s09ad01

A Booster battery

B Strut mounting nut

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles

touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the dis-

charged battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of the other cable

to the negative (−) terminal of the

booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any

other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the

Jump Starting

434

(437,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

vehicle that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-6. Engine Overheating

s09ae

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has

fully cooled down. When the engine

is hot, the coolant is under pressure.

Removing the cap while the engine

is still hot could release a spray of

boiling hot coolant, which could

burn you very seriously.

CAUTION

If the engine overheats, the engine

speed or the vehicle speed may be

reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe

place immediately.

& If Steam Is Coming from the

Engine Compartment

s09ae01

Turn off the engine and get everyone away

from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If No Steam Is Coming from

the Engine Compartment

s09ae02

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine Coolant” �P468.

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment. Refer to “Engine Hood”

�P462.

3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning.

If the fan is not turning, immediately

turn off the engine and contact your

authorized dealer for repair.

4. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays in the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

5. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”

mark.

6. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill

the radiator with coolant.

– CONTINUED –

Engine Overheating

435

In Case of Emergency

(438,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

9-7. Towing

s09af

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with the

front wheels raised off the ground

while the rear wheels are on the

ground, or with the rear wheels

raised off the ground while the front

wheels are on the ground. This will

cause the vehicle to spin away due

to the operation or deterioration of

the center differential.

If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-

mends it be done by your SUBARU dealer

or a commercial towing service.

& Towing Hook and Tie-Down

Hooks/Holes

s09af01

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency.

SUBARU recommends towing be done

by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-

cial towing service.

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hook and tie-down hooks/holes.

Never use suspension parts or

other parts of the body for towing

or tie-down purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hole clo-

sest to the muffler under the

vehicle for towing purposes.

Front towing hook:

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook

and jack handle from the under-floor

storage compartment.

Towing

436

(439,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-

head screwdriver into the cutout of

the cover and pry open the cover.

3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until the threads can no

longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor

storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply an excessive load to the tow-

ing hook.

Rear towing hook:

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook

and jack handle from the under-floor

storage compartment.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-

head screwdriver into the cutout of

– CONTINUED –

Towing

437

In Case of Emergency

(440,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

the cover and pry open the cover.

3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until its thread can no

longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor

storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the fuel pump

shut off function when the vehi-

cle is struck from behind.

. For vehicles equipped with the

BSD/RCTA, turn off the BSD/

RCTA before towing a trailer. A

trailer will block the system’s

radar waves and cause the BSD/

RCTA not to function correctly.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply an excessive load to the tow-

ing hook.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Front tie-down hooks are for tying down

the vehicle. They are not for towing.

Towing

438

(441,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Rear tie-down holes:

1 Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,

return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

& Using a Flat-Bed Truck

s09af02

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each

safety chain should be equally tigh-

tened and care must be taken not to

pull the chains so tightly that the

suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

Transport by flat-bed truck may

cause the headlights to become

misaligned. In such a case, have

the headlight alignment checked by

a SUBARU dealer after transporting

the vehicle by flat-bed truck.

& Towing with All Wheels on the

Ground

s09af03

– CONTINUED –

Towing

439

In Case of Emergency

(442,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the

direction of the wheels will be

locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not run-

ning. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Sometime damaged vehicles can-

not be towed because of their

damaged condition. In that case,

use a flat-bed truck for transpor-

tation.

. The traveling speed must be

limited to less than 20 mph (32

km/h) and the traveling distance

to less than 31 miles (50 km). For

greater speeds and distances,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Use a flat-bed truck if there are

long distance downgrades or

steep slopes. However, do not

apply the brake pedal for a long

time because the engine braking

will not work while towing. Doing

so could overheat the brake.

. Drive carefully and do not make

an impact on the towing rope by

suddenly starting.

. Use a specific towing rope for

towing. If wire ropes and metal

chains are needed to be used for

towing, wrap the contact portion

of the bumper with cloth to pro-

tect it from damage.

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

9-8. Electronic Parking Brake

– If the Electronic Parking

Brake Cannot Be Released

s09an

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have

your SUBARU dealer release the electro-

nic parking brake.

Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released

440

(443,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

9-9. Access Key Fob – If Ac-

cess Key Fob Does Not Op-

erate Properly

s09ap

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters

away from the area between the

access key fob and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key fob and the push-

button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or a low battery condition

of the access key fob.

. Locking/unlocking all the doors includ-

ing rear gate

. Switching the power status

. Starting the engine

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged, replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob” �P497.

& Locking and Unlocking

s09ap01

1 Release button

2 Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

emergency key in the procedure described

in “Locking and Unlocking from the Out-

side” �P128.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

attach the emergency key back to the

access key fob.

& Switching Power Status

s09ap02

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the

push-button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is

completed, a chime (ding) will sound.

At the same time, the status of the

push-button ignition switch changes to

either of the following.

. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

“ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

– CONTINUED –

Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

441

In Case of Emergency

(444,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated,

press the push-button ignition switch

with the brake pedal released. The

status of the push-button ignition

switch then changes to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Starting Engine

s09ap03

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the

push-button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is

completed, a chime (ding) will sound.

At the same time, the push-button

ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

5. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position,

while depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even though

the above procedure was followed

precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

9-10. Rear Gate – If the Rear

Gate Cannot Be Opened

s09ag

In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by pressing the rear gate opener

button, you can open it from inside the

cargo area.

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch. Remove the access cover at

the bottom-center of the rear gate trim

using flat-head screwdriver.

Rear Gate – If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened

442

(445,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate lock

release lever with your fingers be-

cause doing so may cause an injury.

Always use a flat-head screwdriver

or a similar tool.

1 Rear gate lock release lever

2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to

the right position using a flat-head

screwdriver or a similar tool. Then the

rear gate will open.

9-11. Malfunctions of the

Center Information Display

s09av

If the following screens are displayed,

temporary errors or malfunctions may

occur in the center information display.

If they are only temporary errors, the

following procedure may help to eliminate

them.

Shutting down the screen

Freezing the screen

Blacking out the screen

– CONTINUED –

Malfunctions of the Center Information Display

443

In Case of Emergency

(446,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Error A

Error B

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn the ignition switch once to the

“LOCK/OFF” position, then start the

engine.

1 Volume button (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

1 Volume button (11.6-inch display models)

3. If the center information display cannot

be recovered even though the engine

has been restarted, press and hold the

volume button for more than 10 sec-

onds. The center information display

will start up again.

4. If the center information display is not

recovered by restarting it, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Malfunctions of the Center Information Display

444

(447,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

9-12. Moonroof (If Equipped)

– If the Moonroof Does Not

s09aj

If the moonroof does not close, have the

system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

9-13. If Your Vehicle Is In-

volved in an Accident

s09ar

& To Restart the Engine When

Involved in an Accident

s09ar02

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the engine. If you find that

fuel has leaked on the ground, do

not try to restart the engine. The fuel

system has been damaged and is in

need of repair. Immediately contact

the nearest automotive service facil-

ity. Consult your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an

impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump

shut off system stops supplying the fuel in

order to minimize fuel leakage. However,

depending on the impact conditions at the

time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off

system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to restart

the engine after the system is activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position.

2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the engine.

& Automatic Door Locking/Un-

locking Operation When In-

volved in an Accident

s09ar03

When the automatic door locking/unlock-

ing function is ON, all the doors will be

locked automatically while driving. For

further details, refer to “Automatic Door

Locking/Unlocking” �P131.

When the vehicle sustains a strong impact

which may trigger the airbags to deploy,

the door locks may be unlocked automa-

tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-

erally, an impact sustained from a rear end

collision does not trigger the airbags to

deploy. However if the impact is strong

enough to deploy the airbags, it can also

trigger the unlocking function.

Under such circumstance, the automatic

door locking/unlocking function will be

– CONTINUED –

Moonroof – If the Moonroof Does Not Close

445

In Case of Emergency

(448,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

suspended and the doors will remain

unlocked.

Confirm the safety of the surroundings first

and carry out the following to retrieve the

automatic door locking/unlocking function.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

NOTE

Depending on the severity of the im-

pact, the emergency unlocking may not

function.

CAUTION

If the following occur, there may be a

malfunction in the system.

Have the system inspected by a

SUBARU dealer.

. The doors unlock automatically

while driving.

. With all doors shut, the doors

unlock when pressing the lock

side of the power door locking

switch.

. The automatic door locking/un-

locking function does not oper-

ate.

If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident

446

(449,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s10

10-1. Exterior Care ................................................. 448

Washing .............................................................448

Waxing and Polishing ......................................... 449

Cleaning Alloy Wheels ........................................449

10-2. Corrosion Protection .................................... 450

Most Common Causes of Corrosion....................450

To Help Prevent Corrosion..................................450

10-3. Cleaning the Interior .....................................451

Seat Fabric Material ........................................... 451

Leather Seat Materials........................................ 451

Synthetic Leather Upholstery ............................. 452

Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches,

Combination Meter, and Other Plastic

Surface ............................................................ 452

Center Information Display ................................. 452

Appearance Care

(450,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

10-1. Exterior Care

s10aa

& Washing

s10aa01

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes, drive

the vehicle at a safe speed while

lightly pressing the brake pedal

to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and areas adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction

of the power steering.

. When washing inner fenders, un-

derbody, bumpers and protrud-

ing objects such as exhaust

pipes and exhaust finishers, be

careful to prevent injuries from

contacting sharp ends.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

. If the climate control system is

operating when you wash the

vehicle, do not set the air inlet

selection of the climate control to

outside air circulation mode.

There is a risk that water may

enter the vehicle through the air

inlets.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in an

automatic car wash, make sure before-

hand that the car wash is of suitable

type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the

vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-

light.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,

and bird droppings should be washed off

by using a light detergent, as required. If

you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand

brush when washing down underbody,

inner fenders and suspension to effec-

tively remove mud and dirt off.

! Washing the underbody

s10aa0101

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,

floor pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside

of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water

at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful

effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to mud

and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-

edged tool to remove caked mud.

Exterior Care

448

(451,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing sus-

pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

! Using a warm water washer

s10aa0102

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle

and the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers

are of the high temperature, high

pressure type, and they can damage

or deform the resin parts such as

mouldings, or cause water to leak into

the vehicle.

& Waxing and Polishing

s10aa02

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-

face with a fine-grained compound. Never

polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always

polish in only one direction. A No. 2000

grain compound is recommended. Never

use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser

grained compounds have a smaller grain-

size number and could damage the paint.

After polishing with a compound, coat with

wax to restore the original luster. Frequent

polishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removing

the paint layer and exposing the under-

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to

contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto

paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

& Cleaning Alloy Wheels

s10aa04

. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of

any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left

on too long, it may be difficult to clean

off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to clean

the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thor-

oughly with water. Do not clean the

wheels with a stiff brush or expose them

to a high-speed washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy

wheels) with water as soon as possible

when it has been splashed with sea

– CONTINUED –

Exterior Care

449

Appearance Care

(452,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or

other agents.

10-2. Corrosion Protection

s10ab

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most Common Causes of

Corrosion

s10ab01

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas

where there is more salt in the air, or in

areas where there is considerable

industrial pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range

just above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To Help Prevent Corrosion

s10ab02

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces.

. Roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. Mud, sand, or gravel

. Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

Corrosion Protection

450

(453,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-

age. In such a garage, corrosion can be

caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into

the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the Interior

s10ac

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

& Seat Fabric Material

s10ac01

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung

cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If

the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution

of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry

thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially available fabric cleaner.

Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

make sure it does not affect the fabric

adversely. Use the cleaner according to its

instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather Seat Materials

s10ac02

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause leather to become

brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain

its resiliency, leather should be cleaned

monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.

Before cleaning leather upholstery, va-

cuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and

lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm

water and mild soap, taking care not to

soak the leather or allow water to pene-

trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle

circular motion while cleaning the leather -

do not rub or apply extreme pressure.

Wipe the leather again with another clean,

slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue

and dry with a soft cloth.

Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt

spots may be treated with a commercial

leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning

solvents, leather oils, varnishes or

polishes on your leather as it will dry out

the leather finish.

– CONTINUED –

Cleaning the Interior

451

Appearance Care

(454,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

You will discover that each leather seat

section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,

which is characteristic of genuine leather.

& Synthetic Leather Upholstery

s10ac03

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or gasoline must never be

used on leather or synthetic interior

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Instrument Panel, Console

Panel, Switches, Combina-

tion Meter, and Other Plastic

Surface

s10ac04

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the

instrument panel, center console, combi-

nation meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or gasoline, or

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents that

contain silicone on the vehicle

audio system, electrical compo-

nents of the air-conditioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

& Center Information Display

s10ac11

To clean the center information display,

wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft

cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely

dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened

with neutral detergent then carefully wipe

off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the display(s).

Doing so could damage the moni-

tor’s components.

. Do not wipe the display(s) with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, gasoline, or

any other volatile substance.

Such cleaning fluid could erase

the lettering on the switches on

the display(s).

Cleaning the Interior

452

(455,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(456,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(457,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s11

11-1. Maintenance Schedule ................................. 457

11-2. Maintenance Precautions ............................. 457

Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine

Compartment.................................................... 458

When Checking or Servicing in the Engine

Compartment.................................................... 459

When Checking or Servicing in the Engine

Compartment While the Engine Is Running .......459

11-3. Maintenance Tips.......................................... 460

When Replacing Parts ........................................460

Removing and Reinstalling Clips ........................ 460

11-4. Engine Hood.................................................. 462

11-5. Engine Compartment Overview ................... 464

11-6. Engine Oil ...................................................... 465

Engine Oil Consumption ..................................... 465

Checking the Oil Level........................................ 465

Changing the Oil and Oil Filter ............................466

Recommended Grade and Viscosity.................... 467

Synthetic Oil....................................................... 467

11-7. Cooling System............................................. 467

Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections ................... 468

Engine Coolant................................................... 468

11-8. Air Cleaner Element...................................... 469

Replacing the Air Cleaner Element......................470

11-9. Spark Plugs ................................................... 471

Recommended Spark Plugs ................................ 471

11-10. Drive Belt ..................................................... 471

11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission

Fluid ............................................................... 471

11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear

Differential Gear Oil ......................................472

Recommended Grade and Viscosity ................... 472

11-13. Brake Fluid ...................................................472

Checking the Fluid Level .................................... 472

Recommended Brake Fluid................................. 473

11-14. Brake Pedal ..................................................473

11-15. Replacement of Brake Pad .........................473

Breaking-In of New Brake Pads .......................... 474

11-16. Tires and Wheels .........................................474

Types of Tires .................................................... 474

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 475

Tire Inspection ................................................... 476

Tire Pressures and Wear .................................... 477

Wheel Balance ................................................... 479

Wear Indicators.................................................. 479

Rotational Direction of Tires............................... 480

Tire Rotation ...................................................... 480

Tire Replacement ............................................... 481

Wheel Replacement............................................ 482

11-17. Alloy Wheels ................................................482

11-18. Windshield Washer Fluid ............................483

11-19. Replacement of Wiper Blades ....................484

Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly ..................... 485

Window Wiper Blade Rubber .............................. 486

Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly .................. 487

Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber...................... 487

11-20. Battery ..........................................................488

Maintenance and Service

(458,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-21. Fuses ........................................................... 490

11-22. Installation of Accessories......................... 491

11-23. Replacing Bulbs.......................................... 491

Headlights .......................................................... 492

Front Turn Signal Light, Position Light and

Front Side Marker Light (If Equipped)................ 492

Rear Combination Lights .................................... 492

Back-Up Light .................................................... 493

License Plate Light ............................................ 494

Other Bulbs ....................................................... 495

Adjusting Headlight Aim..................................... 495

11-24. Replacing Battery ........................................496

Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob................. 497

Replacing Battery of Transmitter ........................ 498

Maintenance and Service

(459,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-1. Maintenance Schedule

s11aa

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. For details, read the separate

“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada models

Some items of your vehicle are required to

be serviced at scheduled intervals. For

details about your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

11-2. Maintenance Precau-

tions

s11ab

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service by

yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this sec-

tion on general maintenance and service

for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle must NEVER be per-

formed on a single two-wheel

dynamometer or similar appara-

tus. Attempting to do so will

result in transmission damage

and in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an

accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance Schedule

457

Maintenance and Service

(460,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Wear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-

ter for these wiring. If your SRS

airbag or seatbelt pretensioner

needs service, consult your near-

est SUBARU dealer.

. Check the inside of the engine

compartment to see if there are

any cloths and tools left. If they

are left inside, they may be a

cause of malfunction and fire.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

& Before Checking or Servicing

in the Engine Compartment

s11ab01

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake to prevent the

vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan

may operate suddenly even when

the engine is stopped. If your

body or clothes come into con-

tact with a rotating fan, that could

result in serious injury. To avoid

risk of injury, perform the follow-

ing precautions.

– Models with push-button start

system:

Always turn the push-button

ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take

the access key fob out from

the vehicle.

– Models without push-button

start system:

Always remove the key from

the ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicing

on a vehicle equipped with a

remote engine start system tem-

porarily place that system in the

service mode to prevent it from

unexpectedly starting the engine.

Maintenance Precautions

458

(461,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& When Checking or Servicing

in the Engine Compartment

s11ab03

CAUTION

. Do not contact the belt cover

while checking the components

in the engine compartment.

Doing so may cause your hand

to slip off the belt cover and

result in an unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a burn

or other injury. Note that the oil

filter becomes very hot when the

engine is running and remains

hot for some time after the engine

has stopped.

& When Checking or Servicing

in the Engine Compartment

While the Engine Is Running

s11ab02

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, drive belt and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

1 Safety stand

For any maintenance and inspection per-

formed on AWD models which requires a

running engine and wheels turning, jack up

all four wheels or use free rollers to prevent

the vehicle from moving. Never race the

engine or brake suddenly.

Maintenance Precautions

459

Maintenance and Service

(462,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-3. Maintenance Tips

s11bi

& When Replacing Parts

s11bi04

For information about replacement parts

for maintenance, contact any authorized

SUBARU dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

& Removing and Reinstalling

Clips

s11bi01

Some clips and fender linings must be

removed before replacing the air cleaner

element or specific bulbs.

! Removing clips

s11bi0101

There are several types of clips used for

your vehicle.

! Type A and D clips

s11bi010107

Type A clips

Type D clips

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the clips with a flat-head

screwdriver using leverage.

Maintenance Tips

460

(463,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Type B clips

s11bi010102

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as shown

in the illustration.

2. Pull the protruded center portion to

remove the entire body of the clip.

! Type C clips

s11bi010103

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

! Reinstalling clips

s11bi0102

Type A clips

Type B clips

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance Tips

461

Maintenance and Service

(464,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Type C clips

Type D clips

Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of the

clip into the hole.

11-4. Engine Hood

s11ac

CAUTION

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine

hood becomes too heavy, the

stay may not be able to support

holding it open.

. Check that the end of the hood

prop is inserted into the slot. If it

is not inserted properly, the hood

may drop and cause injury.

NOTE

If the base of the hood prop is jammed,

put the hood prop back in position

without applying excessive force.

Opening the engine hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

position.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

Engine Hood

462

(465,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front

grille and the hood toward the left.

1 Grip

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Hold the grip for handling the hood

prop.

Closing the engine hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and

return the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm)

above its closed position and then let it

drop.

3. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Engine Hood

463

Maintenance and Service

(466,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-5. Engine Compartment Overview

s11ad

1 Brake fluid reservoir (page 472)

2 Main fuse box (page 490)

3 Battery (page 488)

4 Windshield washer tank (page 483)

5 Radiator cap (page 468)

6 Engine oil filler cap (page 465)

7 Engine coolant reservoir (page 468)

8 Engine oil filter (page 466)

9 Engine oil level gauge (page 465)

10 Coolant pipe cap (page 469)

11 Air cleaner case (page 469)

Engine Compartment Overview

464

(467,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-6. Engine Oil

s11ae

CAUTION

. If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then pull it out. Other-

wise, you may be injured acci-

dentally straining yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine Oil Consumption

s11ae07

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance in-

tervals:

. When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

. When engine braking is employed

(repeatedly)

. When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds (for extended periods of

time)

. When the engine is operated under

heavy loads (for extended periods of

time)

. When towing a trailer

. When the engine idles for extended

periods of time

. When the vehicle is operated in stop

and go and/or heavy traffic situations

. When the vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions

. When the vehicle accelerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more

frequently. Different drivers in the same

car may experience different results. If

your oil consumption rate is greater than

expected, contact your authorized

SUBARU dealer who may perform a test

under controlled conditions.

& Checking the Oil Level

s11ae01

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine. If you check the oil

level just after stopping the engine,

wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before

checking the level.

1 Oil level gauge

2 Oil filler cap

3 Oil filter

CAUTION

If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right and

left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you

may be injured accidentally strain-

ing yourself.

– CONTINUED –

Engine Oil

465

Maintenance and Service

(468,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

1 Full level

2 Low level

3 Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the

level gauge. The engine oil level must

be judged by the lowest of the two

levels. If the oil level is below the low

level mark, add oil so that the full level

is reached.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to touch the engine

oil filter when removing the oil

filler cap. Doing so may result in a

burn, a pinched finger, or may

cause some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,

do not add any additional oil above

the full level when the engine is cold.

. After adding or changing the engine

oil, warm up the engine and stop it

on a level surface, then start the

engine after a lapse of 1 minute or

more. Confirm that the warning light

has turned off after the engine has

started. Refer to “Engine Low Oil

Level Warning Light” �P162.

& Changing the Oil and Oil Filter

s11ae02

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driving in ex-

tremely cold weather.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-

trained expert. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for changing the

engine oil and oil filter. Fully trained

mechanics are on standby at a

SUBARU dealer to utilize the special

tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also,

used oils are properly disposed of.

. If performing oil replacement your-

self, observe the local regulations

and dispose of waste oil properly.

Engine Oil

466

(469,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Recommended Grade and

Viscosity

s11ae03

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine Oil” �P504.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

& Synthetic Oil

s11ae05

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using syn-

thetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

Oil” �P504. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-7. Cooling System

s11af

WARNING

. Never remove the radiator cap

until the engine has been shut off

and has cooled down completely.

Since the coolant is under pres-

sure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling

hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

. Be careful of the rotating cooling

fan when the engine hood is

open. When the engine tempera-

ture is high, the cooling fan in the

engine compartment may oper-

ate when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position, even if the

engine is stopped. Touching the

cooling fan while it is rotating

may result in injury.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

that does not require the first

change for 11 years/137,500

miles (11 years/220,000 km). Do

not mix this coolant with any

– CONTINUED –

Cooling System

467

Maintenance and Service

(470,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. When neces-

sary to top up the coolant for any

reason, use only SUBARU

SUPER COOLANT.

If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is

diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling Fan, Hose and Con-

nections

s11af03

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

1 Normal operating range

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Refer to “Engine Coolant Tem-

perature Gauge” �P154.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses” �P490. If the fuse is not

blown, have the cooling system checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

If the frequent addition of coolant is

necessary between vehicle service visits,

it is recommended that you have your

vehicle inspected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, da-

mage, or looseness.

& Engine Coolant

s11af02

! Checking the coolant level

s11af0201

1 “FULL” level mark

2 “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is

cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to

the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve

tank is empty, remove the radiator cap

and refill coolant up to just below the

filler neck as shown in the following

illustration.

Cooling System

468

(471,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Fill up to this level.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check

that the rubber gaskets inside the

radiator cap are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

s11af0202

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

11-8. Air Cleaner Element

s11ag

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters in-

take air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner

element is not installed when the

engine backfires, you could be

burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a filter

screen. When the air cleaner element is

perforated or removed, engine wear will be

excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is

unnecessary to clean or wash the air

cleaner element.

– CONTINUED –

Air Cleaner Element

469

Maintenance and Service

(472,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Replacing the Air Cleaner

Element

s11ag01

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under

extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1 Clips

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the

cover rearward while lifting it up.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

(both front and rear) with a damp cloth

and install a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the

air cleaner case (front).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE

Install the air cleaner element so that

the surface with “UPR” printed on it

faces upward.

Air Cleaner Element

470

(473,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-9. Spark Plugs

s11ah

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have the

spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

& Recommended Spark Plugs

s11ah01

Refer to “Electrical System” �P507.

11-10. Drive Belt

s11ai

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically because your

engine is equipped with an automatic belt

tension adjuster. However, replacement of

the drive belt should be done according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-11. Continuously Variable

Transmission Fluid

s11ay

There is no fluid level gauge. It is un-

necessary to check the continuously vari-

able transmission fluid level. However, if

necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer

for inspection.

Spark Plugs

471

Maintenance and Service

(474,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-12. Front Differential Gear

Oil and Rear Differential Gear

Oil

s11bl

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended Grade and

Viscosity

s11bl01

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to “Front

Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil”

�P506.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause a

decline in vehicle performance.

11-13. Brake Fluid

s11ao

& Checking the Fluid Level

s11ao01

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Visually check the brake fluid level of the

reservoir monthly on the even surface.

1 “MAX” level line

2 “MIN” level line

Be sure to check the brake fluid level from

the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level

is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed contain-

er.

Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil

472

(475,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Recommended Brake Fluid

s11ao02

Refer to “Fluids” �P506.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

11-14. Brake Pedal

s11ar

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

11-15. Replacement of Brake

Pad

s11at

CAUTION

. If you continue to drive despite

the scraping noise from the audi-

ble brake pad wear indicator, it

will result in the need for costly

brake rotor repair or replace-

ment.

. It is recommended that you dis-

connect the vehicle battery be-

fore replacing the brake pad.

However, it is dangerous to dis-

connect the vehicle battery. Have

your SUBARU dealer replace the

brake pad.

– CONTINUED –

Brake Pedal

473

Maintenance and Service

(476,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

The disc brakes have audible wear in-

dicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

& Breaking-In of New Brake

Pads

s11at01

When replacing the brake pad, use only

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-

ment, the new parts must be broken in.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

! Brake pad and lining

s11at0101

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph

(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal

lightly. Repeat this five or more times.

11-16. Tires and Wheels

s11av

& Types of Tires

s11av01

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

The factory-installed tires on your new

vehicle are all season tires.

! All season tires

s11av0101

All season tires are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However, all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

s11av0102

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on

slippery roads such as on snow-covered or

icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

Tires and Wheels

474

(477,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

s11av0103

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However,

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s11av02

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message by

sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not

react immediately to a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a blow-out caused

by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on

the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi-

cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9

kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for every difference of

108F (5.68C) between the temperature in

the garage and the temperature outside.

By way of example, the following table

shows the required tire pressures that

correspond to various outside tempera-

tures when the temperature in the garage

is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: 225/60R17 99H, 225/55R18 98V

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F (−128C) 38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)

−108F (−238C) 41 (280, 2.8)

39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not go off, the

tire pressure monitoring system may not

be functioning normally. In this event, go to

a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by an

increase in the outside air temperature or

by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to go off.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned on or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

– CONTINUED –

Tires and Wheels

475

Maintenance and Service

(478,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead, per-

form the following procedure. Other-

wise an accident involving serious

vehicle damage and serious perso-

nal injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while

gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure to

the COLD tire pressure shown on

the tire inflation pressure label on

the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, refer to “Flat Tires” �P429.

When a replacement tire is mounted

or a wheel rim is replaced without

the original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low tire

pressure warning light will illumi-

nate steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately one minute. This indi-

cates the TPMS is unable to monitor

all four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

! TPMS valve self-registration

s11av0201

When the wheels are replaced (such as

when installing snow tires) or when a new

TPMS valve is mounted on a new installed

wheel, you will need to perform TPMS

valve self-registration. Refer to the follow-

ing procedure to perform TPMS valve self-

registration.

1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves on

the vehicle.

2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified

value. For information about the spe-

cified value of the tire pressure, refer to

“Tires” �P507.

3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40

km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until

the low tire pressure warning light turns

off.

NOTE

. When installing TPMS valves, use

only genuine SUBARU parts.

. Registration of TPMS valves can

also be done at a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

& Tire Inspection

s11av03

Check on a daily basis that the tires

are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires

strike curbs or are subjected

to harsh treatment as when the

vehicle is driven on a rough

surface, they can suffer da-

mage that cannot be seen with

the naked eye. This type of

damage does not become evi-

dent until time has passed. Try

not to drive over curbs, pot-

holes or on other rough sur-

faces. If doing so is unavoid-

Tires and Wheels

476

(479,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

able, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less,

and approach the curbs as

squarely as possible. Also,

make sure the tires are not

pressed against the curb when

you park the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration

while driving or find it difficult

to steer the vehicle in a

straight line, one of the tires

and/or wheels may be da-

maged. Drive slowly to the

nearest authorized SUBARU

dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire Pressures and Wear

s11av04

Maintaining the correct tire pres-

sures helps to maximize the tires’

service lives and is essential for

good running performance. Check

and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month

and before any long journey.

Tire inflation pressure label

Check the tire pressures when the

tires are cold. Use a pressure

gauge to adjust the tire pressures

to the values shown on the tire

inflation pressure label. The tire

inflation pressure label is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Driving even a short distance

warms up the tires and increases

the tire pressures. Also, the tire

pressures are affected by the out-

side temperature. It is best to check

tire pressure outdoors before driv-

ing the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire

increases by approximately

4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

)

when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold

when the vehicle has been

parked for at least 3 hours or

has been driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires

to adjust pressure. Doing so

will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from

controllability and ride comfort, and

they cause the tires to wear abnor-

mally.

– CONTINUED –

Tires and Wheels

477

Maintenance and Service

(480,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Correctly inflated tires (tread

worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering

is responsive. Rolling resistance is

low, so fuel consumption is also

lower.

. Under inflated tires (tread worn at

shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel

consumption is also higher.

. Over inflated tires (tread worn in

center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road sur-

face bumps and dips, possibly

resulting in vehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly be-

come hot. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread

separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

Tires and Wheels

478

(481,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& Wheel Balance

s11av05

Each wheel was correctly balanced

when your vehicle was new, but the

wheels will become unbalanced as

the tires become worn during use.

Wheel imbalance causes the steer-

ing wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts

from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-

bility. It can also cause steering and

suspension system problems and

abnormal tire wear. If you suspect

that the wheels are not correctly

balanced, have them checked and

adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire

repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel align-

ment causes the tires to wear

on one side and reduces the

vehicle’s running stability.

Contact your SUBARU dealer

if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is de-

signed to hold each wheel at a

certain alignment (relative to the

other wheels and to the road) for

optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

& Wear Indicators

s11av06

1 New tread

2 Worn tread

3 Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible

when the depth of the tread grooves

decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A

tire must be replaced when the

tread wear indicator appears as a

solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indi-

cator becomes visible, the tire

– CONTINUED –

Tires and Wheels

479

Maintenance and Service

(482,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

is worn beyond the acceptable

limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at high

speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. The resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread

regularly and replace the tires

before their tread wear indicators

become visible.

& Rotational Direction of Tires

s11av11

Example of rotational direction

marked on the sidewall

1 Front

If the tires have specific rotational

direction, refer to the arrow marked

on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing for-

ward direction when the wheels are

fitted.

& Tire Rotation

s11av07

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-

unidirectional tires

1 Front

Tires and Wheels

480

(483,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Vehicles equipped with unidi-

rectional tires

1 Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to

wheel. Move the tires to the posi-

tions shown in the illustration each

time they are rotated. For the tire

rotation schedule, refer to the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tire at the time of rotation. After

tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-

sures and make sure the wheel nuts

are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km), check the wheel

nuts again and retighten any nut

that has become loose.

& Tire Replacement

s11av08

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they

cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires

fitted as standard equipment are optimally

matched to the characteristics of the

vehicle and were selected to give the best

possible combination of running perfor-

mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is

essential for every tire to have a size and

construction matching those shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. For more

details about tire inflation pressure, refer

to “Tires” �P507.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechan-

ical damage could be caused to

the drivetrain of the car, and

– CONTINUED –

Tires and Wheels

481

Maintenance and Service

(484,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel Replacement

s11av09

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to

change a flat tire, always check the

tightness of the wheel nuts after driving

approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If

any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

11-17. Alloy Wheels

s11bm

Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-

maged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels is removed and

replaced for tire rotation or to change a

flat, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately

600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is

loose, tighten it to the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU

parts designed for alloy wheels.

. When stacking and storing removed

tires, place shock-absorbing material

between the tires to protect the wheels

from becoming scratched.

Alloy Wheels

482

(485,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-18. Windshield Washer

Fluid

s11ax

Windshield washer fluid warning light

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning light will appear.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid

as follows.

1 “FULL” mark

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark

on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, use

an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid.

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

If you fill the windshield washer tank with a

fluid with a different concentration from the

one used previously, purge the old fluid

from the piping between the windshield

washer tank and washer nozzles by

operating the washer for a certain period

of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of

the fluid remaining in the piping is too low

for the outside temperature, it may freeze

and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the windshield washer tank.

– CONTINUED –

Windshield Washer Fluid

483

Maintenance and Service

(486,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Be careful foreign matter does

not contaminate the washer fluid

when filling the tank. Contamina-

tion could cause malfunctions,

such as clogging the pump.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

11-19. Replacement of Wiper

Blades

s11az

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer

surface of the windshield and rear window

using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not,

however, use detergent to clean the blade

rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth

(and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive

cleaner) when you clean the blade rub-

bers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade

strongly, the black coating component will

peel off, which will cause the wiper to

judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that

the rubber has not come loose. After

cleaning the window glass and wiper blade

rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean

water. Rinse the window until the water

does not form beads on the glass. This

indicates that the glass is clean.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. When you wish to raise the pas-

senger-side wiper arm, first raise

the driver-side wiper arm. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its original position. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

. When returning the raised wipers

to the original positions, return

the wipers slowly on the wind-

shield by hand. Returning the

wipers from the detached posi-

tions by the spring operation

might change the shape of the

wiper arm or scratch the wind-

shield.

. While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not

return the wiper arms to the

original positions. Otherwise,

the windshield surface may be

Replacement of Wiper Blades

484

(487,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

& Windshield Wiper Blade As-

sembly

s11az01

NOTE

Do not lower the wiper arm while the

wiper blade assembly is removed.

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

First raise the driver’s side wiper arm

and then raise the front passenger’s

side wiper arm.

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing

the wiper blade. Holding the wiper

blade, may result in blade deforma-

tion.

1 Lock knob

2. Hold the wiper blade connection by

hand, push the lock knob to release the

lock, and then pull out the wiper blade

assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the

lock knob. The lock knob may be

scratched.

3. When installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, align it with the wiper arm

connection part and then slide it in the

opposite direction of removal to install.

After installing the wiper blade assem-

bly, check that the connection part is

locked completely.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of Wiper Blades

485

Maintenance and Service

(488,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Window Wiper Blade Rubber

s11az05

Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.

1 Slit

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber from the

right side in the order of (1), (2) and (3)

until the slit on the wiper blade can be

seen position.

2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber

through the slit to remove it.

3. Insert a new wiper blade rubber into

the slit. Do not insert the wiper blade

rubber into the wrong slit.

Replacement of Wiper Blades

486

(489,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Rear Window Wiper Blade

Assembly

s11az03

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

& Rear Window Wiper Blade

Rubber

s11az04

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1 Metal spines

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of Wiper Blades

487

Maintenance and Service

(490,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the

metal spines from the old blade rubber

and install them in the new blade

rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained

properly, the wiper may scratch the rear

window glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in

place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

11-20. Battery

s11ba

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over

a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

Battery

488

(491,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer. Wash hands after handling.

Q-85 Battery (Type-B)

1 Cap

2 Upper level

3 Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water. Refer to

“Electrical System” �P507.

For “SUBARU STARLINK Safety and

Security” without navigation system:

When the vehicle battery is discharged or

replaced, certain internal settings can be

restored only by pairing the vehicle to a

smartphone via Bluetooth, or by visiting a

SUBARU dealer. Until those internal set-

tings are restored, certain convenience

features, including the “Service Appoint-

ment Scheduler,” may be unavailable.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

NOTE

To avoid battery drain, do not use

electric power (e.g., lights, wipers,

climate control, seat heaters, etc.) for

longer than necessary when the engine

is off. If using the radio, room lights or

other electrical equipment with the

engine off, even in the ignition switch

is in the “ACC” position, the battery will

drain.

Battery

489

Maintenance and Service

(492,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

11-21. Fuses

s11bb

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having

a higher rating or with material other

than a fuse because serious damage

or a fire could result.

NOTE

Fuse rating and used circuit are de-

scribed on behind each fuse box cover.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

1 Spare fuses

2 Fuse puller

The other one (main fuse box) is housed in

the engine compartment. Also, the spare

fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse

box cover.

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller

when removing it from the main fuse box.

1 Good

2 Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the corre-

sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover.

Fuses

490

(493,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a pro-

blem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

repairs.

11-22. Installation of Acces-

sories

s11bd

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle. We recommend that you

install only genuine SUBARU accessories

on your vehicle.

11-23. Replacing Bulbs

s11be

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is

the risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire. For the specified

wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb

Chart” �P509. For replacement,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

Do not touch the glass portion of the

light bulb with bare hands. When

holding the glass portion is unavoid-

able, hold it with a clean dry cloth to

avoid getting moisture and grease

on the bulb. If there are any finger-

prints or grease on the bulb surface,

wipe them away with a soft cloth

moistened with alcohol. Also, if the

bulb is scratched or dropped, it may

blow out or crack.

– CONTINUED –

Installation of Accessories

491

Maintenance and Service

(494,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Headlights

s11be18

LED headlight warning light

The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.

We recommend that you have your vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

& Front Turn Signal Light, Po-

sition Light and Front Side

Marker Light (If Equipped)

s11be03

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We

recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

& Rear Combination Lights

s11be05

1. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clips of the covers.

2. Remove the side cover.

3. Remove the upper and lower screws.

4. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly rearward to remove it from the

vehicle.

Replacing Bulbs

492

(495,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

1 Rear turn signal light

6. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning

it counterclockwise.

7. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.

8. Set the bulb holder into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

9. Reconnect the electrical connector.

10. Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged

part of the combination light assembly

securely to each holder of the vehicle

side.

11. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

12. Reinstall the side cover.

& Back-Up Light

s11be50

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing Bulbs

493

Maintenance and Service

(496,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch. Apply a flat-head screwdriver

to the light cover as shown in the

illustration, and pry the light cover off

from the rear gate trim.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& License Plate Light

s11be07

1. License plate light must be pushed

outwards, then pulled out to be re-

moved.

Replacing Bulbs

494

(497,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the

license plate light cover.

& Other Bulbs

s11be29

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

& Adjusting Headlight Aim

s11be57

1 Adjustment screw A

2 Adjustment screw B

! Before checking the headlight aim-

ing

s11be5701

1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of

gasoline and the area around the

headlight is not deformed.

2. Park the vehicle on level ground.

3. Sit in the driver’s seat.

4. Bounce the vehicle several times.

! Headlight aim adjustment

s11be5702

1 Adjustment direction mark

1. Turn the screw A clockwise or counter-

clockwise to adjust it.

Remember the direction of the rotation

and number of rotations.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing Bulbs

495

Maintenance and Service

(498,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

1 Adjustment direction mark

2. Turn screw B the same number of turns

and in the same direction as step 2.

NOTE

. If the headlight aim cannot be ad-

justed, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

. To inspect of the headlight aim

position, consult a SUBARU dealer.

11-24. Replacing Battery

s11bk

The access key fob/transmitter battery

may be discharged under the following

conditions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable.

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable.

. The transmitter does not operate prop-

erly when used within the standard

distance.

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key fob/transmit-

ter when replacing battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the ac-

cess key fob/transmitter when

replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

. Batteries shall not be exposed to

excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals.

It may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

should be replaced by a SUBARU

dealer.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the access key fob/transmitter

functions properly.

Replacing Battery

496

(499,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob

s11bk01

CAUTION

. When removing or fitting the

access key fob cover, make sure

that the plastic part does not

come off or become misaligned.

. Before replacing the battery, re-

move any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or

equivalent

1 Release button

2 Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap

to remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the

figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

by fitting the projections and recesses

together.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing Battery

497

Maintenance and Service

(500,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Replacing Battery of Trans-

mitter

s11bk02

CAUTION

Before replacing the battery, remove

any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR2025 or

equivalent

1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

1 Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a new

battery (type CR2025 or equivalent)

making sure to install the new battery

with the negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “

” or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

Replacing Battery

498

(501,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(502,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(503,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s12

12-1. Specifications ............................................... 502

Dimensions ........................................................ 502

Engine................................................................503

Fuel....................................................................503

Engine Oil ..........................................................504

Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil... 506

Fluids ................................................................. 506

Engine Coolant................................................... 507

Electrical System................................................507

Tires................................................................... 507

Temporary Spare Tires........................................ 508

Brake Disc..........................................................508

12-2. Bulb Chart......................................................509

Safety Precautions ............................................. 509

Bulb Chart ......................................................... 510

12-3. Vehicle Identification.....................................512

12-4. Function Settings ..........................................513

Function Settings and Adjustments on

the Center Information Display ......................... 513

Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding

Center Information Display ............................... 513

Function Settings and Adjustments Performed

by a Dealer ...................................................... 513

Specifications

(504,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

12-1. Specifications s12aa

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

s12aa01

in (mm)

Item

Overall length 176.4 (4,480)

Overall width 70.9 (1,800)

Overall height

63.0 (1,600)*

62.8 (1,595)*

Wheel base 105.1 (2,670)

Tread

Front 61.2 (1,555)

Rear 61.2 (1,555)

Ground clearance*

8.7 (220)

*1: Models with roof rails

*2: Models without roof rails

*3: Measured with vehicle empty

Specifications

502

(505,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Engine

s12aa02

Engine model FB20 (2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo) FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,

4 stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,

4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 122 (1,995) 152 (2,498)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)

Compression ratio 12.5 : 1 12.0 : 1

Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

& Fuel

s12aa08

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

For more details, refer to “

Fuel” �P307.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

503

Specifications

(506,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Engine Oil

s12aa12

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine Oil” �P465.

NOTE

Have the procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended that

you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

s12aa1201

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

! Alternative engine oil

s12aa1202

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

. Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on

the temperature and other factors.

. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower

viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the

engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.

. When adding oil, you may use different brands together as long as they are the same ILSAC and API classification and SAE

viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.

Specifications

504

(507,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-6B, which can be identi-

fied with the ILSAC certification

mark (Shield mark)

0W-16 synthetic oil is the required oil for

optimum engine performance and protection.

Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is

unavailable.

*: If 0W-16 synthetic oil is not available, 0W-20

conventional oil may be used if replenish-

ment is needed but should be changed to

0W-16 synthetic oil at the next oil change.

· Adding the oil from L to F

level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9

Imp qt)

· Changing the oil and oil

filter:

4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9

Imp qt)

· Changing the oil:

4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7

Imp qt)

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-6A, which can be identi-

fied with the ILSAC certification

mark (Starburst mark)

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SP with the

words “RESOURCE CONSER-

VING”

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

505

Specifications

(508,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil

s12aa13

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)

API classification GL-5 (75W-90)

Oil capacity*

1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” �P472

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. Check the oil level after refilling the gearbox with oil.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.

& Fluids

s12aa10

Fluid Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable transmission

fluid

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

2.0 L engine models:

10.8 US qt (10.2 liters, 9.0 Imp qt)

2.5 L engine models:

11.9 US qt (11.3 liters, 9.9 lmp qt)

“

Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion Fluid” �P471

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid

—

“

Brake Fluid” �P472

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

Specifications

506

(509,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Engine Coolant

s12aa11

Coolant capacity Coolant type

2.0 L engine models 8.4 US qt (7.9 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)

SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

2.5 L engine models

8.9 US qt (8.4 liters, 7.4 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “

Cooling System” �P467.

& Electrical System

s12aa03

Battery type

Type-A LN2

Type-B Q-85

Alternator

2.0 L engine models 12 V 130 A

2.5 L engine models 12 V 150 A

Spark plugs

2.0 L engine models

DILKAR7Q8(NGK)

2.5 L engine models

& Tires

s12aa05

Tire size 225/60R17 99H 225/55R18 98V

Wheel size 17 6 7 J 18 6 7 J

Pressure

Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts

by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,

refer to “

Changing a Flat Tire” �P429.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

507

Specifications

(510,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Temporary Spare Tires

s12aa15

Temporary spare tire size T145/80 D17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure

(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

& Brake Disc

s12aa18

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.

Specifications

508

(511,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

12-2. Bulb Chart

s12ac

& Safety Precautions

s12ac03

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

– CONTINUED –

Bulb Chart

509

Specifications

(512,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Bulb Chart

s12ac04

NOTE

Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

Bulb Chart

510

(513,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Wattage Bulb No.

1 Vanity mirror lights 12 V-2 W —

2 Map lights 12 V-8 W —

3 Dome light 12 V-8 W —

4 Front position lights (if equipped) 12 V-28 W/8 W 7444NA

Front turn signal lights (if equipped) 12 V-28 W/8 W 7444NA

5 Backup light 12 V-16 W W16W

6 Cargo area light 12 V-5 W W5W

7 License plate lights 12 V-5 W W5W

8 Rear turn signal lights 12 V-21 W WY21W

9 Front side marker light (if equipped) 12 V-5 W W5W

A Low and high beam headlights — —

Daytime running light — —

B Front fog lights (if equipped) — —

C Front turn signal lights (if equipped) — —

D Front position lights (if equipped) — —

E Front side marker light (if equipped) — —

Accessory lamp (if equipped) — —

F Side turn signal lights — —

G High-mounted stop light — —

H Stop lights — —

I Tail lights — —

Rear side marker lights — —

Bulb Chart

511

Specifications

(514,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

12-3. Vehicle Identification

s12ad

1 Vehicle identification number (if

equipped) (under the floor carpet of the

right-hand front seat)

2 Emission control label

3 Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle

placard)

4 Certification label

5 Vehicle identification number

6 Model number label

7 Fuel label

8 Air conditioner label

Vehicle Identification

512

(515,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

12-4. Function Settings s12ag

& Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display

s12ag01

Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to

“Center Information Display (CID)” �P188.

& Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display

s12ag02

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 135

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

126

& Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer

s12ag03

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

Alarm system

Monitoring start delay time (after closing doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light illumination ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access with push-button Audible signal volume* Level 1 to 7 Level 6

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal volume* Level 1 to 7 Level 6

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto dimmer cancel

Sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer

cancel

OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/

Max

Mid

High beam assist function High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Reverse gear interlocked rear

wiper

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation Operation/Non-operation

U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation

Other models: Operation

*: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

Function Settings

513

Specifications

(516,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(517,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s13

13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 516

13-2. Tire Information ............................................ 516

Tire Labeling ...................................................... 516

Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure................. 518

Glossary of Tire Terminology .............................. 519

Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices ..... 524

Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine ...............524

Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle

Load Capacities................................................ 527

Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading

on Handling and Stopping and on Tires ............ 528

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit........... 528

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards.....529

TREADWEAR ..................................................... 529

TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 529

TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 529

13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA)...................530

13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada

in Order to Report a Safety Concern

Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) .................531

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(518,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

13-1. For U.S.A.

s13aa

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

13-2. Tire Information

s13ab

& Tire Labeling

s13ab01

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These marking

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

s13ab0101

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

s13ab010101

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as

passenger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating

Descriptions

s13ab010102

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

For U.S.A.

516

(519,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum

load a tire can carry at the

speed indicated by its speed

symbol, at maximum inflation

pressure.

For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs

(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600

kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s cap-

ability to travel at established

and predetermined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

s13ab0102

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

Type A

(1) DOT symbol*

(2) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(3) Tire Size Code

(4) Tire Type Code

(5) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

517

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(520,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Type B

(1) DOT symbol*

(2) Plant Code

(3) Manufacturer’s Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

! Other markings

s13ab0103

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

s13ab010301

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “350 kPa

(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

! Maximum load rating

s13ab010302

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg

(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

s13ab010303

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

s13ab010304

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1

NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-

STER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-

ing (UTQG)

s13ab010305

For details, refer to “Uniform Tire

Quality Grading Standards” �P529.

& Recommended Tire Inflation

Pressure

s13ab02

! Recommended cold tire in-

flation pressure

s13ab0201

For the recommended cold tire

inflation pressure for your vehicle’s

tires, refer to “

Tires” �P507.

Tire Information

518

(521,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

! Vehicle placard

s13ab0202

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety conse-

quences of under-inflation

s13ab0203

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper

inflation

s13ab0204

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a short

distance warms up the tires and

increases the tire pressures. Also,

the tire pressures are affected by

the outside temperature. It is best to

check tire pressure outdoors before

driving the vehicle. When a tire

becomes warm, the air inside it

expands, causing the tire pressure

to increase. Be careful not to mis-

takenly release air from a warm tire

to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of Tire Terminology

s13ab03

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

519

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(522,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white letter-

ing or bears manufacturer,

brand, and/or model name

molding that is higher or

deeper than the same mold-

ing on the other sidewall of

the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that

has a particular side that

must always face outward

when mounting on a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

Tire Information

520

(523,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

521

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(524,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or pro-

tective bands.

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound

from the cord material in the side-

wall.

. Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index

equal to or greater than 110, com-

pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan-

dard Reference Test Tire, when

using the snow traction test as

described in ASTM F-1805-00,

Standard Test Method for Single

Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered

Surfaces, and that is marked with

an Alpine Symbol “

” on at least

one sidewall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

. Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

Tire Information

522

(525,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section) and

dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

523

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(526,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

& Tire Care – Maintenance and

Safety Practices

s13ab04

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious da-

mage, nails, and stones. At the

same time, check the tires for

abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become

visible. When a tire’s tread wear

indicator becomes visible, the

tire is worn beyond the accepta-

ble limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at even low

speeds in wet weather can cause

the vehicle to hydroplane. Possi-

ble resulting loss of vehicle con-

trol can lead to an accident.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 6,000 miles (10,000

km). For details about tire rota-

tion, refer to “

Tire Rotation”

�P480

. Replace any damaged

or unevenly worn tire at the time

of rotation. After tire rotation,

adjust the tire pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are

correctly tightened. For informa-

tion about the tightening torque

and tightening sequence for the

wheel nuts, refer to “

Flat Tires”

�P429.

& Vehicle Load Limit – How to

Determine

s13ab05

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side

B-pillar. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s

placard.

The vehicle placard also shows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue load

of a trailer (if applicable))

! Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

s13ab0501

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Tire Information

524

(527,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo

can be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to two), the calculations

are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

525

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(528,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or

more.

Example 2A

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither de-

signed nor intended to be

used for trailer towing. There-

fore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer

weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of

the trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo

can be carried.

Tire Information

526

(529,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Example 2B

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither de-

signed nor intended to be

used for trailer towing. There-

fore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or

more.

& Determining Compatibility of

Tire and Vehicle Load Capa-

cities

s13ab06

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label affixed to

the driver’s door.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

527

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(530,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse Safety Conse-

quences of Overloading on

Handling and Stopping and

on Tires

s13ab07

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, vehicle

and tire as shown in the following.

This could lead to an accident and

possibly result in severe personal

injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could

break or experience accelerated

wear that will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

s13ab08

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and

there will be five 150 lbs (68 kg)

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs

(1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650

lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

Tire Information

528

(531,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards

s13ac

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& TREADWEAR

s13ac02

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& TRACTION AA, A, B, C

s13ac03

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteris-

tics.

& TEMPERATURE A, B, C

s13ac04

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

– CONTINUED –

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

529

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(532,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

13-4. Reporting Safety De-

fects (USA)

s13ah

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Subaru of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer,

or Subaru of America, Inc. To

contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.

gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,

SE, West Building, Washington, DC

20590. You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.

gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (USA)

530

(533,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

13-5. How to Contact Trans-

port Canada in Order to Re-

port a Safety Concern

Relating to the Vehicle

(Canada)

s13cf

How to Contact Transport Canada in Order to Report a Safety Concern Relating to the Vehicle (Canada)

531

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(534,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(535,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

s14

Index

(536,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

There is an illustrated index in this Owner’s Manual. If you have

difficulty finding your target items in the index, try to use the

illustrated index.

Illustrated index ......................................................... 15

11.6-inch display models............................................ 190

Abbreviation ................................................................ 4

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .................................... 336

Warning light ........................................................ 164

Access key

Warning indicator.................................................. 170

Access key fob ......................................................... 108

Warning indicator.................................................. 170

Accessories ............................................................. 491

Accessory power outlet ............................................. 288

Activation of valet mode ............................................ 230

Air cleaner element ................................................... 469

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control ....................................... 267

Manual climate control system ............................... 269

Air filtration system ................................................... 275

Airflow mode selection............................................... 269

Alarm system ........................................................... 133

All season tires......................................................... 474

All-Wheel Drive......................................................... 399

All-Wheel Drive Warning Light ................................ 168

All-Wheel Drive warning light.................................. 168

All-Wheel Drive warning light...................................... 168

All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................. 168

Alloy wheel .............................................................. 482

Cleaning ............................................................. 449

Antenna .................................................................. 280

Roof antenna....................................................... 280

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).................................... 336

Arming the system.................................................... 133

Armrest ..................................................................... 41

Ashtray ................................................................... 296

Assist grip ............................................................... 297

AT OIL TEMP warning light........................................ 162

Audio

Antenna .............................................................. 280

Set ..................................................................... 280

Auto dimmer cancel function...................................... 156

Auto on/off headlights ............................................... 232

Sensor................................................................ 234

Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon.............................. 194, 220

Auto Start Stop system ............................................. 353

Indicator light................................................ 177, 353

No Activity Detected indicator light .................. 178, 357

OFF indicator light......................................... 177, 356

ON/OFF icon ................................................ 194, 220

Warning light ................................................ 177, 356

Auto Vehicle Hold..................................................... 348

Function.............................................................. 348

ON indicator light ................................................. 167

ON/OFF icon ................................................ 194, 220

Auto Vehicle Hold function......................................... 348

Auto Vehicle Hold icon .............................................. 220

Auto-dimming mirror/compass............................. 248, 249

Index

534

(537,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Automatic climate control operation............................. 267

Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................... 240

Warning light ........................................................ 176

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ............................................... 43

Automatic transmission

Fluid.................................................................... 471

Battery .................................................................... 488

Drainage prevention function.................................. 132

Drainage reduction functions .......................... 132, 152

Jump starting ....................................................... 433

Replacement (access key fob) ............................... 497

Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ......... 324

Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 498

Vehicle battery...................................................... 488

Blind Spot Detection (BSD)........................................ 363

Booster cushion......................................................... 66

Booster seat.............................................................. 66

Bottle holder............................................................. 288

Brake ...................................................................... 334

Assist .................................................................. 335

Breaking-in of new brake pads ............................... 474

Disc .................................................................... 508

Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators ................ 335

Fluid............................................................ 472, 506

Pad ..................................................................... 474

Parking................................................................ 345

Pedal .................................................................. 473

Tips..................................................................... 334

Brake system........................................................... 334

Assist ................................................................. 335

Warning light ....................................................... 165

Braking ................................................................... 334

Tips .................................................................... 334

Breaking-in of new brake pads................................... 474

BSD/RCTA .............................................................. 362

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer .................. 366

OFF indicator................................................ 178, 368

Warning indicator .......................................... 178, 368

Warning volume ................................................... 367

Bulb

Chart .................................................................. 509

Replacement ....................................................... 491

Camera

Rear view camera ................................................ 358

Cargo area

Cover ................................................................. 300

Light ............................................................ 283, 491

Tie-down hooks ................................................... 302

Catalytic converter.................................................... 397

Center console......................................................... 286

Center information display (CID) ................................ 188

11.6-inch display models ....................................... 190

Cleaning ............................................................. 452

Display Off .......................................................... 195

Dual 7.0-inch display models ................................. 213

Changing

Coolant ............................................................... 469

Index

535

Index

(538,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Engine oil and oil filter........................................... 466

Flat tire................................................................ 429

Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 466

Washer fluid......................................................... 483

Charge warning light ................................................. 162

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light...................................................................... 161

Checking

Coolant level ........................................................ 468

Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 472

Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 483

Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 465

Child restraint systems ............................................... 56

Installation of a booster cushion .............................. 66

Installation of a booster seat ................................... 66

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ........................... 61

Lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)..................... 68

Top tether anchorages............................................ 72

Child safety................................................................. 5

Locks .................................................................. 136

Chime

Key reminder........................................................ 149

Light.................................................................... 231

Seatbelt ............................................................... 157

Cleaning

Alloy wheels......................................................... 449

Center information display ..................................... 452

Exterior care ........................................................ 448

Interior................................................................. 451

Ventilation grille .................................................... 274

Climate control system .............................................. 262

Automatic............................................................ 267

Manual ............................................................... 269

Clock ...................................................................... 227

Time zone ........................................................... 229

Clutch

Fluid ................................................................... 506

Coat hook................................................................ 298

Combination meter display (color LCD) ....................... 180

Compass.......................................................... 248, 249

Console

Center ................................................................ 286

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ................... 326

Fluid ............................................................ 471, 506

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) .......... 162

Convenient tie-down hooks........................................ 302

Coolant ............................................................ 468, 507

Changing ............................................................ 469

Temperature Gauge.............................................. 154

Cooling system ........................................................ 467

Corrosion protection.................................................. 450

Cup holder............................................................... 287

Front passenger’s ................................................ 287

Rear passenger’s................................................. 287

Daytime running light (DRL) system............................ 238

Deactivation of valet mode ........................................ 231

Defogger ................................................................. 246

Defrosting................................................................ 273

Deicer ..................................................................... 246

Differential gear oil ................................................... 472

Index

536

(539,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Front ................................................................... 506

Rear.................................................................... 506

Dimensions .............................................................. 502

Disarming the alarm system....................................... 134

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ...................... 335

Display off icon......................................................... 218

Dome light ....................................................... 282, 491

Door

Locks .................................................................. 128

Open indicator...................................................... 168

Unlock selection function ....................................... 115

Double trip meter ...................................................... 153

Drainage reduction functions .............................. 132, 152

Drive belts ............................................................... 471

DriverFocus ............................................................. 382

Driver Monitoring System................................... 209, 382

OFF indicator light ................................................ 179

Operation indicator light......................................... 179

Temporary stop indicator light................................. 180

Warning light ........................................................ 179

Driving

All-Wheel Drive model ........................................... 399

Drinking .................................................................. 7

Drugs ..................................................................... 7

Foreign countries.................................................. 398

Off road ............................................................... 400

Pets ....................................................................... 8

Snowy and icy roads............................................. 403

Tips............................................................. 331, 399

Tired or sleepy ........................................................ 7

Winter................................................................. 402

Dual 7.0-inch display models ..................................... 213

Electrical system ...................................................... 507

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system ........ 336

Warning .............................................................. 166

Electronic parking brake ............................................ 345

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ...... 347

Indicator light....................................................... 166

Switch................................................................. 345

Warning ....................................................... 166, 351

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 42

Engine .................................................................... 503

Compartment overview ......................................... 464

Coolant ........................................................ 468, 507

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)......................... 6, 396

Hood .................................................................. 462

Hood open warning light ....................................... 168

Hood release knob ............................................... 462

Low oil level warning indicator ............................... 162

Oil ............................................................... 465, 504

Overheating......................................................... 435

Starting & stopping........................................ 313, 315

Event data recorder .................................................... 12

Exterior care ............................................................ 448

Flat tires.................................................................. 429

Floor mat................................................................. 298

Index

537

Index

(540,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Fluid

Brake .................................................................. 472

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................ 471

Fluid level ............................................................ 506

Fluid level

Brake .................................................................. 472

Continuously variable transmission ......................... 471

Fog light .................................................................. 240

Indicator light........................................................ 177

Switch ................................................................. 240

Front

Differential gear oil........................................ 472, 506

Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ........................................................... 160

Passenger’s seatbelt warning light.......................... 157

Seatbelt pretensioners............................................ 52

Turn signal light .................................................... 492

Front seats................................................................ 30

Forward and backward adjustment .......................... 33

Head restraint adjustment ....................................... 34

Manual seat .......................................................... 33

Power seat............................................................ 33

Reclining ......................................................... 33, 34

Seat height adjustment........................................... 33

Seat height adjustment (Driver’s seat) ...................... 34

Fuel ................................................................ 307, 503

Consumption indicator........................................... 185

Economy hints...................................................... 396

Filler lid and cap ................................................... 308

Gauge ................................................................. 154

Low fuel warning light............................................ 167

Requirements ............................................... 307, 503

Tank capacity....................................................... 503

Fuses...................................................................... 490

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................. 407

Glove box................................................................ 285

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ........................ 407

Hazard warning flasher ...................................... 152, 426

Head restraint adjustment

Front seat ............................................................ 34

Rear seat ............................................................. 39

Headlight................................................................. 232

Aim adjustment.................................................... 495

Beam leveler ....................................................... 240

Control switch...................................................... 231

Flasher ............................................................... 235

Indicator light....................................................... 177

Warning light ....................................................... 177

Welcome lighting function...................................... 233

High Beam Assist

Function.............................................................. 235

Indicator.............................................................. 176

High/low beam change (dimmer) ................................ 234

Hill descent control ................................................... 342

Indicator.............................................................. 178

Hill start assist ......................................................... 352

Hill start assist system .............................................. 352

HomeLink

............................................................... 249

Index

538

(541,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Hook

Coat.................................................................... 298

Convenient tie-down ............................................. 302

Shopping bag....................................................... 299

Towing and tie-down ............................................. 436

Horn........................................................................ 259

Hose and connections ............................................... 468

Icy road surface warning indicator............................... 178

Ignition switch .......................................................... 148

Light.................................................................... 149

Illumination brightness control .................................... 155

Immobilizer .............................................................. 123

Indicator light

Auto Start Stop..................................................... 177

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected ....................... 178

Auto Start Stop OFF ............................................. 177

Auto Vehicle Hold ON ........................................... 167

BSD/RCTA OFF ........................................... 178, 368

Door open............................................................ 168

Driver Monitoring System OFF ............................... 179

Driver Monitoring System operation ........................ 179

Driver Monitoring System temporary stop ........ 180, 389

Electronic parking brake ........................................ 166

Front fog light....................................................... 177

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF.......... 160

Headlight ............................................................. 177

High beam ........................................................... 176

High beam assist .......................................... 176, 235

Hill descent control ............................................... 178

Immobilizer.......................................................... 175

Intelligent (I) mode ........................................ 176, 332

Malfunction.......................................................... 161

RAB OFF ............................................................ 179

Security ....................................................... 123, 175

Select lever/Gear position ..................................... 176

SI-DRIVE ............................................................ 176

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF ..................................... 179

Sonar audible alarm OFF...................................... 179

Sport (S) mode ............................................. 176, 332

Sport Sharp (S#) mode......................................... 176

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF....................... 177

Turn signal .......................................................... 176

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF .............................. 170

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ....................... 169

X-MODE ............................................................. 178

Indicator/Indicator light

Auto Start Stop ............................................. 177, 353

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected ............... 178, 357

Auto Start Stop OFF...................................... 177, 356

Auto Vehicle Hold.......................................... 167, 348

Door open........................................................... 168

Driver Monitoring System OFF............................... 179

Driver Monitoring System operation................. 179, 389

Driver Monitoring System temporary stop......... 180, 389

Electronic parking brake................................. 166, 345

Front fog light ...................................................... 177

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF ......... 160

Headlight............................................................. 177

High beam ................................................... 176, 232

High Beam Assist.......................................... 176, 235

Index

539

Index

(542,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Hill descent control ....................................... 178, 343

Intelligent (I) mode ........................................ 176, 332

RAB OFF.............................................. 179, 374, 380

Select lever/Gear position ...................................... 176

SI-DRIVE..................................................... 176, 332

Sonar audible alarm OFF ...................................... 179

Sport (S) mode............................................. 176, 332

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF ....................... 177

Turn signal........................................................... 176

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF....................... 170, 337

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ................ 169, 337

X-MODE...................................................... 178, 341

Inside mirror............................................................. 247

Interior lights ............................................................ 282

Jack and jack handle ................................................ 428

Jack-up point............................................................ 429

Jump starting ........................................................... 433

Key ......................................................................... 108

Access key fob ............................................. 108, 124

Number plate ....................................................... 108

Positions.............................................................. 148

Reminder chime ................................................... 149

Replacement........................................................ 123

Keyless access with push-button start system .............. 108

Disabling keyless access functions ......................... 118

Locking and unlocking doors .................................. 112

Warning chimes and warning indicator ............ 121, 170

When access key fob does not operate properly...... 441

Keyless entry system ................................................ 124

Lane Change Assist (LCA) ........................................ 363

Lap belt pretensioner .................................................. 54

Leather seat materials............................................... 451

LED headlight warning light ................................ 177, 492

LED headlights......................................................... 492

License plate light .................................................... 494

Lifting Cargo Cover................................................... 300

Light

Back-up .............................................................. 510

Back-up (Sedan) .................................................. 493

Back-up/Rear fog (Sedan)..................................... 493

Back-up/Rear fog light (if equipped) ....................... 493

Backup ............................................................... 510

Cargo area........................................... 283, 491, 510

Control switch...................................................... 231

Daytime running................................................... 238

Dome .................................................. 282, 491, 510

Front fog ............................................................. 240

Front side marker................................................. 232

Front turn signal................................................... 492

Ignition switch...................................................... 149

License plate ....................................................... 494

Map..................................................... 282, 491, 510

Rear combination.......................................... 492, 510

Rear fog....................................................... 493, 510

Rear turn signal .................................... 241, 492, 510

Turn signal ........................................... 241, 492, 510

Index

540

(543,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Vanity mirror.......................................... 284, 491, 510

Loading your vehicle ................................................. 406

Low fuel warning light................................................ 167

Low tire pressure warning light ................................... 163

Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) ........... 68

Lower and top tether anchorage .................................. 68

Maintenance

Precautions.......................................................... 457

Schedule ............................................................. 457

Seatbelt ................................................................ 50

Tips..................................................................... 460

Tools ................................................................... 428

Malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE

warning light)......................................................... 161

Manual

Climate control ..................................................... 269

Mode (continuously variable transmission) ............... 330

Seat ..................................................................... 33

Manual transmission oil ............................................. 506

Map light .................................................. 282, 491, 510

Maximum load limits.................................................. 415

Meters and gauges ................................................... 152

Mirror defogger......................................................... 246

Mirrors..................................................................... 247

Moonroof ......................................................... 140, 445

Switch ................................................................. 141

New vehicle break-in driving ...................................... 396

Odometer ................................................................ 153

Off road driving ........................................................ 400

Oil filter ................................................................... 466

Oil level

Differential gear ................................................... 472

Engine ................................................................ 465

Warning light ....................................................... 162

Oil pressure warning light .......................................... 162

On-road and off-road driving ......................................... 9

One-touch lane changer ............................................ 241

Outside

Mirror defogger .................................................... 246

Mirrors ................................................................ 256

Overheating engine .................................................. 435

Parking ................................................................... 345

Brake.................................................................. 345

Tips .................................................................... 351

Parking your vehicle

Parking Brake...................................................... 345

Tips .................................................................... 351

Passenger seatbelt reminder ..................................... 157

Periodic inspections.................................................. 398

Petrol fuel................................................................ 307

PIN Code Access ..................................................... 115

PIN Code Lock......................................................... 230

Power

Outlets................................................................ 288

Outside mirrors .................................................... 257

Index

541

Index

(544,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Seat ..................................................................... 33

Steering............................................................... 333

Steering warning light............................................ 168

Window switches .................................................. 137

Windows.............................................................. 136

Precautions against vehicle modification................ 55, 104

Preparing to drive ..................................................... 312

Push-button

Ignition switch ...................................................... 150

Starting and stopping engine.................................. 315

Rear

Combination lights ................................................ 492

Differential gear oil........................................ 472, 506

Gate.................................................................... 442

Turn signal light .................................................... 492

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA).................................. 364

Rear gate ................................................................ 139

Rear Seat Reminder .................................................. 56

Rear seatbelt warning light......................................... 159

Rear seats ................................................................ 37

Armrest ................................................................ 41

Folding down......................................................... 37

Head restraint adjustment ....................................... 39

Rear view camera..................................................... 358

Rear window

Defogger ............................................................. 246

Wiper and washer switch....................................... 244

Wiper blade rubber ............................................... 487

Wiper blades........................................................ 487

Recommended

Brake fluid........................................................... 506

Clutch fluid .......................................................... 506

Continuously variable transmission fluid.................. 506

Differential gear oil ............................................... 472

Engine oil............................................................ 504

Front differential gear oil ....................................... 506

Manual transmission oil ........................................ 506

Rear differential gear oil........................................ 506

Spark plugs ......................................................... 507

Refueling................................................................. 308

Remote control mirror switch ..................................... 257

Remote engine start system ...................................... 319

Replacing battery ................................................. 324

Remote keyless entry system .................................... 124

Replacing battery ................................................. 496

Replacement

Access key fob battery.......................................... 497

Air cleaner element .............................................. 470

Brake pad ........................................................... 473

Cabin air filter ...................................................... 276

Key .................................................................... 123

Remote engine start transmitter battery .................. 324

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ......... 127, 498

Tire..................................................................... 481

Wheel ................................................................. 482

Wiper blade rubber............................................... 484

Wiper blades ....................................................... 484

Replacing bulbs ....................................................... 491

Back-up light (Sedan) ........................................... 493

Back-up light/Rear fog light (if equipped)................. 493

Index

542

(545,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Back-up light/Rear fog light (Sedan)........................ 493

Front turn signal light ............................................ 492

Headlight ............................................................. 492

License plate light ................................................. 494

Rear combination light........................................... 492

Rear turn signal light ............................................. 492

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

OFF indicator ....................................................... 179

ON/OFF setting .................................................... 380

Warning indicator.......................................... 179, 381

Rocking the vehicle................................................... 406

Roof

Antenna............................................................... 280

Molding and crossbar ............................................ 409

Roof rails ................................................................. 408

Roof tent ................................................................. 410

Safety

Precautions when driving .......................................... 5

Symbol ................................................................... 4

Warnings ................................................................ 3

Seat

Fabric.................................................................. 451

Front .................................................................... 30

Heater .................................................................. 35

Height adjustment.................................................. 34

Manual ................................................................. 33

Power................................................................... 33

Rear..................................................................... 37

Seatbelt ................................................................. 5, 41

Extender .............................................................. 50

Fastening ............................................................. 43

Maintenance......................................................... 50

Pretensioners ....................................................... 52

Safety tips............................................................ 41

Warning light and chime........................................ 157

Security

Alarm system....................................................... 133

Immobilizer.......................................................... 123

Indicator light....................................................... 175

Select lever ............................................................. 327

Position indicator.................................................. 176

Shift lock function................................................. 328

Shift paddle ............................................................. 330

Shopping bag hook................................................... 299

Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 53

SI-DRIVE ................................................................ 332

Indicator light....................................................... 176

Intelligent (I) mode indicator ........................... 176, 332

Mode .................................................................. 332

Sport (S) mode indicator ....................................... 332

Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator............................ 176

Switch................................................................. 332

Snow tires ........................................................ 405, 475

Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 403

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator ............................ 179

Sounding a panic alarm ............................................ 127

Spark plugs ...................................................... 471, 507

Specifications........................................................... 502

Speedometer ........................................................... 152

Index

543

Index

(546,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System

airbag)................................................................ 5, 74

System monitors................................................... 102

System servicing .................................................. 103

System warning light ................................ 83, 102, 160

Starting & stopping engine ................................. 313, 315

State emission testing (U.S. only) ............................... 311

Steering lock .................................................... 315, 318

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ......................... 238

OFF indicator light ........................................ 177, 238

OFF switch .......................................................... 238

Warning light ........................................................ 177

Steering wheel

Heater ................................................................. 258

Lock............................................................ 315, 318

Power.................................................................. 333

Tilt/telescopic ....................................................... 257

Warning light ........................................................ 168

Storage compartment................................................ 285

Summer tires............................................................ 474

Sun visors................................................................ 283

Sunshade ................................................................ 142

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ......................... 74

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) airbag ............ 5, 74

Curtain airbag .................................................. 81, 95

Driver’s airbag ....................................................... 81

Far-side airbag ................................................. 81, 95

Front passenger’s airbag ........................................ 81

Knee airbag .......................................................... 81

Seat cushion airbag ............................................... 81

Side airbag ...................................................... 81, 95

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 74

Curtain airbag....................................................... 95

Side airbag........................................................... 95

Synthetic leather upholstery....................................... 452

Tachometer.............................................................. 153

Temperature gauge................................................... 154

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP ...................................................... 162

Temporary spare tire.......................................... 426, 508

Tether (child restraint system) ................................ 68, 72

Tie-down hooks........................................................ 436

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ..................................... 257

Tire.................................................................. 474, 507

All season ........................................................... 474

Chains ................................................................ 405

Information .......................................................... 516

Inspection ........................................................... 476

Pressures and wear ............................................. 477

Replacement ....................................................... 481

Rotation .............................................................. 480

Size and pressure ................................................ 507

Summer .............................................................. 474

Types ................................................................. 474

Winter (snow) ...................................................... 475

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) .......................................... 163, 343, 432, 475

Screen................................................................ 345

Warning light ....................................................... 163

Tires and wheels ...................................................... 474

Index

544

(547,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Tools ....................................................................... 428

Top tether anchorages........................................... 68, 72

Towing..................................................................... 436

All wheels on the ground ....................................... 439

Flat-bed truck ....................................................... 439

Hooks.................................................................. 436

Tie-down hooks .................................................... 436

Weight................................................................. 415

Trailer

Connecting .......................................................... 413

Hitch (Outback) ............................................ 412, 418

Towing (Outback).................................................. 414

Towing tips........................................................... 420

Trip meter ................................................................ 153

Turn signal

Indicator lights ...................................................... 176

Lever................................................................... 241

Under-floor storage compartment................................ 302

USB power supply .................................................... 289

Valet mode....................................................... 135, 230

Vanity mirror............................................................. 284

Light............................................................ 284, 491

Vehicle

Capacity weight .................................................... 407

Identification......................................................... 512

Symbols ................................................................. 5

Vehicle Dynamics Control

Operation indicator light ........................................ 169

Warning light ....................................................... 169

Vehicle Dynamics Control icon ................................... 220

Vehicle Dynamics Control system............................... 337

OFF indicator light................................................ 170

Ventilator ................................................................. 262

Warning and indicator lights....................................... 156

Warning chimes

Driver Monitoring System ...................................... 389

Keyless access with push-button start system ......... 170

Seatbelt .............................................................. 157

Warning indicator

Access key.......................................................... 170

BSD/RCTA .......................................................... 178

Engine low oil level .............................................. 162

Icy road surface ................................................... 178

Keyless access with push-button start system ......... 170

RAB ............................................................ 179, 381

Warning light

ABS.................................................................... 164

All-Wheel Drive.................................................... 168

AT OIL TEMP ...................................................... 162

Auto Start Stop .................................................... 177

Automatic headlight beam leveler........................... 176

Brake system....................................................... 165

Charge ............................................................... 162

CHECK ENGINE.................................................. 161

Driver Monitoring System ...................................... 179

Index

545

Index

(548,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

Engine hood open ................................................ 168

Front passenger’s seatbelt..................................... 157

LED headlight ...................................................... 177

Low fuel............................................................... 167

Low tire pressure .................................................. 163

Oil pressure ......................................................... 162

Power steering ..................................................... 168

Rear seatbelt........................................................ 159

Seatbelt ............................................................... 157

SRS airbag system ............................................... 160

Steering Responsive Headlight............................... 177

Vehicle Dynamics Control ...................................... 169

Windshield washer fluid ......................................... 168

Warning light/Warning indicator

ABS .................................................................... 164

Access key .......................................................... 170

All-Wheel Drive..................................................... 168

AT OIL TEMP ....................................................... 162

Auto Start Stop............................................. 177, 356

Automatic headlight beam leveler ........................... 176

Brake system ....................................................... 165

Charge ................................................................ 162

Disc brake pad wear ............................................. 335

Driver Monitoring System............................... 179, 389

Engine hood open ................................................ 168

Engine low oil level ............................................... 162

Icy road surface.................................................... 178

Keyless access with push-button start system .......... 170

LED headlight .............................................. 177, 492

Low fuel............................................................... 167

Low tire pressure .......................................... 163, 343

Oil pressure......................................................... 162

Power steering.............................................. 168, 333

RAB .................................................... 179, 374, 381

Seatbelt .............................................................. 157

SRS airbag system ................................. 83, 102, 160

Steering Responsive Headlight .............................. 177

Vehicle Dynamics Control ..................................... 169

Windshield washer fluid ........................................ 168

Warranties .................................................................. 2

Warranties and maintenance ..................................... 415

Washing .................................................................. 448

Waxing and polishing ................................................ 449

Wear indicators ........................................................ 479

Welcome lighting function.......................................... 233

Wheel

Alloy ................................................................... 482

Balance .............................................................. 479

Nut tightening torque ..................................... 507, 508

Replacement ....................................................... 482

Windows ................................................................. 136

Windshield

Washer fluid ........................................................ 483

Washer fluid warning light ..................................... 168

Wiper and washer switches................................... 243

Wiper blades ....................................................... 485

Wiper deicer ........................................................ 246

Winter

Driving ................................................................ 402

Tires ............................................................ 405, 475

Wiper and washer .................................................... 241

Wiper deicer ............................................................ 246

Index

546

(549,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

X-MODE.................................................................. 340

Indicator .............................................................. 178

Index

547

Index

(550,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(551,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(552,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(553,1)

北米Model "A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 11/ 22

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Right Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

北米Model"A1520BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 10/ 21

GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA

& Fuel

S99AA01

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90

RON) or higher.

& Fuel Octane Rating

S99AA02

! AKI

S99AA0202

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI).

! RON

S99AA0201

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

& Limit of ethanol content

S99AA09

No more than 15%

& Fuel Tank Capacity

S99AA03

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

& Engine Oil

S99AA04

Use only the following oils.

. ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Com-

mittee) GF-6B, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Shield mark)

. or ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory

Committee) GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Starburst mark)

. or API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SP with

the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine Oil”

�P504.

& Engine Oil Capacity

S99AA05

4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.

Check the oil level using an oil level gauge after refilling the

engine with oil. For more details about maintenance and

service, refer to “Engine Oil” �P465.

& Cold Tire Pressure

S99AA06

Refer to “Tires” �P507.

Subaru 2024 Crosstrek Base

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2024 CROSSTREK BASE Questions and Answers

Related Products

‎MPN1BBTD004-00 Orion Motor Tech Pressure Bleeder, 2.5L Brake Pressure Bleeder with 50.7mm Adapter, 2.6qt Manual Power Brake Bleeder with 500mL Brake Bleeder Bottle Compatible with Ford Subaru Nissan Infinity

CBL0201 True Mods H6054 H4 LED Headlight Wiring Harness [Negative Switched Conversion] [Fused] Universal H4 Head Light Relay Harness Kit for 9003 H6024 5x7 7x6 4x6 Subaru Toyota Jeep Sealed Beam Headlamp

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT Leather

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited